Unidrive M200/201 User Guide Model size 1 to 6

Unidrive M200/201 User Guide Model size 1 to 6
User Guide
Unidrive M200/201
Model size 1 to 6
Variable Speed AC drive for induction
motors
Part Number: 0478-0042-04
Issue: 4
www.controltechniques.com
General information
The manufacturer accepts no liability for any consequences resulting from inappropriate, negligent or incorrect
installation or adjustment of the optional operating parameters of the equipment or from mismatching the variable speed
drive with the motor.
The contents of this guide are believed to be correct at the time of printing. In the interests of a commitment to a policy
of continuous development and improvement, the manufacturer reserves the right to change the specification of the
product or its performance, or the contents of the guide, without notice.
All rights reserved. No parts of this guide may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, electrical or
mechanical including photocopying, recording or by an information storage or retrieval system, without permission in
writing from the publisher.
Drive firmware version
This product is supplied with the latest firmware version. If this drive is to be connected to an existing system or machine,
all drive firmware versions should be verified to confirm the same functionality as drives of the same model already
present. This may also apply to drives returned from a Control Techniques Service Centre or Repair Centre. If there is
any doubt please contact the supplier of the product.
The firmware version of the drive can be checked by looking at Pr 11.029.
Environmental statement
Control Techniques is committed to minimising the environmental impacts of its manufacturing operations and of its
products throughout their life cycle. To this end, we operate an Environmental Management System (EMS) which is
certified to the International Standard ISO 14001. Further information on the EMS, our Environmental Policy and other
relevant information is available on request, or can be found at www.greendrives.com.
The electronic variable-speed drives manufactured by Control Techniques have the potential to save energy and
(through increased machine/process efficiency) reduce raw material consumption and scrap throughout their long
working lifetime. In typical applications, these positive environmental effects far outweigh the negative impacts of product
manufacture and end-of-life disposal.
Nevertheless, when the products eventually reach the end of their useful life, they must not be discarded but should
instead be recycled by a specialist recycler of electronic equipment. Recyclers will find the products easy to dismantle
into their major component parts for efficient recycling. Many parts snap together and can be separated without the use
of tools, while other parts are secured with conventional fasteners. Virtually all parts of the product are suitable for
recycling.
Product packaging is of good quality and can be re-used. Large products are packed in wooden crates, while smaller
products come in strong cardboard cartons which themselves have a high recycled fibre content. If not re-used, these
containers can be recycled. Polythene, used on the protective film and bags for wrapping product, can be recycled in the
same way. Control Techniques' packaging strategy prefers easily-recyclable materials of low environmental impact, and
regular reviews identify opportunities for improvement.
When preparing to recycle or dispose of any product or packaging, please observe local legislation and best practice.
REACH legislation
EC Regulation 1907/2006 on the Registration, Evaluation, Authorisation and restriction of Chemicals (REACH) requires
the supplier of an article to inform the recipient if it contains more than a specified proportion of any substance which is
considered by the European Chemicals Agency (ECHA) to be a Substance of Very High Concern (SVHC) and is
therefore listed by them as a candidate for compulsory authorisation.
For current information on how this requirement applies in relation to specific Control Techniques products, please
approach your usual contact in the first instance. Control Techniques position statement can be viewed at:
http://www.controltechniques.com/REACH
Copyright
© February 2014 Control Techniques Ltd
Issue Number: 4
Drive Firmware: 01.03.00 onwards
For patent and intellectual property related information please go to: www.ctpatents.info
How to use this guide
This user guide provides complete information for installing and operating the drive from start to finish.
The information is in logical order, taking the reader from receiving the drive through to fine tuning the performance.
NOTE
There are specific safety warnings throughout this guide, located in the relevant sections. In addition, Chapter 1 Safety
information contains general safety information. It is essential that the warnings are observed and the information
considered when working with or designing a system using the drive.
This map of the user guide helps to find the right sections for the task you wish to complete, but for specific information,
refer to Contents on page 4:
1 Safety information
2 Product information
3 Mechanical installation
4 Electrical installation
5 Getting started
6 Basic parameters
7 Running the motor
8 Optimization
9 NV Media card operation
10 Advanced parameters
11 Technical data
12 Diagnostics
13 UL listing information
Contents
1
Safety information .................................7
5
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
1.10
1.11
1.12
Warnings, Cautions and Notes .............................7
Electrical safety - general warning ........................7
System design and safety of personnel ................7
Environmental limits ..............................................7
Access ...................................................................7
Fire protection .......................................................7
Compliance with regulations .................................7
Motor .....................................................................7
Mechanical brake control ......................................7
Adjusting parameters ............................................7
Electrical installation ..............................................8
Hazard ...................................................................8
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
5.7
5.8
5.9
5.10
Getting started .................................... 72
Understanding the display .................................. 72
Keypad operation ............................................... 72
Menu structure ................................................... 74
Menu 0 ............................................................... 74
Advanced menus ............................................... 75
Changing the operating mode ............................ 75
Saving parameters ............................................. 75
Restoring parameter defaults ............................. 76
Parameter access level and security ................. 76
Displaying parameters with non-default
values only ......................................................... 76
5.11 Displaying destination parameters only ............. 77
5.12 Communications ................................................ 77
2
Product information ..............................9
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
Model number .......................................................9
Ratings ................................................................10
Operating modes .................................................13
Drive features ......................................................14
Keypad and display .............................................15
Nameplate description ........................................16
Options ................................................................17
Items supplied with the drive ...............................18
6
Basic parameters ................................ 78
6.1
6.2
Menu 0: Basic parameters ................................. 78
Parameter descriptions ...................................... 82
7
Running the motor .............................. 83
7.1
7.2
7.3
Quick start connections ...................................... 83
Changing the operating mode ............................ 83
Quick start commissioning / start-up .................. 87
3
Mechanical installation .......................19
8
Optimization ........................................ 89
8.1
8.2
8.3
8.4
8.5
Motor map parameters ....................................... 89
Maximum motor rated current ............................ 95
Current limits ...................................................... 95
Motor thermal protection .................................... 95
Switching frequency ........................................... 96
9
NV Media Card .................................... 97
9.1
9.2
9.3
9.4
Introduction ........................................................ 97
SD card support ................................................. 97
NV Media Card parameters ............................... 99
NV Media Card trips ........................................... 99
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
Safety information ...............................................19
Planning the installation ......................................19
Terminal cover removal .......................................20
Installing / removing options ................................24
Dimensions and mounting methods ....................28
Enclosure for standard drives .............................34
Enclosure design and drive ambient
temperature .........................................................36
3.8 Heatsink fan operation ........................................36
3.9 Enclosing size 5 to 6 drive for high
environmental protection .....................................37
3.10 External EMC filter ..............................................39
3.11 Electrical terminals ..............................................41
3.12 Routine maintenance ..........................................43
4
Electrical installation ...........................45
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
4.8
4.9
4.10
Power connections ..............................................45
AC supply requirements ......................................49
24 Vdc supply ......................................................52
Ratings ................................................................53
Output circuit and motor protection .....................56
Braking ................................................................59
Ground leakage ...................................................61
EMC (Electromagnetic compatibility) ..................62
Communications connections .............................69
Control connections ............................................69
4
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
10
Advanced parameters .......................100
10.1
10.2
10.3
10.4
10.5
10.6
10.7
10.8
10.9
10.13
10.14
10.15
10.16
10.17
10.18
Menu 1: Frequency reference ...........................110
Menu 2: Ramps .................................................114
Menu 3: Frequency control ...............................117
Menu 4: Torque and current control ..................122
Menu 5: Motor control .......................................125
Menu 6: Sequencer and clock ..........................129
Menu 7: Analog I/O ...........................................131
Menu 8: Digital I/O ............................................134
Menu 9: Programmable logic, motorized
pot, binary sum and timers ................................138
Menu 10: Status and trips .................................142
Menu 11: General drive set-up .........................144
Menu 12: Threshold detectors, variable
selectors and brake control function .................145
Menu 14: User PID controller ............................150
Menu 15: Option module set-up ........................153
Menu 18: Application menu 1 ...........................154
Menu 20: Application menu 2 ...........................155
Menu 21: Second motor parameters ................156
Menu 22: Additional Menu 0 set-up ..................157
11
Technical data ...................................159
10.10
10.11
10.12
11.1 Drive technical data ..........................................159
11.2 Optional external EMC filters ............................177
12
Diagnostics ........................................179
12.1
12.2
12.3
12.4
12.5
12.6
12.7
12.8
12.9
Status modes (Keypad and LED status) ...........179
Trip indications ..................................................179
Identifying a trip / trip source .............................179
Trips, Sub-trip numbers ....................................180
Internal / Hardware trips ....................................197
Alarm indications ...............................................197
Status indications ..............................................198
Displaying the trip history ..................................198
Behaviour of the drive when tripped .................198
13
UL Listing ...........................................199
13.1
13.2
13.3
13.4
13.5
13.6
13.7
13.8
13.9
13.10
13.11
General .............................................................199
Mounting ...........................................................199
Environment ......................................................199
Electrical installation .........................................199
UL listed accessories ........................................199
Motor overload protection .................................199
Motor overspeed protection ..............................199
Thermal memory retention ................................199
Electrical ratings ................................................199
cUL requirements for frame size 4 ....................199
Group installation ..............................................199
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
5
Declaration of Conformity
Control Techniques Ltd
Moteurs Leroy-Somer
The Gro
Usine des Agriers
Newtown
Boulevard Marcellin Leroy
Powys
CS10015
UK
16915 Angoulême Cedex 9
SY16 3BE
France
This declaration applies to Unidrive M variable speed drive products,
comprising models numbers as shown below:
These products comply with the Low Voltage Directive 2006/95/EC and
the Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive 2004/108/EC.
Maaa-bbcddddd Valid characters:
aaa
100, 101, 200, 201, 300, 400
bb
01, 02, 03
c
ddddd
1,2 or 4
00013, 00017, 00018, 00023, 00024, 00032,
00033,
00041, 00042, 00056, 00075
00056, 00073, 00094, 00100
The AC variable speed drive products listed above have been designed
and manufactured in accordance with the following European
harmonized standards:
EN 61800-5-1:2007
Adjustable speed electrical power drive
systems - safety requirements - electrical,
thermal and energy
EN 61800-3:2004
Adjustable speed electrical power drive
systems. EMC product standard including
specific test methods
EN 61000-6-2:2005
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC). Generic
standards. Immunity standard for industrial
environments
EN 61000-6-4:2007
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC). Generic
standards. Emission standard for industrial
environments
EN 61000-3-2:2006
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC), Limits,
Limits for harmonic current emissions
(equipment input current <16 A per phase)
EN 61000-3-3:2008
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC), Limits,
Limitation of voltage fluctuations and flicker in
low-voltage supply systems for equipment
with rated current <16 A
T. Alexander
Vice President, Technology
Newtown
Date: 18th December 2013
These electronic drive products are intended to be used with
appropriate motors, controllers, electrical protection components
and other equipment to form complete end products or systems.
Compliance with safety and EMC regulations depends upon
installing and configuring drives correctly, including using the
specified input filters. The drives must be installed only by
professional assemblers who are familiar with requirements for
safety and EMC. The assembler is responsible for ensuring that the
end product or system complies with all the relevant laws in the
country where it is to be used. Refer to the User Guide. An EMC
Data Sheet is also available giving detailed EMC information.
EN 61000-3-2:2006 Applicable where input current <16 A. No limits
apply for professional equipment where input power >1 kW.
6
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
Safety
Product
information information
1
1.1
Mechanical
installation
Electrical
installation
Getting
started
Basic
parameters
Running the
motor
Advanced
parameters
Technical data Diagnostics
UL Listing
1.6
Warnings, Cautions and Notes
The drive enclosure is not classified as a fire enclosure. A separate fire
enclosure must be provided. For further information, refer to section
3.2.5 Fire protection on page 19.
WARNING
A Caution contains information which is necessary for
avoiding a risk of damage to the product or other equipment.
CAUTION
1.7
Fire protection
Compliance with regulations
The installer is responsible for complying with all relevant regulations,
such as national wiring regulations, accident prevention regulations and
electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) regulations. Particular attention
must be given to the cross-sectional areas of conductors, the selection
of fuses or other protection, and protective ground (earth) connections.
This User Guide contains instruction for achieving compliance with
specific EMC standards.
Within the European Union, all machinery in which this product is used
must comply with the following directives:
NOTE
A Note contains information which helps to ensure correct operation of
the product.
Electrical safety - general warning
The voltages used in the drive can cause severe electrical shock and/or
burns, and could be lethal. Extreme care is necessary at all times when
working with or adjacent to the drive.
Specific warnings are given at the relevant places in this User Guide.
1.3
NV Media
Card
Safety information
A Warning contains information which is essential for
avoiding a safety hazard.
1.2
Optimization
System design and safety of
personnel
The drive is intended as a component for professional incorporation into
complete equipment or a system. If installed incorrectly, the drive may
present a safety hazard.
The drive uses high voltages and currents, carries a high level of stored
electrical energy, and is used to control equipment which can cause
injury.
Close attention is required to the electrical installation and the system
design to avoid hazards either in normal operation or in the event of
equipment malfunction. System design, installation, commissioning/
start-up and maintenance must be carried out by personnel who have
the necessary training and experience. They must read this safety
information and this User Guide carefully.
2006/42/EC Safety of machinery.
2004/108/EC: Electromagnetic Compatibility.
1.8
Motor
Ensure the motor is installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations. Ensure the motor shaft is not exposed.
Standard squirrel cage induction motors are designed for single speed
operation. If it is intended to use the capability of the drive to run a motor
at speeds above its designed maximum, it is strongly recommended that
the manufacturer is consulted first.
Low speeds may cause the motor to overheat because the cooling fan
becomes less effective. The motor should be installed with a protection
thermistor. If necessary, an electric forced vent fan should be used.
The values of the motor parameters set in the drive affect the protection
of the motor. The default values in the drive should not be relied upon.
It is essential that the correct value is entered in Pr 00.006 motor rated
current. This affects the thermal protection of the motor.
1.9
Mechanical brake control
The STOP functions of the drive do not isolate dangerous voltages from
the output of the drive or from any external option unit. The supply must
be disconnected by an approved electrical isolation device before
gaining access to the electrical connections.
The brake control functions are provided to allow well co-ordinated
operation of an external brake with the drive. While both hardware and
software are designed to high standards of quality and robustness, they
are not intended for use as safety functions, i.e. where a fault or failure
would result in a risk of injury. In any application where the incorrect
operation of the brake release mechanism could result in injury,
independent protection devices of proven integrity must also be
incorporated.
None of the drive functions must be used to ensure safety of
personnel, i.e. they must not be used for safety-related functions.
1.10
Careful consideration must be given to the functions of the drive which
might result in a hazard, either through their intended behavior or
through incorrect operation due to a fault. In any application where a
malfunction of the drive or its control system could lead to or allow
damage, loss or injury, a risk analysis must be carried out, and where
necessary, further measures taken to reduce the risk - for example, an
over-speed protection device in case of failure of the speed control, or a
fail-safe mechanical brake in case of loss of motor braking.
1.4
Adjusting parameters
Some parameters have a profound effect on the operation of the drive.
They must not be altered without careful consideration of the impact on
the controlled system. Measures must be taken to prevent unwanted
changes due to error or tampering.
Environmental limits
Instructions in this User Guide regarding transport, storage, installation
and use of the drive must be complied with, including the specified
environmental limits. Drives must not be subjected to excessive physical
force.
1.5
Access
Drive access must be restricted to authorized personnel only. Safety
regulations which apply at the place of use must be complied with.
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
7
Safety
Product
information information
Mechanical
installation
Electrical
installation
1.11
Electrical installation
1.11.1
Electric shock risk
Getting
started
Basic
parameters
Running the
motor
Optimization
NV Media
Card
Advanced
parameters
Technical data Diagnostics
UL Listing
The voltages present in the following locations can cause severe electric
shock and may be lethal:
AC supply cables and connections
Output cables and connections
Many internal parts of the drive, and external option units
Unless otherwise indicated, control terminals are single insulated and
must not be touched.
1.11.2
Stored charge
The drive contains capacitors that remain charged to a potentially lethal
voltage after the AC supply has been disconnected. If the drive has been
energized, the AC supply must be isolated at least ten minutes before
work may continue.
1.12
Hazard
1.12.1
Falling hazard
The drive presents a falling or toppling hazard. This can still cause injury
to personnel and therefore should be handled with care.
Maximum weight:
Size 1: 0.75 kg (1.65 Ib).
Size 2: 1.3 kg (3 lb).
Size 3: 1.5 kg (3.3 lb).
Size 4: 3.13 kg (6.9 Ib).
Size 5: 7.4 kg (16.3 Ib).
Size 6: 14 kg (30.9 Ib).
8
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
Safety
information
Product
Mechanical
information installation
Electrical
installation
Getting
started
2
Product information
2.1
Model number
Basic
Running the
NV Media Advanced
Optimization
parameters
motor
Card
parameters
Technical data
Diagnostics
UL Listing
The way in which the model numbers for the Unidrive M range are formed is illustrated below:
Figure 2-1
Model number
Identification Label
Derivative
M200 -
Electrical Specifications
03 4
00073
Unidrive M200
Product Line
A
Reserved
1
0
Optional Build
Documentation Customer Code
1
01
A
B
1
0
0
Reserved:
Conformal Coating:
Frame Size :
0 = Standard
Voltage Rating:
1 - 100 V (100 - 120 ± 10 %)
2 - 200 V (200 - 240 ± 10 %)
4 - 400 V (380 - 480 ± 10 %)
5 - 575 V (500 - 575 ± 10 %)
6 - 690 V (500 - 690 ± 10 %)
Brake Transistor:
B = Brake
Cooling:
Current Rating:
A = Air
Heavy Duty current rating x 10
Customer Code:
Drive Format:
A - AC in AC out
00 = 50 Hz
01 = 60 Hz
Documentation:
0 - Supplied separately
1 - English
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
9
Safety
information
2.2
Product
Mechanical
information installation
Electrical
installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
NV Media Advanced
Optimization
Technical data
parameters
motor
Card
parameters
Diagnostics
UL Listing
Ratings
The size 1 to 4 drive is Heavy Duty rated only.
The size 5 to 6 drive is dual rated.
The setting of the motor rated current determines which rating applies Heavy Duty or Normal Duty.
The two ratings are compatible with motors designed to IEC60034.
The graph aside illustrates the difference between Normal Duty and
Heavy Duty with respect to continuous current rating and short term
overload limits.
Available output
Overload limit current
Heavy Duty
Maximum
continuous
current (above
50% base
speed) Normal Duty
Overload limit Normal Duty
Maximum
continuous
current Heavy Duty
Heavy Duty - with high
overload capability
Normal Duty
Motor rated
current set
in the drive
Normal Duty
Heavy Duty (default)
For applications which use Self ventilated (TENV/TEFC) induction
motors and require a low overload capability, and full torque at low
speeds is not required (e.g. fans, pumps).
Self ventilated (TENV/TEFC) induction motors require increased
protection against overload due to the reduced cooling effect of the fan
For constant torque applications or applications which require a high
overload capability, or full torque is required at low speeds (e.g. winders,
hoists).
The thermal protection is set to protect force ventilated induction motors
by default.
at low speed. To provide the correct level of protection the I2t software
operates at a level which is speed dependent. This is illustrated in the
graph below.
NOTE
The speed at which the low speed protection takes effect can be
changed by the setting of Low Speed Thermal Protection Mode
(04.025). The protection starts when the motor speed is below 15 % of
base speed when Pr 04.025 = 0 (default) and below 50 % when
Pr 04.025 = 1.
NOTE
N
If the application uses a self ventilated (TENV/TEFC) induction motor
and increased thermal protection is required for speeds below 50 %
base speed, then this can be enabled by setting Low Speed Thermal
Protection Mode (04.025) = 1.
Operation of motor I2t protection
Motor I2t protection is fixed as shown below and is compatible with:
• Self ventilated (TENV/TEFC) induction motors
Motor total
current (Pr 04.001)
as a percentage
of motor rated
current
Motor I2t protection defaults to be compatible with:
• Forced ventilation induction motors
Motor total
current (Pr 04.001)
as a percentage
of motor rated
current
I2t protection operates in this region
100%
2
I t protection operates in this region
100%
70%
70%
15%
50%
100%
Max. permissible
continuous
current
Max. permissible
continuous
current
Pr 04.025 = 0
Pr 04.025 = 1
Pr 04.025 = 0
Pr 04.025 = 1
Motor speed as a
percentage of base speed
50%
100%
Motor speed as a
percentage of base speed
The continuous current ratings given are for maximum 40 °C (104 °F), 1000 m altitude and 3.0 kHz switching. Derating is required for higher switching
frequencies, ambient temperature >40 °C (104 °F) and high altitude. For further information, refer to Chapter 11 Technical data on page 159.
10
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
Safety
information
Product
Mechanical
information installation
Electrical
installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
NV Media Advanced
Optimization
parameters
motor
Card
parameters
Technical data
Diagnostics
UL Listing
Table 2-1 100 V drive ratings (100 V to 120 V ±10 %)
Heavy Duty
Maximum
continuous
output current
Open loop peak
current
RFC peak current
Nominal power at
100 V
Motor power at
100 V
A
A
A
kW
hp
01100017
1.7
2.6
3.1
0.25
0.33
01100024
2.4
3.6
4.3
0.37
0.5
02100042
4.2
6.3
7.6
0.75
1
02100056
5.6
8.4
10.1
1.1
1.5
Model
Frame size 1
Frame size 2
Table 2-2
200 V drive ratings (200 V to 240 V ±10 %)
Normal Duty
Peak
current
Open
loop
peak
current
RFC
peak
current
Nominal
power at
230 V
Motor
power at
230 V
A
A
A
A
kW
hp
01200017
1.7
2.6
3.1
0.25
0.33
01200024
2.4
3.6
4.3
0.37
0.5
01200033
3.3
5
5.9
0.55
0.75
01200042
4.2
6.3
7.6
0.75
1
02200024
2.4
3.6
4.3
0.37
0.5
02200033
3.3
5
5.9
0.55
0.75
02200042
4.2
6.3
7.6
0.75
1
02200056
5.6
8.4
10.1
1.1
1
02200075
7.5
11.3
13.5
1.5
2
03200100
10
15
18
2.2
3
04200133
13.3
20
23.9
3
3
04200176
17.6
16.4
31.7
4
5
25
37.5
50
5.5
7.5
Model
Frame size 1
Frame size 2
Frame size 3
Frame size 4
Frame size 5
Frame size 6
Heavy Duty
Maximum
continuous
output
current
Maximum
continuous
output
current
Nominal
power at
230 V
Motor
power at
230 V
A
kW
hp
05200250
30
7.5
10
06200330
06200440
50
11
15
55
33
49.5
66
7.5
10
58
15
20
63.8
44
66
88
11
15
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
33
11
Safety
information
Table 2-3
Product
Mechanical
information installation
Electrical
installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
NV Media Advanced
Optimization
Technical data
parameters
motor
Card
parameters
Model
Frame size 2
Frame size 3
Frame size 4
Frame size 5
Frame size 6
Nominal
power at
400 V
Motor
power at
460 V
Heavy Duty
Maximum
continuous
output
current
Nominal
power at
400 V
Motor
power at
460 V
Peak
current
A
kW
hp
A
Maximum
continuous
output
current
Open
loop
peak
current
RFC
peak
current
A
A
A
kW
hp
02400013
1.3
2
2.3
0.37
0.5
02400018
1.8
2.7
3.2
0.55
0.75
02400023
2.3
3.5
4.1
0.75
1
02400032
3.2
4.8
5.8
1.1
1.5
2
02400041
4.1
6.2
7.4
1.5
03400056
5.6
8.4
10.1
2.2
3
03400073
7.3
11
13.1
3
3
03400094
9.4
14.1
16.9
4
5
04400135
13.5
20.3
24.3
5.5
7.5
17
25.5
30.6
7.5
10
27
40.5
54
11
20
04400170
05400270
30
15
20
33
05400300
31
15
20
34.1
30
45
60
15
20
06400350
38
18.5
25
41.8
35
52.5
70
15
25
06400420
48
22
30
52.8
42
63
84
18.5
30
06400470
63
30
40
69.3
47
70.5
94
22
30
575 V drive ratings (500 V to 575 V ±10 %)
Normal Duty
Model
Frame size 5
Frame size 6
2.2.1
UL Listing
400 V drive ratings (380 V to 480 V ±10 %)
Normal Duty
Table 2-4
Diagnostics
Heavy Duty
Maximum
continuous
output
current
Nominal
power at
575 V
Motor
power at
575 V
Peak
current
Maximum
continuous
output
current
Open
loop peak
current
RFC
peak
current
Nominal
power at
575 V
Motor
power at
575 V
A
kW
hp
A
A
A
A
kW
hp
05500030
3.9
2.2
3
4.3
3
4.5
6
1.5
2
05500040
6.1
4
5
6.7
4
6
8
2.2
3
05500069
10
5.5
7.5
11
6.9
10.3
13.8
4
5
06500100
12
7.5
10
13.2
10
15
20
5.5
7.5
06500150
17
11
15
18.7
15
22.5
30
7.5
10
06500190
22
15
20
24.2
19
28.5
38
11
15
06500230
27
18.5
25
29.7
23
34.5
46
15
20
06500290
34
22
30
37.4
29
43.5
58
18.5
25
06500350
43
30
40
47.3
35
52.5
70
22
30
Typical short term overload limits
The maximum percentage overload limit changes depending on the selected motor. Variations in motor rated current, motor power factor and motor
leakage inductance all result in changes in the maximum possible overload. The exact value for a specific motor can be calculated using the
equations detailed in Menu 4 in the Parameter Reference Guide.
Typical values are shown in the table below for RFC-A and open loop (OL) modes:
Table 2-5
Typical overload limits
RFC From cold
RFC From 100 %
Open loop from cold
Open loop from 100 %
Normal Duty overload with motor rated
current = drive rated current
Operating mode
110 % for 165 s
110 % for 9 s
110 % for 165 s
110 % for 9 s
Heavy Duty overload with motor rated
current = drive rated current
180 % for 3 s
180 % for 3 s
150 % for 60 s
150 % for 8 s
Generally the drive rated current is higher than the matching motor rated current allowing a higher level of overload than the default setting.
The time allowed in the overload region is proportionally reduced at very low output frequency on some drive ratings.
NOTE
The maximum overload level which can be attained is independent of the speed.
12
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
Safety
information
2.3
Product
Mechanical
information installation
Electrical
installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
NV Media Advanced
Optimization
parameters
motor
Card
parameters
Technical data
Diagnostics
UL Listing
Operating modes
The drive is designed to operate in any of the following modes:
1. Open loop mode
Open loop vector mode
Fixed V/F mode (V/Hz)
Square V/F mode (V/Hz)
2. RFC - A
Without position feedback sensor
2.3.1
Open loop mode
The drive applies power to the motor at frequencies varied by the user. The motor speed is a result of the output frequency of the drive and slip due
to the mechanical load. The drive can improve the speed control of the motor by applying slip compensation. The performance at low speed depends
on whether V/F mode or open loop vector mode is selected.
Open loop vector mode
The voltage applied to the motor is directly proportional to the frequency except at low speed where the drive uses motor parameters to apply the
correct voltage to keep the flux constant under varying load conditions.
Typically 100 % torque is available down to 1 Hz for a 50 Hz motor.
Fixed V/F mode
The voltage applied to the motor is directly proportional to the frequency except at low speed where a voltage boost is provided which is set by the
user. This mode can be used for multi-motor applications.
Typically 100 % torque is available down to 4 Hz for a 50 Hz motor.
Square V/F mode
The voltage applied to the motor is directly proportional to the square of the frequency except at low speed where a voltage boost is provided which is
set by the user. This mode can be used for running fan or pump applications with quadratic load characteristics or for multi-motor applications. This
mode is not suitable for applications requiring a high starting torque.
2.3.2
RFC-A mode
Rotor Flux Control for Asynchronous (induction) motors (RFC-A) encompasses closed loop vector control without a position feedback device
Without position feedback sensor
Rotor flux control provides closed loop control without the need for position feedback by using current, voltages and key motor parameters to estimate
the motor speed. It can eliminate instability traditionally associated with open loop control for example when operating large motors with light loads at
low frequencies.
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
13
Safety
information
2.4
Product
Mechanical
information installation
Electrical
installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
NV Media Advanced
Optimization
Technical data
parameters
motor
Card
parameters
Diagnostics
UL Listing
Drive features
Figure 2-2
Features of the drive (size 1 to 4)
2
2
1
3
2
3
1
5
8
5
4
1
7
3
4
6
11
7
11
6
10
8
10
12
12
9
2
2
1
1
3
4
5
4
3
4
5
9
7
3
8
7
8
9
6
11
10
12
6
11
10
12
Key
1. Rating label (On side of drive)
5. Control connections
9. DC bus -
2. Identification label
6. Braking terminal
10. Motor connections
3. Option module
7. Internal EMC filter screw
11. AC supply connections
4. Relay connections
8. DC bus +
12. Ground connections
14
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
Safety
information
Product
Mechanical
information installation
Figure 2-3
Electrical
installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
NV Media Advanced
Optimization
parameters
motor
Card
parameters
Technical data
Diagnostics
UL Listing
Features of the drive (size 5 to 6)
7
8
8
6
6
7
2
2
2
1
3
4
5
5
3
6
11
10
9
10
11
9
Key
1. Keypad
6. Braking terminal
2. Rating label
7. DC bus +
3. Option module slot 1
8. DC bus -
4. Relay connections
9. Motor connections
5. Control connections
10. AC supply connections
2.5
11. Ground connections
Keypad and display
The keypad and display provide information to the user regarding the operating status of the drive and trip codes, and provide the means for changing
parameters, stopping and starting the drive, and the ability to perform a drive reset.
Figure 2-4
Unidrive M200 keypad detail
Figure 2-5
Unidrive M201 keypad detail
8
V A Hz rpm %
9
V A Hz rpm %
10
6
1
5
2
4
3
11
1
7
(1) The Enter button is used to enter parameter view or edit mode, or to accept a parameter edit.
(2 / 5) The Navigation buttons can be used to select individual parameters or to edit parameter values.
(3) The Stop / Reset button is used to stop and reset the drive in keypad mode. It can also be used to reset the drive in terminal mode.
(4) The Start button is used to start the drive in keypad mode.
(6) The Escape button is used to exit from the parameter edit / view mode.
(7) The Speed Reference Potentiometer is used to control the speed reference in keypad mode (only available on Unidrive M201).
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
15
Safety
information
2.6
Product
Mechanical
information installation
Electrical
installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
NV Media Advanced
Optimization
Technical data
parameters
motor
Card
parameters
Diagnostics
UL Listing
Nameplate description
See Figure 2-2 for location of rating labels.
Figure 2-6
Typical drive rating labels for size 2
Model number
Key to approvals
Input
voltage
M200-022 00042 A
200-240V
0.75kW
CE approval
Power rating
Refer to
User Guide
V40
R
Europe
C Tick approval
Australia
UL / cUL approval
USA &
Canada
RoHS compliant
Europe
Date code
Model
number
M200-022 00042 A
Input voltage
Input
frequency
Power
rating
0.75kW
10.4A / 5.4A
Output
voltage
Date code
No. of phases &
Typical input current
Heavy duty
output current
Serial
number
Manuals: www.ctmanuals.info
Approvals
Refer to Figure 2-1 Model number on page 9 for further information relating to the labels.
16
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
Safety
information
2.7
Product
Mechanical
information installation
Electrical
installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
NV Media Advanced
Optimization
parameters
motor
Card
parameters
Technical data
Diagnostics
UL Listing
Options
Figure 2-7
Options available with the drive
1
4
5
2
3
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
AI-485 adaptor
SI module
CT comms cable
Remote mountable LCD keypad
AI-Backup adaptor module
Table 2-6
System Integration Option module identification
Type
Option module
Fieldbus
Automation
(I/O expansion)
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
Color
Name
Purple
SI-PROFIBUS
Profibus option
PROFIBUS adaptor for communications with the drive
Medium
Grey
SI-DeviceNet
DeviceNet option
DeviceNet adaptor for communications with the drive
Light Grey
SI-CANopen
CANopen option
CANopen adaptor for communications with the drive
Orange
SI-I/O
Further details
Extended I/O
Increases the I/O capability by adding the following
combinations:
• Digital I/O
• Digital Inputs
• Analog Inputs (differential or single ended)
• Analog Output
• Relays
17
Safety
information
Table 2-7
Product
Mechanical
information installation
Electrical
installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
NV Media Advanced
Optimization
Technical data
parameters
motor
Card
parameters
UL Listing
Adaptor Interface (AI) option module identification
Type
Option module
Name
Communications
AI-485 adaptor
Backup
AI-Backup adaptor
2.8
Diagnostics
Further Details
485 serial communications option
Provides a 485 serial communications interface via an RJ45
connector or alternative screw terminals
+ 24 V Backup and SD Card Interface
Items supplied with the drive
The drive is supplied with a copy of the Quick Start Guide, a safety information booklet, the Certificate of Quality and an accessory kit box (size 5 to 6
only), including the items shown in Table 2-8.
Table 2-8 Parts supplied with the drive
Description
Size 1
Size 2
Size 3
Size 4
Size 5
Size 6
Grounding bracket
x1
M4 x 8 Double Sem
Torx screw
x2
Grounding bracket
x1
Surface mounting
brackets
x2
x2
x1
x1
Grounding clamp
Terminal nuts
M6 x 11
Supply and motor
connector
x1
x1
Finger guard
grommets
x3
18
x2
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
Safety
information
3
Product
information
Mechanical
installation
Electrical
installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
parameters
motor
Mechanical installation
This chapter describes how to use all mechanical details to install the
drive. The drive is intended to be installed in an enclosure. Key features
of this chapter include:
•
•
•
•
•
Through hole mounting
High IP as standard or Through-panel mounting
Enclosure sizing and layout
Option module installing
Terminal location and torque settings
3.1
WARNING
WARNING
WARNING
3.2
Safety information
Follow the instructions
The mechanical and electrical installation instructions must
be adhered to. Any questions or doubt should be referred to
the supplier of the equipment. It is the responsibility of the
owner or user to ensure that the installation of the drive and
any external option unit, and the way in which they are
operated and maintained, comply with the requirements of
the Health and Safety at Work Act in the United Kingdom or
applicable legislation and regulations and codes of practice in
the country in which the equipment is used.
Competence of the installer
The drive must be installed by professional assemblers who
are familiar with the requirements for safety and EMC. The
assembler is responsible for ensuring that the end product or
system complies with all the relevant laws in the country
where it is to be used.
NV Media
Card
Optimization
3.2.3
Advanced
Technical data Diagnostics
parameters
UL Listing
Cooling
The heat produced by the drive must be removed without its specified
operating temperature being exceeded. Note that a sealed enclosure
gives much reduced cooling compared with a ventilated one, and may
need to be larger and/or use internal air circulating fans.
For further information, refer to section 3.6 Enclosure for standard
drives on page 34.
3.2.4
Electrical safety
The installation must be safe under normal and fault conditions.
Electrical installation instructions are given in Chapter 4 Electrical
installation on page 45.
3.2.5
Fire protection
The drive enclosure is not classified as a fire enclosure. A separate fire
enclosure must be provided.
For installation in the USA, a NEMA 12 enclosure is suitable.
For installation outside the USA, the following (based on IEC 62109-1,
standard for PV inverters) is recommended.
Enclosure can be metal and/or polymeric, polymer must meet
requirements which can be summarized for larger enclosures as using
materials meeting at least UL 94 class 5VB at the point of minimum
thickness.
Air filter assemblies to be at least class V-2.
The location and size of the bottom shall cover the area shown in Figure
3-1. Any part of the side which is within the area traced out by the 5°
angle is also considered to be part of the bottom of the fire enclosure.
Figure 3-1
Fire enclosure bottom layout
Enclosure
The drive is intended to be mounted in an enclosure which
prevents access except by trained and authorized
personnel, and which prevents the ingress of contamination.
It is designed for use in an environment classified as
pollution degree 2 in accordance with IEC 60664-1. This
means that only dry, non-conducting contamination is
acceptable.
Drive
Planning the installation
The following considerations must be made when planning the installation:
3.2.1
Access
o
5
Access must be restricted to authorized personnel only. Safety
regulations which apply at the place of use must be complied with.
The IP (Ingress Protection) rating of the drive is installation dependent.
For further information, refer to section 3.9 Enclosing size 5 to 6 drive for
high environmental protection on page 37
3.2.2
o
5
Environmental protection
The drive must be protected from:
•
•
•
•
•
Moisture, including dripping water or spraying water and
condensation. An anti-condensation heater may be required, which
must be switched off when the drive is running.
Contamination with electrically conductive material
Contamination with any form of dust which may restrict the fan, or
impair airflow over various components
Temperature beyond the specified operating and storage ranges
Corrosive gasses
The bottom, including the part of the side considered to be part of the
bottom, must be designed to prevent escape of burning material - either
by having no openings or by having a baffle construction. This means
that openings for cables etc. must be sealed with materials meeting the
5VB requirement, or else have a baffle above. See Figure 3-2 for
acceptable baffle construction. This does not apply for mounting in an
enclosed electrical operating area (restricted access) with concrete floor.
Figure 3-2
Fire enclosure baffle construction
Not less
than 2
times ‘X’
NOTE
During installation it is recommended that the vents on the drive are
covered to prevent debris (e.g. wire off-cuts) from entering the drive.
N o t le s s
th a n 2 X
Baffle plates (may be above or
below bottom of enclosure)
B a f f le p la t e s ( m a y b e
a b o v e o r b e lo w b o t t o m
o f e n c lo s u r e )
X
X
B o t t o m o f fir e
e n c lo s u r e
Bottom of fire enclosure
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
19
Safety
information
3.2.6
Product
information
Mechanical
installation
Electrical
installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
parameters
motor
Optimization
NV Media
Card
Advanced
Technical data Diagnostics
parameters
UL Listing
Electromagnetic compatibility
Variable speed drives are powerful electronic circuits which can cause electromagnetic interference if not installed correctly with careful attention to
the layout of the wiring.
Some simple routine precautions can prevent disturbance to typical industrial control equipment.
If it is necessary to meet strict emission limits, or if it is known that electromagnetically sensitive equipment is located nearby, then full precautions
must be observed. In-built into the drive, is an internal EMC filter, which reduces emissions under certain conditions. If these conditions are exceeded,
then the use of an external EMC filter may be required at the drive inputs, which must be located very close to the drives. Space must be made
available for the filters and allowance made for carefully segregated wiring. Both levels of precautions are covered in section 4.8 EMC
(Electromagnetic compatibility) on page 62.
3.2.7
Hazardous areas
The drive must not be located in a classified hazardous area unless it is installed in an approved enclosure and the installation is certified.
3.3
Terminal cover removal
Isolation device
The AC and / or DC power supply must be disconnected from the drive using an approved isolation device before any cover is removed
from the drive or before any servicing work is performed.
WARNING
Stored charge
The drive contains capacitors that remain charged to a potentially lethal voltage after the AC and / or DC power supply has been
disconnected. If the drive has been energized, the power supply must be isolated at least ten minutes before work may continue.
Normally, the capacitors are discharged by an internal resistor. Under certain, unusual fault conditions, it is possible that the capacitors may
fail to discharge, or be prevented from being discharged by a voltage applied to the output terminals. If the drive has failed in a manner that
causes the display to go blank immediately, it is possible the capacitors will not be discharged. In this case, consult Control Techniques or
their authorized distributor.
WARNING
3.3.1
Removing the terminal covers
Figure 3-3
Location and identification of terminal covers (size 1 to 4)
3
4
3
3
2
3
1
Control / AC /
Motor Terminal Cover
Control / AC /
Motor Terminal Cover
Control / AC /
Motor Terminal Cover
Control / AC /
Motor Terminal Cover
NOTE
The drives shown in Figure 3-3 have a single removable terminal cover which provides access to all electrical connections, i.e. Control, AC, Motor
and Brake functions. Figure 3-5 on page 21 illustrates the three steps required to remove the drive terminal covers.
20
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
Safety
information
Figure 3-4
Product
information
Mechanical
installation
Electrical
installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
parameters
motor
NV Media
Card
Advanced
Technical data Diagnostics
parameters
UL Listing
Location and identification of terminal covers (size 5 to 6)
DC / Braking
terminal cover
left
DC / Braking
terminal cover
left
AC motor
terminal cover
Figure 3-5
Optimization
Control
terminal
cover
AC motor
terminal cover
Control
terminal cover
Removing the terminal cover (size 1 to 4)
1
2
3
1. Using a flat bladed screwdriver, turn the terminal cover locking clip anti-clockwise by approximately 30°
2. Slide the terminal cover down
3. Remove terminal cover
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
21
Safety
information
Figure 3-6
Product
information
Mechanical
installation
Electrical
installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
parameters
motor
Optimization
NV Media
Card
Advanced
Technical data Diagnostics
parameters
UL Listing
Removing the size 5 terminal covers
Pozi Pz 2
1
1. Control terminal cover
When replacing the terminal covers, the screws should be tightened to a maximum torque of 1 N m (0.7 lb ft).
Figure 3-7
Removing the size 6 terminal covers
Pozi Pz 2
1
1. Control terminal cover
When replacing the terminal covers, the screws should be tightened to a maximum torque of 1 N m (0.7 lb ft).
22
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
Safety
information
3.3.2
Product
information
Mechanical
installation
Electrical
installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
parameters
motor
Optimization
NV Media
Card
Advanced
Technical data Diagnostics
parameters
UL Listing
Removing the finger-guard and DC terminal
cover break-outs
Figure 3-8
Removing the finger-guard break-outs
A: All sizes
B: Size 5 only
C: Size 6 only
Place finger-guard on a flat solid surface and hit relevant break-outs with
hammer as shown (1). Continue until all required break-outs are
removed (2). Remove any flash / sharp edges once the break-outs are
removed.
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
23
Safety
information
3.4
Product
information
Mechanical
installation
Electrical
installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
parameters
motor
Optimization
NV Media
Card
Advanced
Technical data Diagnostics
parameters
UL Listing
Installing / removing options
Power down the drive before installing / removing the SI option module. Failure to do so may result in damage to the product.
CAUTION
Figure 3-9
Installation of an SI option module (size 2 to 4)
Installing the option module
•
•
With the option module tilted slightly backwards, align and locate the two holes in the rear of the option module onto the two tabs (1) on the drive.
Press the option module onto the drive as shown in (2) until the connector mates with the drive, ensuring that the tab (3) retains the option module
in place.
NOTE
Check that the option module is securely located on the drive. Always ensure that the terminal cover is always replaced before use as this ensures
that the option module is firmly secured.
Figure 3-10
Removing the SI-Option module (size 2 to 4)
2
1
•
•
24
Press down on the tab (1) to release the option module from the drive housing as shown.
Tilt the option module slightly towards you and pull away from the drive housing (2).
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
Safety
information
Product
information
Figure 3-11
Mechanical
installation
Electrical
installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
parameters
motor
Optimization
NV Media
Card
Advanced
Technical data Diagnostics
parameters
UL Listing
Installation of an SI option module (size 5 to 6)
1
2
A
•
•
•
Move the option module in the direction shown (1).
Align and insert the option module tab into the slot provided (2), This is shown in the detailed view (A).
Press down on the option module until it clicks in place.
Figure 3-12
Removal of an SI option module (size 5 to 6)
A
•
•
•
1
2
3
To release the option module from the drive housing, press down on the tab (1) as shown in detailed view (A).
Tilt the option module towards you as shown in (2).
Remove the option module by lifting away from the drive as shown in (3).
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
25
Safety
information
Product
information
Figure 3-13
Mechanical
installation
Electrical
installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
parameters
motor
Optimization
NV Media
Card
Advanced
Technical data Diagnostics
parameters
UL Listing
Installing the AI-485 adaptor to the drive
2
1
3
•
•
•
Identify the two plastic fingers on the underside of the AI-485 Adaptor (1) - then insert the two fingers into the corresponding slots in the springloaded sliding cover on the top of the drive.
Hold the adaptor firmly and push the spring loaded protective cover towards the back of the drive to expose the connector block (2) below.
Press the adaptor downwards (3) until the adaptor connector locates into the drive connection below.
Figure 3-14
•
26
Removal of the AI-485 adaptor
To remove the AI-Adaptor, pull it up away from the drive in the direction shown (1)
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
Safety
information
Product
information
Figure 3-15
Mechanical
installation
Electrical
installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
parameters
motor
Optimization
NV Media
Card
Advanced
Technical data Diagnostics
parameters
UL Listing
Installing the AI-Backup adaptor
1
2
3
•
•
•
Identify the two plastic fingers on the underside of the AI-Backup adaptor (1) - then insert the two fingers into the corresponding slots in the
spring-loaded sliding cover on the top of the drive.
Hold the adaptor firmly and push the spring loaded protective cover towards the back of the drive to expose the connector block (2) below.
Press the adaptor downwards (3) until the adaptor connector locates into the drive connection as shown.
Figure 3-16
Removal of the AI-Backup adaptor
1
•
To remove the AI-Backup adaptor, pull it up away from the drive in the direction shown (1)
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
27
Safety
information
3.5
Product
information
Mechanical
installation
Electrical
installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
parameters
motor
Optimization
NV Media
Card
Advanced
Technical data Diagnostics
parameters
UL Listing
Dimensions and mounting methods
The drive can be either surface or through-panel mounted using the appropriate brackets. The following drawings show the dimensions of the drive
and mounting holes for each method to allow a back plate to be prepared.
The Through-panel mounting kit is not supplied with the drive and can be purchased separately, below are the relevant part numbers:
Table 3-1
Through-panel mounting kit part numbers for size 5 to 6
Size
CT part number
5
3470-0067
6
3470-0055
If the drive has been used at high load levels for a period of time, the heatsink can reach temperatures in excess of 70 °C (158 °F). Human
contact with the heatsink should be prevented.
WARNING
Many of the drives in this product range weigh in excess of 15 kg (33 lb). Use appropriate safeguards when lifting these models.
A full list of drive weights can be found in section 11.1.19 Weights on page 169.
WARNING
Surface mounting
Figure 3-17
Surface mounting the size 1 drive
137 mm (5.4 in)
75 mm (3.0 in)
53 mm (2.1 in)
Æ5.0 mm
(0.2 in) x 4 holes
143 mm
(5.63 in)
8.0 mm
(0.31 in)
160 mm (6.3 in)
11 mm
(0.43 in)
9.0 mm
(0.35 in)
3.5.1
130 mm (5.12 in)
28
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
Safety
information
Product
information
Figure 3-18
Mechanical
installation
Electrical
installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
parameters
motor
Optimization
NV Media
Card
Advanced
Technical data Diagnostics
parameters
UL Listing
Surface mounting the size 2 drive
5.5 mm
(0.22 in)
180 mm (7.1 in)
205 mm (8.07 in)
75 mm (3.0 in)
11 mm
(0.43 in)
55 mm (2.20 in)
Æ5.0 mm
(0.2 in) x 4 holes
194 mm
(7.63 in)
5.5 mm
(0.22 in)
150 mm (6.0 in)
Figure 3-19
Surface mounting the size 3 drive
5.5 mm
(0.21 in)
200 mm (7.9 in)
226 mm (8.9 in)
90 mm (3.54 in)
70.7 mm (2.80 in)
∅5.0 mm
(0.2 in) x 4 holes
215 mm
(8.5 in)
160 mm (6.3 in)
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
9.5 mm
(0.37 in)
6.0 mm
(0.24 in)
29
Safety
information
Product
information
Figure 3-20
Mechanical
installation
Electrical
installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
parameters
motor
Optimization
NV Media
Card
Advanced
Technical data Diagnostics
parameters
UL Listing
Surface mounting the size 4 drive
14.5 mm
(0.57 in)
86.0 mm (3.40 in)
245 mm (9.65 in)
277 mm (10.90 in)
6.0 mm
(0.24 in)
115 mm (4.53 in)
Æ6.0 mm
(0.24 in) x 4 holes
6.0 mm
(0.24 in)
265 mm
(10.43 in)
175 mm (6.90 in)
Figure 3-21
Surface mounting the size 5 drive
192.0 mm (7.60 in)
365.0 mm (14.37 in)
391.0 mm (15.39.0 in)
143.0 mm (5.63 in)
9.0 mm
(0.35 in)
106 mm (4.17 in)
8.0 mm
(0.32 in)
375 mm
(14.78 in)
Æ 6.5 mm (0.30 in)
x 4 holes
30
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
Safety
information
Product
information
Figure 3-22
Mechanical
installation
Electrical
installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
parameters
motor
Optimization
NV Media
Card
Advanced
Technical data Diagnostics
parameters
UL Listing
Surface mounting the size 6 drive
7.0 mm
(0.28 in)
221.0 mm (8.70 in)
365.0 mm (14.37 in)
389.0 mm (15.32 in)
210.0 mm (8.27 in)
196.0 mm (7.72 in)
6.0 mm
(0.24 in)
376 mm
(14.80 in)
Æ7.0 mm (0.27 in)
x 4 holes
3.5.2
Through-panel mounting
Figure 3-23
Through-panel mounting the size 5 drive
67.0 mm
(2.64 in)
143.0 mm (5.63 in)
157 mm (6.18 in)
17 mm
(0.66 in)
125.0 mm (4.92 in)
106 mm (4.17 in)
359 mm (14.13 in)
365.0 mm (14.37 in)
78.5 mm
(3.09 in)
26 mm
(1.02 in)
26 mm
(1.02 in)
393 mm (15.47 in)
409.0 mm (16.10 in)
78.5 mm
(3.09 in)
53 mm
(2.1 in)
167 mm (6.58 in)
169 mm (6.65 in)
53 mm
(2.1 in)
Æ5.0 mm
(0.20 in)
(x 4 holes)
68 mm
(2.67 in)
Radius 1.0 mm
(0.04 in)
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
68 mm
(2.67 in)
137 mm (5.47 in)
Æ 6.5 mm (0.3 in)
(x 4 holes)
31
Product
information
Figure 3-24
Mechanical
installation
Electrical
installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
parameters
motor
NV Media
Card
Optimization
Advanced
Technical data Diagnostics
parameters
Through-panel mounting the size 6 drive
196.0 mm (7.72 in)
221.0 mm (8.70 in)
98.0 mm (3.86 in)
98.0 mm (3.86 in)
Æ 7.0 mm (0.276 in)
21.0 mm (0.83 in)
120.0 mm (4.73 in)
26.0 mm (1.02 in)
26.0 mm (1.02 in)
26.0 mm
(1.02 in)
356.0 mm (14.02 in)
264.0 mm (10.39 in)
96.0 mm
(3.78 in)
399.0 mm (15.71 in)
125.0 mm (4.92 in)
412.0 mm (16.22 in)
210.0 mm (8.27 in)
365.0 mm (14.37 in)
UL Listing
167.0 mm (6.58 in)
Safety
information
Æ 5.0 mm
(0.20 in)
Radius 1.0 mm
(0.04 in)
101.0 mm (3.98 in)
101.0 mm (3.98 in)
202.0 mm (7.95 in)
NOTE
The outer holes plus the hole located in the center of the bracket are to be used for through panel mounting.
Figure 3-25
Size 2 M201 Variant with front panel potentiometer control
150 mm (5.91 in)
32
11 mm
(0.43 in)
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
Safety
information
3.5.3
Product
information
Mechanical
installation
Electrical
installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
parameters
motor
Optimization
NV Media
Card
Advanced
Technical data Diagnostics
parameters
UL Listing
Mounting brackets
Table 3-2
Mounting brackets (size 5 to 6)
Frame size
Surface
Qty
Through-panel
Qty
x2
5
x2
Hole size: 5.2 mm (0.21 in)
x2
Hole size: 6.5 mm (0.26 in)
Hole size: 6.5 mm (0.26 in)
x3
6
x2
Hole size: 5.2 mm (0.21 in)
x2
Hole size: 6.5 mm (0.26 in)
3.5.4
Hole size: 6.5 mm (0.26 in)
Recommended spacing between the drives
Figure 3-26
Recommended spacing between the drives
Enclosure
A
3
2
3
2
Table 3-3 Spacing required between the drives (without high IP bung)
Drive size
Spacing (A)
50 °C*
40 °C
1
2
3
0 mm (0.00)
4
5
0 mm (0.00)
6
30 mm (1.18 in)
0 mm (0.00 in)
* 50 °C derating applies, refer to Table 11-5 Maximum permissible
continuous output current @ 50 °C (122 °F) (size 5 to 6) on page 162.
NOTE
When through-panel mounted, ideally drives should be spaced 30 mm
(1.18 in) to maximize panel stiffness.
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
33
Safety
information
Product
information
Mechanical
installation
Electrical
installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
parameters
motor
3.6
Enclosure for standard drives
3.6.1
Enclosure layout
NV Media
Card
Optimization
Advanced
Technical data Diagnostics
parameters
UL Listing
Please observe the clearances in the diagram below taking into account any appropriate notes for other devices / auxiliary equipment when planning
the installation.
Figure 3-27 Enclosure layout
Optional braking resistor and overload
Locate
Locateas
as
required
required
Locate optional braking
resistor external to
cubicle (preferably near to or
on top of the cubicle).
Locate the overload protection
device as required
Enclosure
AC supply
contactor and
fuses or MCB
³100 mm
(4 in)
Ensure minimum clearances
are maintained for the drive
and external EMC filter. Forced
or convection air-flow must not
be restricted by any object or
cabling
B
The external EMC filter can be
bookcase mounted (next to the
drive) or footprint mounted (with
the drive mounted onto the filter).
³100 mm
(4 in)
B
Note
For EMC compliance:
1) When using an external EMC
filter, one filter is required for
each drive
2) Power cabling must be at
least 100 mm (4 in) from the
drive in all directions
External
controller
Signal cables
Plan for all signal cables
to be routed at least
300 mm (12 in) from the
drive and any power cable
Table 3-4
Spacing required between drive / enclosure and drive /
EMC filter
Drive Size
Spacing (B)
1
2
3
0 mm (0.00 in)
4
5
6
34
30 mm (1.18 in)
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
Safety
information
3.6.2
Product
information
Mechanical
installation
Electrical
installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
parameters
motor
Enclosure sizing
Optimization
Figure 3-28
1. Add the dissipation figures from section 11.1.2 Power dissipation on
page 163 for each drive that is to be installed in the enclosure.
2. If an external EMC filter is to be used with each drive, add the
dissipation figures from section 11.2.1 EMC filter ratings on
page 178 for each external EMC filter that is to be installed in the
enclosure.
3. If the braking resistor is to be mounted inside the enclosure, add the
average power figures from for each braking resistor that is to be
installed in the enclosure.
4. Calculate the total heat dissipation (in Watts) of any other equipment
to be installed in the enclosure.
5. Add the heat dissipation figures obtained above. This gives a figure
in Watts for the total heat that will be dissipated inside the enclosure.
NV Media
Card
Advanced
Technical data Diagnostics
parameters
Enclosure having front, sides and top panels free to
dissipate heat
H
D
W
Calculating the size of a sealed enclosure
The enclosure transfers internally generated heat into the surrounding
air by natural convection (or external forced air flow); the greater the
surface area of the enclosure walls, the better is the dissipation
capability. Only the surfaces of the enclosure that are unobstructed (not
in contact with a wall or floor) can dissipate heat.
Calculate the minimum required unobstructed surface area Ae for the
enclosure from:
P
A e = ----------------------------------k ( T int – T ext )
Where:
Ae
Unobstructed surface area in m2 (1 m2 = 10.9 ft2)
T
ext
Maximum expected temperature in oC outside the
enclosure
Tint
Maximum permissible temperature in oC inside the
enclosure
Power in Watts dissipated by all heat sources in the
enclosure
Heat transmission coefficient of the enclosure material
P
k
W/m2/oC
in
Example
To calculate the size of an enclosure for the following:
•
•
•
•
•
Two drives operating at the Normal Duty rating
External EMC filter for each drive
Braking resistors are to be mounted outside the enclosure
Maximum ambient temperature inside the enclosure: 40°C
Maximum ambient temperature outside the enclosure: 30°C
For example, if the power dissipation from each drive is 187 W and the
power dissipation from each external EMC filter is 9.2 W.
Total dissipation: 2 x (187 + 9.2) =392.4 W
NOTE
Insert the following values:
Tint
40 °C
Text
30 °C
k
5.5
P
392.4 W
The minimum required heat conducting area is then:
392.4
A e = --------------------------------5.5 ( 40 – 30 )
= 7.135 m2 (77.8 ft2) (1 m2 = 10.9 ft2)
Estimate two of the enclosure dimensions - the height (H) and depth (D),
for instance. Calculate the width (W) from:
A e – 2HD
W = -------------------------H+D
Inserting H = 2m and D = 0.6 m, obtain the minimum width:
7.135 – ( 2 × 2 × 0.6 )
W = ----------------------------------------------------2 + 0.6
=1.821 m (71.7 in)
If the enclosure is too large for the space available, it can be made
smaller only by attending to one or all of the following:
•
•
•
•
Using a lower PWM switching frequency to reduce the dissipation in
the drives
Reducing the ambient temperature outside the enclosure, and/or
applying forced-air cooling to the outside of the enclosure
Reducing the number of drives in the enclosure
Removing other heat-generating equipment
Calculating the air-flow in a ventilated enclosure
The dimensions of the enclosure are required only for accommodating
the equipment. The equipment is cooled by the forced air flow.
Calculate the minimum required volume of ventilating air from:
3kP
V = --------------------------T int – T ext
Power dissipation for the drives and the external EMC filters can be
obtained from Chapter 11 Technical data on page 159.
The enclosure is to be made from painted 2 mm (0.079 in) sheet steel
having a heat transmission coefficient of 5.5 W/m2/oC. Only the top,
front, and two sides of the enclosure are free to dissipate heat.
The value of 5.5 W/m2/ºC can generally be used with a sheet steel
enclosure (exact values can be obtained by the supplier of the material).
If in any doubt, allow for a greater margin in the temperature rise.
UL Listing
Where:
V
Text
Tint
P
k
Air-flow in m3 per hour (1 m3/hr = 0.59 ft3/min)
Maximum expected temperature in °C outside the
enclosure
Maximum permissible temperature in °C inside the
enclosure
Power in Watts dissipated by all heat sources in the
enclosure
Po
Ratio of ------Pl
Where:
P0 is the air pressure at sea level
PI is the air pressure at the installation
Typically use a factor of 1.2 to 1.3, to allow also for pressure-drops in
dirty air-filters.
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
35
Safety
information
Product
information
Mechanical
installation
Electrical
installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
parameters
motor
Optimization
NV Media
Card
Advanced
Technical data Diagnostics
parameters
UL Listing
Example
To calculate the size of an enclosure for the following:
•
•
•
•
•
Three drives operating at the Normal Duty rating
External EMC filter for each drive
Braking resistors are to be mounted outside the enclosure
Maximum ambient temperature inside the enclosure: 40 °C
Maximum ambient temperature outside the enclosure: 30 °C
For example, dissipation of each drive: 101 W and dissipation of each
external EMC filter: 6.9 W (max).
Total dissipation: 3 x (101 + 6.9) = 323.7 W
Insert the following values:
Tint
40 °C
30 °C
Text
k
1.3
P
323.7 W
Then:
3 × 1.3 × 323.7
V = --------------------------------------40 – 30
= 126.2 m3/hr (74.5 ft3 /min) (1 m3/ hr = 0.59 ft3/min)
3.7
Enclosure design and drive ambient
temperature
Drive derating is required for operation in high ambient temperatures
Totally enclosing or through panel mounting the drive in either a sealed
cabinet (no airflow) or in a well ventilated cabinet makes a significant
difference on drive cooling.
The chosen method affects the ambient temperature value (Trate) which
should be used for any necessary derating to ensure sufficient cooling
for the whole of the drive.
The ambient temperature for the four different combinations is defined
below:
1. Totally enclosed with no air flow (<2 m/s) over the drive
Trate = Tint + 5 °C
2. Totally enclosed with air flow (>2 m/s) over the drive
Trate = Tint
3. Through panel mounted with no airflow (<2 m/s) over the drive
Trate = the greater of Text +5 °C, or Tint
4. Through panel mounted with air flow (>2 m/s) over the drive
Trate = the greater of Text or Tint
Where:
Text = Temperature outside the cabinet
Tint = Temperature inside the cabinet
Trate = Temperature used to select current rating from tables in
Chapter 11 Technical data on page 159.
3.8
Heatsink fan operation
The drive is ventilated by an internal heatsink fan. The fan channels air
through the heatsink chamber.
Ensure the minimum clearances around the drive are maintained to
allow air to flow freely.
The heatsink fan on all drive sizes is a variable speed fan. The drive
controls the speed at which the fan runs based on the temperature of the
heatsink and the drive's thermal model system. The maximum speed at
which the fan operates can be limited in Pr 06.045. This could incur an
output current derating. Refer to section 3.12.1 Fan removal
procedure on page 44 for information on fan removal. The size 6 is also
installed with a variable speed fan to ventilate the capacitor bank. The
heatsink fan on the size 5 to 6 is supplied internally by the drive.
36
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
Safety
information
3.9
Product
information
Mechanical
installation
Electrical
installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
parameters
motor
Enclosing size 5 to 6 drive for high
environmental protection
An explanation of the environmental protection rating is provided in
section 11.1.9 IP / UL Rating on page 167.
Optimization
Figure 3-30
NV Media
Card
Advanced
Technical data Diagnostics
parameters
UL Listing
Installing the gasket
Enclosure
rear wall
Drive
Gasket
The standard drive is rated to IP20 pollution degree 2 (dry, nonconductive contamination only). However, it is possible to configure the
size 5 to 6 drive to achieve IP65 rating at the rear of the heatsink for
through-panel mounting (some current derating is required).
Refer to Table 11-3 on page 160.
This allows the front of the size 5 to 6 drive, along with the various
switchgear, to be housed in an IP65 enclosure with the heatsink
protruding through the panel to the external environment. The majority of
the heat generated by the drive is dissipated outside the enclosure,
thereby maintaining a reduced temperature inside the enclosure.
This relies on a good seal being made between the heatsink and the
rear of the enclosure using the gaskets provided.
Figure 3-29
Example of IP65 through-panel layout
IP65 enclosure
IP20
Drive with
high IP
insert installed
To seal the space between the drive and the backplate, use the two
securing brackets as shown in Figure 3-30. The securing brackets,
gasket and high IP inserts are included in the through-panel mounting
kit. The part numbers are shown in Table 3-5.
Figure 3-31
Through-panel mounting detail
Enclosure
rear wall
Gasket seal
The main gasket should be installed as shown in Figure 3-30
In order to achieve the high IP rating on the size 5 drive, it is necessary
to seal a heatsink vent by installing the high IP insert as shown in
Through panel
securing bracket
Through panel
securing bracket
Figure 3-32.
Table 3-5
Through-panel mounting kit part numbers
Size
CT part number
5
3470-0067
6
3470-0055
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
37
Safety
information
Product
information
Figure 3-32
Mechanical
installation
Electrical
installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
parameters
motor
Installation of high IP insert for size 5
Optimization
Table 3-7
NV Media
Card
Advanced
Technical data Diagnostics
parameters
UL Listing
Power losses from the front of the drive when throughpanel mounted
Frame size
Power loss
5
1
6
2
2
•
To install the high IP insert, firstly place a flat head screwdriver into
the slot highlighted (1).
• Pull the hinged baffle up to expose the ventilation holes, install the
high IP inserts into the ventilation holes in the heatsink (2).
• Ensure the high IP inserts are securely installed by firmly pressing
them into place (3).
• Close the hinged baffle as shown (1).
To remove the high IP inserts, reverse the above instructions.
The guidelines in Table 3-7 should be followed.
Table 3-6
Environmental considerations
Environment
Clean
High IP insert
Comments
Not installed
Dry, dusty (non-conductive)
Installed
Dry, dusty (conductive)
Installed
IP65 compliance
Installed
Regular cleaning
recommended
A current derating must be applied to the drive if the high IP insert is
installed. Derating information is provided in section 11.1.1 Power and
current ratings (Derating for switching frequency and temperature) on
page 159.
Failure to do so may result in nuisance tripping.
NOTE
When designing an IP65 enclosure, refer to Figure 3-29 on page 37 for
an example of an IP65 through-panel layout. Consideration should be
made with regard to the heat dissipation from the front of the drive.
38
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
Safety
information
Product
information
3.10
Mechanical
installation
Electrical
installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
parameters
motor
Optimization
NV Media
Card
Advanced
Technical data Diagnostics
parameters
UL Listing
External EMC filter
The external EMC filter details for each drive rating are provided in the table below.
Table 3-8
Drive and EMC filter cross reference
Model
Weight
CT part number
kg
lb
200 V
05200250
4200-0312
5.5
12.13
06200330 to 06200440
4200-2300
6.5
14.3
05400270 to 05400300
4200-0402
5.5
12.13
06400350 to 06400470
4200-4800
6.7
14.8
05500030 to 05500069
4200-0122
06500100 to 06500350
4200-3690
7.0
15.4
400 V
575 V
Mount the external EMC filter following the guidelines in section 4.8.5 Compliance with generic emission standards on page 66.
Figure 3-33 Footprint mounting the EMC filter
Figure 3-35
Figure 3-34 Bookcase mounting the EMC filter
Size 1 to 6 external EMC filter
A
Y
Z
Y
PE U2 V2 W2
X
Last / Load
Netz / Line
C
X
W
U1 V1 W1
V
L1'
L2'
L3'
Z
B
H
D
E
Z
Y
V: Ground stud
X: Threaded holes for footprint mounting of the drive
Z: Bookcase mounting slot diameter.
CS: Cable size
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
Y: Footprint mounting hole diameter
39
Safety
information
Table 3-9
Product
information
Mechanical
installation
Electrical
installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
parameters
motor
Optimization
NV Media
Card
Advanced
Technical data Diagnostics
parameters
Size 1 external EMC filter dimensions
CT part
number
Table 3-10
CT part
number
Table 3-11
CT part
number
Table 3-12
CT part
number
Table 3-13
CT part
number
A
B
C
D
E
H
W
V
X
Y
Z
CS
D
E
H
W
V
X
Y
Z
CS
D
E
H
W
V
X
Y
Z
CS
E
H
W
V
X
Y
Z
CS
E
F
X
Y
Z
CS
6.5 mm
(0.26 in)
Size 2 external EMC filter dimensions
A
B
C
Size 3 external EMC filter dimensions
A
B
C
Size 4 external EMC filter dimensions
A
B
C
D
Size 5 external EMC filter dimensions
A
B
C
D
H
W
V
4200-0312
4200-0402
4200-0122
Table 3-14
CT part
number
4200-2300
4200-4800
4200-3690
40
UL Listing
395 mm
425 mm
(15.55 in) (16.73 in)
106 mm
(4.17 in)
60 mm 33 mm 11.5 mm 437 mm
(2.36 in) (1.30 in) (0.45 in) (17.2 in)
10 mm2
(8 AWG)
143 mm
(5.63 in)
M6
M6
6.5 mm
(0.26 in)
W
V
X
Y
Z
CS
210 mm
(8.27 in)
M6
M6
6.5 mm
(0.26 in)
6.5 mm
(0.26 in)
16 mm2
(6 AWG)
2.5 mm2
(14 AWG)
Size 6 external EMC filter dimensions
A
B
392 mm
420 mm
(15.43 in) (16.54 in)
C
180 mm
(7.09 in)
D
E
F
H
60 mm 33 mm 11.5 mm 434 mm
(2.36 in) (1.30 in) (0.45 in) (17.09 in)
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
Safety
information
Product
information
Mechanical
installation
Electrical
installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
parameters
motor
3.11
Electrical terminals
3.11.1
Location of the power and ground terminals
Figure 3-36
Optimization
NV Media
Card
Advanced
Technical data Diagnostics
parameters
UL Listing
Locations of the power and ground terminals (size 1 to 4)
2
1
4
3
2
1
2
4
5
2
1
1
4
2
1
4
4
5
5
5
7
3
8
3
6
8
7
3
6
6
7
3
8
6
7
8
Key:
1. Control terminals
4. AC power terminals
7. DC bus +
2. Relay terminals
5. Motor terminals
8. Brake terminal
3. Ground connections
6. DC bus -
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
41
Safety
information
Product
information
Figure 3-37
Mechanical
installation
Electrical
installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
parameters
motor
Optimization
NV Media
Card
Advanced
Technical data Diagnostics
parameters
UL Listing
Locations of the power and ground terminals (size 5 to 6)
8
7
7
9
9
8
3
2
1
5
6
3
11
4
6
5
4
5
4
6
4
Key
1. Control terminals
4. Ground connections
2. Relay terminals
5. AC power terminals
8. DC bus +
3. Additional ground connection
6. Motor terminals
9. Brake terminal
3.11.2
7. DC bus -
Terminal sizes and torque settings
To avoid a fire hazard and maintain validity of the UL listing,
adhere to the specified tightening torques for the power and
ground terminals. Refer to the following tables.
WARNING
Table 3-15
Model
Connection type
Torque setting
All
Screw terminals
0.2 N m (0.15 lb ft)
Table 3-16
42
Drive control terminal data
Drive relay terminal data
Model
Connection type
Torque setting
All
Screw terminals
0.5 N m (0.4 lb ft)
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
Safety
information
Product
information
Table 3-17
Mechanical
installation
Electrical
installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
parameters
motor
NV Media
Card
Optimization
Advanced
Technical data Diagnostics
parameters
UL Listing
Drive power terminal data
AC and motor terminals
DC and braking
Model
size
Recommended
1
0.5 N m (0.4 lb ft)
0.5 N m (0.4 lb ft)
1.4 N m (1 lb ft)
1.4 N m (1 lb ft)
Maximum
Recommended
Ground terminal
Maximum
Recommended
2
3
Maximum
1.5 N m (1.1 lb ft)
4
Plug-in terminal block
5
1.5 N m (1.1 lb ft)
M4 Nut (7 mm AF)
1.8 N m (1.3 lb ft)
1.5 N m (1.1 lb ft)
M6 Nut (10 mm AF)
6
6.0 N m (4.4 lb ft)
Table 3-18
8.0 N m (6.0 lb ft)
6.0 N m (4.4 lb ft)
Max cable size
All
Control connector
1.5 mm2 (16 AWG)
All
2-way relay connector
2.5 mm2 (12 AWG)
AC input power connector
6 mm2 (10 AWG)
5
3.12
AC output power
connector
2.5 mm (12 AWG)
3-way AC power
connector
3-way motor connector
8 mm2 (8 AWG)
2
CT part
number
6.0 N m (4.4 lb ft)
8.0 N m (6.0 lb ft)
External EMC filter terminal data
Power
connections
Ground
connections
Max cable
size
Max torque
Ground
stud size
Max torque
16 mm2
2.3 N m
(1.70 Ib ft)
M6
4.8 N m
(2.8 Ib ft)
4200-2300
4200-4800
5.0 N m (3.7 lb ft)
M6 Nut (10 mm AF)
8.0 N m (6.0 lb ft)
Table 3-19
Terminal block
description
1 to 4
2.0 N m (1.4 lb ft)
M6 Nut (10 mm AF)
Terminal block maximum cable sizes
Model size
M5 Nut (8 mm AF)
2.5 N m (1.8 lb ft)
4200-3690
Routine maintenance
The drive should be installed in a cool, clean, well ventilated location. Contact with moisture and/or dust with the drive should be avoided.
Regular checks of the following should be carried out to ensure drive / installation reliability are maximized:
Environment
Ambient temperature
Ensure the enclosure temperature remains at or below maximum specified
Dust
Ensure the drive remains dust free – check that the heatsink and drive fan are not gathering dust.
The lifetime of the fan is reduced in dusty environments
Moisture
Ensure the drive enclosure shows no signs of condensation
Enclosure
Enclosure door filters
Ensure filters are not blocked and that air is free to flow
Electrical
Screw connections
Ensure all screw terminals remain tight
Crimp terminals
Ensure all crimp terminals remains tight – check for any discoloration which could indicate
overheating
Cables
Check all cables for signs of damage
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
43
Safety
information
3.12.1
Product
information
Mechanical
installation
Electrical
installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
parameters
motor
Optimization
NV Media
Card
Advanced
Technical data Diagnostics
parameters
UL Listing
Fan removal procedure
Figure 3-38
Removal of size 5 heatsink fan
1
1
2
A: Press the tabs (1) inwards to release the fan assembly from the underside of the drive.
B: Use the tabs (1) to withdraw the fan by pulling it away from the drive.
C: Depress and hold the locking release on the fan cable lead as shown (2).
D: With the locking release depressed (2), take hold of the fan supply cable and carefully pull to separate the connectors.
Figure 3-39
Removal of the size 6 heatsink fan
A: Press the tabs (1) inwards to release the fan assembly from the underside of the drive.
B: Use the tabs (1) to withdraw the fan by pulling it away from the drive.
C: Depress and hold the locking release on the fan cable lead as shown (2).
D: With the locking release depressed (2), take hold of the fan supply cable and carefully pull to separate the connectors.
44
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
Safety
information
4
Product
information
Mechanical Electrical
installation installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
Optimization
parameters
motor
Electrical installation
Many cable management features have been incorporated into the
product and accessories, this chapter shows how to optimize them. Key
features include:
•
•
•
•
NV Media
Card
Advanced
parameters
Technical data
4.1
Power connections
4.1.1
AC and DC connections
Figure 4-1
Diagnostics
UL Listing
Size 1 power connections
Internal EMC filter
EMC compliance with shielding / grounding accessories
Product rating, fusing and cabling information
Brake resistor details (selection / ratings)
Electric shock risk
The voltages present in the following locations can cause
severe electric shock and may be lethal:
WARNING
WARNING
• AC supply cables and connections
• DC and brake cables, and connections
• Output cables and connections
• Many internal parts of the drive, and external option units
Unless otherwise indicated, control terminals are single
insulated and must not be touched.
PE
L
Isolation device
The AC and / or DC power supply must be disconnected
from the drive using an approved isolation device before any
cover is removed from the drive or before any servicing work
is performed.
L2-N
+
BR
U
V
W
Optional EMC
filter
Optional
line reactor
Thermal
overload
protection
device
Fuses
Optional
braking
resistor
STOP function
The STOP function does not remove dangerous voltages
from the drive, the motor or any external option units.
Motor
WARNING
WARNING
L1
Stored charge
The drive contains capacitors that remain charged to a
potentially lethal voltage after the AC and / or DC power
supply has been disconnected. If the drive has been
energized, the AC and / or DC power supply must be
isolated at least ten minutes before work may continue.
L2-N
Optional ground
connection
Mains
Supply
Supply
Ground
See Figure 4-7 Size 1 to 4 ground connections (size 2 shown) on
page 48 for further information on ground connections.
Figure 4-2
Size 2 power connections
Normally, the capacitors are discharged by an internal
resistor. Under certain, unusual fault conditions, it is possible
that the capacitors may fail to discharge, or be prevented
from being discharged by a voltage applied to the output
terminals. If the drive has failed in a manner that causes the
display to go blank immediately, it is possible the capacitors
will not be discharged. In this case, consult Control
Techniques or their authorized distributor.
WARNING
Equipment supplied by plug and socket
Special attention must be given if the drive is installed in
equipment which is connected to the AC supply by a plug
and socket. The AC supply terminals of the drive are
connected to the internal capacitors through rectifier diodes
which are not intended to give safety isolation. If the plug
terminals can be touched when the plug is disconnected
from the socket, a means of automatically isolating the plug
from the drive must be used (e.g. a latching relay).
PE
L1
L2
L3
U
V
W
Optional EMC
filter
+
BR
Thermal
overload
protection
device
Optional
line reactor
Optional
braking
resistor
Fuses
Motor
L1
Supply
Ground
L2
Mains
Supply
L3
Optional ground
connection
See Figure 4-7 Size 1 to 4 ground connections (size 2 shown) on
page 48 for further information on ground connections.
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
45
Safety
information
Product
information
Mechanical Electrical
installation installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
Optimization
parameters
motor
Figure 4-4
NOTE
NV Media
Card
Advanced
parameters
Technical data
Diagnostics
UL Listing
Size 4 power connections
On the size 2 110 V drives, the supply should be connected L1 and L3.
Also the DC bus (-) has no internal connection.
Figure 4-3
PE
L1
Size 3 power connections
L2
L3
+
BR
U
V
PE
W
L1
L2
L3
Optional EMC
filter
Optional EMC
filter
Thermal
overload
protection
device
Optional
line reactor
Supply
Ground
L2
L3
See Figure 4-7 Size 1 to 4 ground connections (size 2 shown) on
page 48 for further information on ground connections.
46
W
Motor
L1
Optional ground
connection
V
Internal
EMC
filter
Motor
Mains
Supply
U
Optional
braking
resistor
Fuses
Internal
EMC
filter
L1
BR
Thermal
overload
protection
device
Optional
line reactor
Optional
braking
resistor
Fuses
+
Supply
Ground
L2
Mains
Supply
L3
Optional ground
connection
See Figure 4-7 Size 1 to 4 ground connections (size 2 shown) on
page 48 for further information on ground connections.
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
Safety
information
Figure 4-5
Product
information
Mechanical Electrical
installation installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
Optimization
parameters
motor
Size 5 power connections
Figure 4-6
NV Media
Card
Diagnostics
UL Listing
DC / Brake connections
Optional
braking
resistor
DC + DC -
Technical data
Size 6 power connections
DC / Brake connections
Thermal
overload
protection
device
Advanced
parameters
Thermal
overload
protection
device
BR
DC - DC + BR
6
AC Connections
L1
L2
L3
1
2
Motor Connections
PE
U
V
W
AC Connections
Optional EMC
filter
L1
Optional
line reactor
Fuses
L2
L3
1
PE
Motor Connections
U
V
W
Optional EMC
filter
Optional
line reactor
Motor
L1
L2
Mains
Supply
L3
Supply
Ground
Optional ground
connection
Fuses
The upper terminal block (1) is used for AC supply connection.
The lower terminal block (2) is used for Motor connection.
Motor
L1
L2
Mains
Supply
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
L3
Supply
Ground
Optional ground
connection
47
Safety
information
4.1.2
Product
information
Mechanical Electrical
installation installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
Optimization
parameters
motor
NV Media
Card
Advanced
parameters
Technical data
Diagnostics
UL Listing
Size 6
Ground connections
Electrochemical corrosion of grounding terminals
Ensure that grounding terminals are protected against
corrosion i.e. as could be caused by condensation.
On a size 6, the supply and motor ground connections are made using
the M6 studs located above the supply and motor terminals. Refer to
Figure 4-9 below.
Figure 4-9
Size 6 ground connections
WARNING
Size 1 to 4
On sizes 1 to 4, the supply and motor ground connections are made
using the ground connections located at the bottom of the drive as
shown in Figure 4-7.
Figure 4-7
Size 1 to 4 ground connections (size 2 shown)
1
1: 4 x M4 threaded holes for the ground connection.
Size 5
On size 5 the supply and motor ground connections are made using the
M5 studs located near the plug-in power connector.
Figure 4-8
Size 5 ground connections
1
1. Ground connection studs
The ground loop impedance must conform to the
requirements of local safety regulations.
WARNING
The drive must be grounded by a connection capable of
carrying the prospective fault current until the protective
device (fuse, etc.) disconnects the AC supply.
The ground connections must be inspected and tested at
appropriate intervals.
Table 4-1
1
1. Ground connection studs.
Protective ground cable ratings
Input phase
conductor size
≤ 10
mm2
Minimum ground conductor size
Either 10 mm2 or two conductors of the
same cross-sectional area as the input
phase conductor.
The same cross-sectional area as the input
> 10 mm2 and ≤ 16 mm2 phase conductor
> 16 mm2 and ≤ 35 mm2 16 mm2
> 35 mm2
48
Half of the cross-sectional area of the input
phase conductor
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
Safety
information
4.2
Product
information
Mechanical Electrical
installation installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
Optimization
parameters
motor
AC supply requirements
Voltage:
100 V drive: 100 V to 120 V ±10 %
200 V drive: 200 V to 240 V ±10 %
400 V drive: 380 V to 480 V ±10 %
575 V drive: 500 V to 575 V ±10 %
Number of phases: 3
Maximum supply imbalance: 2 % negative phase sequence (equivalent
to 3 % voltage imbalance between phases).
Frequency range: 48 to 62 Hz
For UL compliance only, the maximum supply symmetrical fault current
must be limited to 100 kA
4.2.1
Supply types
All drives are suitable for use on any supply type i.e TN-S, TN-C-S, TT
and IT.
•
•
Supplies with voltage up to 600 V may have grounding at any
potential, i.e. neutral, centre or corner (“grounded delta”)
Supplies with voltage above 600 V may not have corner grounding
Drives are suitable for use on supplies of installation category III and
lower, according to IEC60664-1. This means they may be connected
permanently to the supply at its origin in a building, but for outdoor
installation additional over-voltage suppression (transient voltage surge
suppression) must be provided to reduce category IV to category III.
WARNING
Operation with IT (ungrounded) supplies:
Special attention is required when using internal or external
EMC filters with ungrounded supplies, because in the event
of a ground (earth) fault in the motor circuit the drive may not
trip and the filter could be over-stressed. In this case, either
the filter must not be used i.e. removed, or additional
independent motor ground fault protection must be provided.
For instructions on removal, refer to section 4.8.2 Internal
EMC filter on page 63.
For details of ground fault protection contact the supplier of
the drive.
NV Media
Card
Advanced
parameters
Technical data
Diagnostics
UL Listing
Line reactors are particularly recommended for use with the following
drive models when one of the above factors exists, or when the supply
capacity exceeds 175 kVA. Size 1 to 3.
Model sizes 04200133 to 06500350 have an internal DC choke so they
do not require AC line reactors except for cases of excessive phase
unbalance or extreme supply conditions.
When required, each drive must have its own reactor(s). Three individual
reactors or a single three-phase reactor should be used.
Reactor current ratings
The current rating of the line reactors should be as follows:
Continuous current rating:
Not less than the continuous input current rating of the drive
Repetitive peak current rating:
Not less than twice the continuous input current rating of the drive
4.2.3
Input inductor calculation
To calculate the inductance required (at Y%), use the following equation:
Y
V
1
L = ---------- × ------- × -----------100
3 2πfI
Where:
I = drive rated input current (A)
L = inductance (H)
f = supply frequency (Hz)
V = voltage between lines
A ground fault in the supply has no effect in any case. If the motor must
continue to run with a ground fault in its own circuit, then an input
isolating transformer must be provided, and if an EMC filter is required it
must be located in the primary circuit.
Unusual hazards can occur on ungrounded supplies with more than one
source, for example on ships. Contact the supplier of the drive for more
information.
4.2.2
Supplies requiring line reactors
Input line reactors reduce the risk of damage to the drive resulting from
poor phase balance or severe disturbances on the supply network.
Where line reactors are to be used, reactance values of approximately 2
% are recommended. Higher values may be used if necessary, but may
result in a loss of drive output (reduced torque at high speed) because of
the voltage drop.
For all drive ratings, 2 % line reactors permit drives to be used with a
supply unbalance of up to 3.5 % negative phase sequence (equivalent to
5 % voltage imbalance between phases).
Severe disturbances may be caused by the following factors, for
example:
•
•
•
Power factor correction equipment connected close to the drive.
Large DC drives having no or inadequate line reactors connected to
the supply.
Across the line (DOL) started motor(s) connected to the supply such
that when any of these motors are started, the voltage dip exceeds
20 %.
Such disturbances may cause excessive peak currents to flow in the
input power circuit of the drive. This may cause nuisance tripping, or in
extreme cases, failure of the drive.
Drives of low power rating may also be susceptible to disturbance when
connected to supplies with a high rated capacity.
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
49
Safety
information
4.2.4
Product
information
Mechanical Electrical
installation installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
Optimization
parameters
motor
NV Media
Card
Advanced
parameters
Technical data
Diagnostics
UL Listing
Input line reactor specification for size 1 to 6
Table 4-2
AC line reactor values
Drives used
with
01200017
01200024
Dimensions
(mm)
Reactor
part
number
Input
phases
Inductance
Continuous
rms current
Peak
current
Weight
mH
A
A
kg
L
D
H
4402-0224
1
2.25
6.5
13
0.8
72
65
90
4402-0225
1
1.0
15.1
30.2
1.1
82
75
100
4402-0226
1
0.5
26.2
52.4
1.5
82
90
105
4402-0227
3
2.0
7.9
15.8
3.5
150
90
150
4402-0228
3
1.0
15.4
47.4
3.8
150
90
150
4402-0229
3
0.4
24.6
49.2
3.8
150
90
150
4402-0232
3
0.6
27.4
54.8
6
180
100
190
4400-0240**
3
0.45
46
92
11
190
150
225
4400-0241**
3
0.3
74
148
15
250
150
275
01200033
01200042
02200024
02200033
02200042
02200056
02200075
03200100
04200133
02200024
02200033
02200042
02400013
02400018
02400023
02400032
02400041
02200056
02200075
03200100
03400056
03400073
03400094
04200133
04400135
05200250
04200176
04400170
05400270
05400300
06200330
06400350
06400420
06200440
06400470
**These input reactors are not stocked by Control Techniques. Contact your local Drive Centre.
The AC line reactors for the 110 V and other size drives should be sourced locally.
NOTE
The reactance values will be higher than 2 % with some of these drives, which may result in a loss of drive output (reduced torque at high speed)
because of the voltage drop.
50
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
Safety
information
Product
information
Figure 4-10
Mechanical Electrical
installation installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
Optimization
parameters
motor
NV Media
Card
Advanced
parameters
Technical data
Diagnostics
UL Listing
Input line reactor 4402-0224, 4402-0225 and 4402-0226
Ground
terminal
A
C
D
B
Table 4-3
E
Dimensions
Dimensions
Part No
A
B
C
D
E
72 mm (2.84 in)
44.5 mm (1.75in)
35 mm (1.38 in)
65 mm (2.56 in)
40 mm (1.58 in)
75 mm (2.95 in)
53 mm (2.09 in)
90 mm (3.54 in)
4402-0224
90 mm (3.54 in)
4402-0225
100 mm (3.94 in)
4402-0226
105 mm (4.13 in)
Figure 4-11
82 mm (3.23 in)
54 mm (2.13in)
Mounting hole
8 mm x 4 mm
(0.32 in x 0.16 in)
Ground
terminal
M3
Input line reactor 4402-0227, 4402-0228, 4402-0229
A
Ground
terminal
D
C
E
B
Table 4-4
Dimensions
Part No
Dimensions
A
B
C
D
E
Mounting slot
120 mm (4.72 in)
47 mm (1.85 in)
90 mm (3.54in)
17 mm x 7 mm
(0.67 in x 0.28 in)
4402-0227
4402-0228
150 mm (5.91in) 150 mm (5.91in)
4402-0229
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
Ground
terminal
M5
51
Safety
information
4.3
Product
information
Mechanical Electrical
installation installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
Optimization
parameters
motor
NV Media
Card
Advanced
parameters
Technical data
Diagnostics
UL Listing
24 Vdc supply
The 24 Vdc supply connected to the +24 V supply terminals on the AIBackup adaptor provides the following functions:
•
It can be used as a back-up power supply to keep the control circuits
of the drive powered up when the line power supply is removed. This
allows any fieldbus modules or serial communications to continue to
operate. If the line power supply is re-applied, then the normal
operation can carry on after the drive automatically re-initializes the
power board parameters.
It can be used to clone or load parameters in order to pre-configure
drives when the line power supply is not available. The keypad can
be used to setup parameters if required. However, the drive will be in
the Under Voltage state unless the line power supply is enabled,
therefore diagnostics may not be possible. (Power down save
parameters are not saved when using the 24 V back-up power
supply input).
•
The working voltage range of the 24 V back-up power supply is as
follows:
0V
0V
+ 24 V + 24 V Backup supply input
Nominal operating voltage
24.0 Vdc
Minimum continuous operating voltage
19.2 V
Maximum continuous operating voltage
30.0 V
Minimum start up voltage
12.0 V
Minimum power supply requirement at 24 V
20 W
Recommended fuse
1 A, 50 Vdc
Minimum and maximum voltage values include ripple and noise. Ripple
and noise values must not exceed 5 %.
Figure 4-12
52
Location of the 24 Vdc power supply connection on
the AI-Backup adaptor
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
Safety
information
4.4
Product
information
Mechanical Electrical
installation installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
Optimization
parameters
motor
NV Media
Card
Advanced
parameters
Technical data
Diagnostics
UL Listing
Ratings
The input current is affected by the supply voltage and impedance.
Typical input current
The values of typical input current are given to aid calculations for power flow and power loss.
The values of typical input current are stated for a balanced supply.
Maximum continuous input current
The values of maximum continuous input current are given to aid the selection of cables and fuses. These values are stated for the worst case
condition with the unusual combination of stiff supply with bad balance. The value stated for the maximum continuous input current would only be
seen in one of the input phases. The current in the other two phases would be significantly lower.
The values of maximum input current are stated for a supply with a 2 % negative phase-sequence imbalance and rated at the supply fault current
given in Table 4-5.
Table 4-5 Supply fault current used to calculate maximum input currents
Model
Symmetrical fault level (kA)
All
100
Fuses
WARNING
The AC supply to the drive must be installed with suitable protection against overload and short-circuits. Table 4-6, Table 4-7, Table 4-8 and
Table 4-9 show the recommended fuse ratings. Failure to observe this requirement will cause risk of fire.
Table 4-6
AC Input current and fuse ratings (100 V)
Maximum
continuous
input current
Maximum
overload input
current
A
Model
Typical input
current
A
A
01100017
8.7
8.7
Fuse rating
IEC gG
Class CC or Class J
Maximum
Maximum
A
A
10
10
01100024
11.1
11.1
16
16
02100042
18.8
18.8
20
20
02100056
24.0
24.0
25
25
Table 4-7
AC Input current and fuse ratings (200 V)
Fuse rating
Maximum
continuous
input
current
Maximum
overload
input
current
Nominal
A
4.5
A
A
01200017
A
4.5
01200024
5.3
5.3
01200033
8.3
8.3
10
16
Model
Typical
input
current
IEC
1ph
gG
10.4
10.4
5.3/4.1
6
02200033
8.3/4.3
8.3/6.7
10
02200042
10.4/5.4
10.4/7.5
14.9/7.4
14.9/11.3
18.1/13.5
03200100
23.9/12.8
23.9/17.7
30/25
04200133
23.7/13.5
23.7/16.9
04200176
17.0
21.3
05200250
24
31
52
06200330
42
48
64
06200440
49
56
85
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
A
Maximum
A
1ph
Class
3ph
5
5.3/3.2
18.1/9.1
Nominal
6
02200024
02200075
Class
3ph
01200042
02200056
UL / USA
Maximum
A
10
CC or J
16
10
5
10
16
10
20
16
25
20
25
20
25
gG
gG
40
gG
63
63
gG
10
20
16
25
20
25
gG
40
16
20
25
40
60
60
CC
or J
CC
or J
CC
or J
40
CC
or J
60
CC
or J
53
Safety
information
Product
information
Mechanical Electrical
installation installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
Optimization
parameters
motor
NV Media
Card
Advanced
parameters
Technical data
Diagnostics
UL Listing
Table 4-8 AC Input current and fuse ratings (400 V)
Model
Maximum
continuous
input
current
Typical
input
current
Nominal
Maximum
A
A
A
A
02400013
A
2.1
2.4
02400018
2.6
2.9
02400023
3.1
3.5
02400032
4.7
5.1
02400041
5.8
6.2
Fuse rating
Maximum
overload
input
current
IEC
6
UL / USA
Class
Nominal
Maximum
A
A
5
gG
CC or J
10
10
03400056
8.3
8.7
13
03400073
10.2
12.2
18
03400094
13.1
14.8
20.7
04400135
14.0
16.3
20
04400170
18.5
20.7
25
05400270
26
29
52
05400300
27
30
58
06400350
32
36
67
06400420
41
46
80
06400470
54
60
90
10
16
Class
10
16
gG
CC or J
20
20
gG
CC or J
25
40
40
gG
35
63
63
gG
50
35
CC or J
60
CC or J
40
60
Table 4-9 AC Input current and fuse ratings (575 V)
Model
Typical
input
current
Maximum
continuous
input current
A
Fuse rating
Maximum
overload
input
current
Nominal
Maximum
A
A
A
A
IEC
05500030
4
4
7
05500040
6
7
9
05500069
9
11
15
20
06500100
12
13
22
20
06500150
17
19
33
32
06500190
22
24
41
40
06500230
26
29
50
06500290
33
37
63
06500350
41
47
76
10
50
20
UL / USA
Class
Nominal
Maximum
A
A
10
10
gG
Class
10
20
CC or J
20
20
40
25
30
30
gG
CC or J
35
63
40
63
50
50
NOTE
Ensure cables used suit local wiring regulations.
The nominal cable sizes below are only a guide. The mounting and grouping of cables affects their current-carrying capacity, in some cases
smaller cables may be acceptable but in other cases a larger cable is required to avoid excessive temperature or voltage drop. Refer to
local wiring regulations for the correct size of cables.
CAUTION
Table 4-10
Cable ratings (100 V)
Cable size (IEC 60364-5-52)
Model
Input
Nominal
01100017
1
01100024
1.5
02100042
2.5
02100056
4
54
Cable size (UL508C)
AWG
mm2
Output
Maximum
6
6
Nominal
1
1
1
1
Input
Maximum
2.5
2.5
Nominal
16
14
12
10
Output
Maximum
Nominal
Maximum
10
16
12
10
16
12
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
Safety
information
Product
information
Table 4-11
Mechanical Electrical
installation installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
Optimization
parameters
motor
NV Media
Card
Advanced
parameters
Technical data
Diagnostics
UL Listing
Cable ratings (200 V)
Cable size (IEC 60364-5-52)
Cable size (UL508C)
AWG
mm2
Model
Input
Output
Input
Output
Nominal
Maximum
Nominal
Maximum
Nominal
Maximum
Nominal
Maximum
1
6
1
2.5
16
10
16
12
6
1
2.5
10
16
12
01200017
01200024
01200033
01200042
02200024
02200033
1
16
02200042
02200056
2.5/1.5
02200075
2.5
03200100
4
04200133
4/2.5
04200176
4
05200250
10
06200330
16
06200440
25
Table 4-12
12/14
12
6
1.5
2.5
10/12
10
14
12
6
2.5
2.5
10
10
12
12
10
10
10
8
8
8
8
16
25
25
25
4
3
3
4
3
3
Cable ratings (400 V)
Cable size (IEC 60364-5-52)
Cable size (UL508C)
AWG
mm2
Model
Input
Output
Input
Output
Nominal
Maximum
Nominal
Maximum
Nominal
Maximum
Nominal
Maximum
1
6
1
2.5
16
10
16
12
6
1
2.5
12
10
16
02400013
02400018
02400023
02400032
02400041
03400056
1
03400073
1.5
03400094
2.5
04400135
2.5
04400170
4
05400270
05400300
06400350
10
16
06400470
25
14
1.5
6
06400420
Table 4-13
1
16
12
6
2.5
2.5
10
10
12
12
6
6
6
8
8
8
8
25
16
25
4
3
4
10
6
25
6
3
Cable ratings (575 V)
Input
Nominal
Output
Maximum
0.75
Nominal
1
05500069
1.5
1.5
1.5
1
06500100
2.5
2.5
06500150
4
4
06500190
6
06500350
10
16
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
Input
Maximum
0.75
05500040
06500290
Cable size (UL508C)
AWG
mm2
Model
06500230
3
3
Cable size (IEC 60364-5-52)
05500030
12
14
25
6
10
Nominal
Output
Maximum
16
1.5
14
16
6
14
16
14
10
8
Maximum
16
14
25
Nominal
10
3
8
3
6
55
Safety
information
Product
information
Mechanical Electrical
installation installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
Optimization
parameters
motor
NV Media
Card
Advanced
parameters
Technical data
Diagnostics
UL Listing
NOTE
PVC insulated cable should be used.
NOTE
Cable sizes are from IEC60364-5-52:2001 table A.52.C with correction factor for 40°C ambient of 0.87 (from table A52.14) for cable installation
method B2 (multicore cable in conduit).
Installation class (ref: IEC60364-5-52:2001)
B1 - Separate cables in conduit.
B2 - Multicore cable in conduit.
C - Multicore cable in free air.
Cable size may be reduced if a different installation method is used, or if the ambient temperature is lower.
N
NOTE
The nominal output cable sizes assume that the motor maximum current matches that of the drive. Where a motor of reduced rating is used the cable
rating may be chosen to match that of the motor. To ensure that the motor and cable are protected against overload, the drive must be programmed
with the correct motor rated current.
A fuse or other protection must be included in all live connections to the AC supply.
Fuse types
The fuse voltage rating must be suitable for the drive supply voltage.
MCB
Do not use an MCB instead of the recommended fuses.
Ground connections
The drive must be connected to the system ground of the AC supply. The ground wiring must conform to local regulations and codes of practice.
N
NOTE
For information on ground cable sizes, refer to Table 4-1 Protective ground cable ratings on page 48.
4.4.1
Main AC supply contactor
The recommended AC supply contactor type for size 1 to 6 is AC1.
4.5
Output circuit and motor protection
The output circuit has fast-acting electronic short-circuit protection which limits the fault current to typically no more than 2.5 times the rated output
current, and interrupts the current in approximately 20 µs. No additional short-circuit protection devices are required.
The drive provides overload protection for the motor and its cable. For this to be effective, Rated Current (00.006) must be set to suit the motor.
Motor Rated Current (00.006) must be set correctly to avoid a risk of fire in the event of motor overload.
WARNING
There is also provision for the use of a motor thermistor to prevent over-heating of the motor, e.g. due to loss of cooling.
4.5.1
Cable types and lengths
Since capacitance in the motor cable causes loading on the output of the drive, ensure the cable length does not exceed the values given in Table 414, Table 4-15, Table 4-16 and Table 4-17.
Use 105 °C (221 °F) (UL 60/75 °C temp rise) PVC-insulated cable with copper conductors having a suitable voltage rating, for the following power
connections:
•
•
•
•
AC supply to external EMC filter (when used)
AC supply (or external EMC filter) to drive
Drive to motor
Drive to braking resistor
Table 4-14 Maximum motor cable lengths (100 V drives)
100 V Nominal AC supply voltage
Model
Maximum permissible motor cable length for each of the following switching frequencies
0.667 kHz
01100017
01100024
02100042
02100056
56
1 kHz
2 kHz
3 kHz
4 kHz
6 kHz
8 kHz
12 kHz
16 kHz
50 m (164 ft)
37.5 m
(123 ft)
25 m
(82 ft)
18.75 m
(61 ft)
12.5 m
(41 ft)
9m
(30 ft)
100 m (328 ft)
75 m
(246 ft)
50 m
(164 ft)
37.5 m
(123 ft)
25 m
(82 ft)
18 m
(59 ft)
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
Safety
information
Table 4-15
Product
information
Mechanical Electrical
installation installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
Optimization
parameters
motor
NV Media
Card
Advanced
parameters
Technical data
Diagnostics
UL Listing
Maximum motor cable lengths (200 V drives)
200 V Nominal AC supply voltage
Maximum permissible motor cable length for each of the following switching frequencies
Model
0.667
kHz
1
kHz
2
kHz
3
kHz
4
kHz
6
kHz
8
kHz
12
kHz
16
kHz
50 m
(165 ft)
37.5 m
(122 ft)
25 m
(82.5 ft)
18.75 m
(61 ft)
12.5 m
(41 ft)
9m
(30 ft)
100 m
(330 ft)
75 m
(245 ft)
50 m
(165 ft)
37.5 m
(122 ft)
25 m
(82.5 ft)
18 m
(60 ft)
100 m
(330 ft)
75 m
(245 ft)
50 m
(165 ft)
37.5 m
(122 ft)
25 m
(82.5 ft)
18 m
(60 ft)
100 m
(330 ft)
75 m
(245 ft)
50 m
(165 ft)
37.5 m
(122 ft)
25 m
(82.5 ft)
18 m
(60 ft)
150 m
(490 ft)
100 m
(330 ft)
75 m
(245 ft)
50 m
(165 ft)
37 m
(120 ft)
150 m
(490 ft)
100 m
(330 ft)
75 m
(245 ft)
50 m
(165 ft)
01200017
01200024
01200033
01200042
02200024
02200033
02200042
02200056
02200075
03200100
04200133
04200176
200 m
(660 ft)
05200250
06200330
300 m
(984 ft)
06200440
Table 4-16
200 m
(660 ft)
Maximum motor cable lengths (400 V drives)
400 V Nominal AC supply voltage
Maximum permissible motor cable length for each of the following switching frequencies
Model
0.667
kHz
1
kHz
2
kHz
3
kHz
4
kHz
6
kHz
8
kHz
12
kHz
16
kHz
100 m
(330 ft)
75 m
(245 ft)
50 m
(165 ft)
37.5 m
(122 ft)
25 m
(82.5 ft)
18.25 m
(60 ft)
100 m
(330 ft)
75 m
(245 ft)
50 m
(165 ft)
37.5 m
(122 ft)
25 m
(82.5 ft)
18.25 m
(60 ft)
100 m
(330 ft)
75 m
(245 ft)
50 m
(165 ft)
37.5 m
(122 ft)
25 m
(82.5 ft)
18.25 m
(60 ft)
150 m
(490 ft)
100 m
(330 ft)
75 m
(245 ft)
50 m
(165 ft)
37 m
(120 ft)
150 m
(490 ft)
100 m
(330 ft)
75 m
(245 ft)
50 m
(165 ft)
02400013
02400018
02400023
02400032
02400041
03400056
03400073
03400094
04400135
04400170
05400270
200 m
(660 ft)
05400300
06400350
06400420
06400470
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
300 m
(984 ft)
200 m
(660 ft)
57
Safety
information
Product
information
Mechanical Electrical
installation installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
Optimization
parameters
motor
NV Media
Card
Advanced
parameters
Technical data
Diagnostics
UL Listing
Table 4-17 Maximum motor cable lengths (575 V drives)
575 V Nominal AC supply voltage
Maximum permissible motor cable length for each of the following switching frequencies
Model
0.667
kHz
1
kHz
2
kHz
05500030
3
kHz
4
kHz
6
kHz
8
kHz
12
kHz
200 m
(660 ft)
150 m
(490 ft)
100 m
(330 ft)
75 m
(245 ft)
50 m
(165 ft)
16
kHz
200 m
(660 ft)
05500040
05500069
06500100
06500150
06500190
300 m
(984 ft)
06500230
06500290
06500350
4.5.2 High-capacitance / reduced diameter cables
The maximum cable length is reduced from that shown in section
4.5.1 Cable types and lengths on page 56 capacitance or reduced
diameter motor cables are used.
Most cables have an insulating jacket between the cores and the armor
or shield; these cables have a low capacitance and are recommended.
Cables that do not have an insulating jacket tend to have high
capacitance; if a cable of this type is used, the maximum cable length is
half that quoted in the tables, (Figure 4-13 shows how to identify the two
types).
Figure 4-13
Cable construction influencing the capacitance
Normal capacitance
Shield or armour
separated from the cores
High capacitance
Shield or armour close
to the cores
The maximum motor cable lengths specified section 4.5.1 Cable types
and lengths on page 56 is shielded and contains four cores. Typical
capacitance for this type of cable is 130 pF/m (i.e. from one core to all
others and the shield connected together).
4.5.3
motoring operation but not where the motor spends significant periods
braking. In that case an insulation peak voltage rating of 2.2 kV is
recommended.
If it is not practical to use an inverter-rated motor, an output choke
(inductor) should be used. The recommended type is a simple iron-cored
component with a reactance of about 2 %. The exact value is not critical.
This operates in conjunction with the capacitance of the motor cable to
increase the rise-time of the motor terminal voltage and prevent
excessive electrical stress.
4.5.4
Multiple motors
Open-loop only
If the drive is to control more than one motor, one of the fixed V/F modes
should be selected (Pr 05.014 = Fixed or Squared). Make the motor
connections as shown in Figure 4-14 and Figure 4-15. The maximum
cable lengths in Table 4-14 to Table 4-17 apply to the sum of the total
cable lengths from the drive to each motor.
It is recommended that each motor is connected through a protection
relay since the drive cannot protect each motor individually. For
connection, a sinusoidal filter or an output inductor must be connected
as shown in Figure 4-15, even when the cable lengths are less than the
maximum permissible. For details of inductor sizes refer to the supplier
of the drive.
Figure 4-14
Preferred chain connection for multiple motors
Motor protection
relay
Motor winding voltage
The PWM output voltage can adversely affect the inter-turn insulation in
the motor. This is because of the high rate of change of voltage, in
conjunction with the impedance of the motor cable and the distributed
nature of the motor winding.
Chain connection (preferred)
For normal operation with AC supplies up to 500 Vac and a standard
motor with a good quality insulation system, there is no need for any
special precautions. In case of doubt the motor supplier should be
consulted. Special precautions are recommended under the following
conditions, but only if the motor cable length exceeds 10 m:
•
•
•
•
AC supply voltage exceeds 500 V
DC supply voltage exceeds 670 V
Operation of 400 V drive with continuous or very frequent sustained
braking
Multiple motors connected to a single drive
For multiple motors, the precautions given in section 4.5.4 Multiple
motors on page 58 should be followed.
For the other cases listed, it is recommended that an inverter-rated
motor be used taking into account the voltage rating of the inverter. This
has a reinforced insulation system intended by the manufacturer for
repetitive fast-rising pulsed voltage operation.
Users of 575 V NEMA rated motors should note that the specification for
inverter-rated motors given in NEMA MG1 section 31 is sufficient for
58
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
Safety
information
Product
information
Figure 4-15
Mechanical Electrical
installation installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
Optimization
parameters
motor
Alternative connection for multiple motors
Motor protection
relay
NV Media
Card
Advanced
parameters
Technical data
Diagnostics
UL Listing
When the regenerated power is likely to exceed these losses, the DC
bus voltage of the drive increases. Under default conditions, the drive
brakes the motor under PI control, which extends the deceleration time
as necessary in order to prevent the DC bus voltage from rising above a
user defined set-point.
If the drive is expected to rapidly decelerate a load, or to hold back an
overhauling load, a braking resistor must be installed.
connection
Table 4-18 shows the default DC voltage level at which the drive turns on
the braking transistor. However the braking resistor turn on and the turn
off voltages are programmable with Braking IGBT Lower Threshold
(06.073) and Braking IGBT Upper Threshold (06.074).
Table 4-18
Inductor
Default braking transistor turn on voltage
Drive voltage rating
DC bus voltage level
100 & 200 V
390 V
400 V
780 V
575 V
930 V
NOTE
N
When a braking resistor is used, Pr 02.004 should be set to Fast ramp
mode.
4.5.5
/ Δ motor operation
WARNING
The voltage rating for
and Δ connections of the motor should always
be checked before attempting to run the motor.
The default setting of the motor rated voltage parameter is the same as
the drive rated voltage, i.e.
CAUTION
400 V drive 400 V rated voltage
230 V drive 230 V rated voltage
A typical 3 phase motor would be connected in
for 400 V operation or
Δ for 230 V operation, however, variations on this are common e.g.
690 V Δ 400 V.
Incorrect connection of the windings will cause severe under or over
fluxing of the motor, leading to a very poor output torque or motor
saturation and overheating respectively.
4.5.6
WARNING
4.6.1
Output contactor
If the cable between the drive and the motor is to be
interrupted by a contactor or circuit breaker, ensure that the
drive is disabled before the contactor or circuit breaker is
opened or closed. Severe arcing may occur if this circuit is
interrupted with the motor running at high current and low
speed.
A contactor is sometimes required to be installed between the drive and
motor for safety purposes.
The recommended motor contactor is the AC3 type.
Switching of an output contactor should only occur when the output of
the drive is disabled.
Opening or closing of the contactor with the drive enabled will lead to:
WARNING
High temperatures
Braking resistors can reach high temperatures. Locate
braking resistors so that damage cannot result. Use cable
having insulation capable of withstanding high temperatures.
Braking resistor overload protection parameter settings
Failure to observe the following information may damage
the resistor.
The drive software contains an overload protection function
for a braking resistor.
For more information on the braking resistor software
overload protection, see Pr 10.030, Pr 10.031 and
Pr 10.061 full descriptions in the Parameter Reference
Guide.
External braking resistor
Overload protection
When an external braking resistor is used, it is essential that
an overload protection device is incorporated in the braking
resistor circuit; this is described in Figure 4-16 on page 60.
When a braking resistor is to be mounted outside the enclosure, ensure
that it is mounted in a ventilated metal housing that will perform the
following functions:
•
•
Prevent inadvertent contact with the resistor
Allow adequate ventilation for the resistor
When compliance with EMC emission standards is required, external
connection requires the cable to be armored or shielded, since it is not
fully contained in a metal enclosure. See section 4.8.5 Compliance with
generic emission standards on page 66 for further details.
Internal connection does not require the cable to be armored or
shielded.
1. OI ac trips (which cannot be reset for 10 seconds)
2. High levels of radio frequency noise emission
3. Increased contactor wear and tear
4.6
Braking
Braking occurs when the drive is decelerating the motor, or is preventing
the motor from gaining speed due to mechanical influences. During
braking, energy is returned to the drive from the motor.
When motor braking is applied by the drive, the maximum regenerated
power that the drive can absorb is equal to the power dissipation
(losses) of the drive.
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
59
Safety
information
Product
information
Mechanical Electrical
installation installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
Optimization
parameters
motor
Minimum resistance values and peak power rating for the
braking resistor at 40 °C (104 °F)
Table 4-19
Model
01100017
01100024
02100042
02100056
Table 4-20
Model
Braking resistor resistance and power rating (100 V)
Minimum
resistance*
Ω
Instantaneous
power rating
kW
130
1.2
68
Continuous
power rating
kW
2.2
Braking resistor resistance and power rating (200 V)
Instantaneous
power rating
kW
01200033
130
Continuous
power rating
kW
1.2
02200033
68
2.2
45
3.4
22
6.9
16.5
10.3
02200075
03200100
04200133
04200176
05200250
06200330
06200440
Table 4-21
Model
8.6
19.7
2.2
8.6
12.6
16.4
Braking resistor resistance and power rating (400 V)
Minimum
resistance*
Ω
Instantaneous
power rating
kW
UL Listing
Model
Minimum
resistance*
Ω
Instantaneous
power rating
kW
Continuous
power rating
kW
80
12.1
4.6
05500030
2.6
05500040
6.5
06500100
8.7
06500150
12.3
13
06500230
16.3
74
19.9
06500290
24.2
06500350
31.7
* Resistor tolerance: ±10 %
The instantaneous power rating refers to the short-term maximum power
dissipated during the on intervals of the pulse width modulated braking
control cycle. The braking resistor must be able to withstand this
dissipation for short intervals (milliseconds). Higher resistance values
require proportionately lower instantaneous power ratings.
02200024
02200056
Diagnostics
For high-inertia loads or under continuous braking, the continuous power
dissipated in the braking resistor may be as high as the power rating of
the drive. The total energy dissipated in the braking resistor is dependent
on the amount of energy to be extracted from the load.
01200042
02200042
Technical data
Braking resistor resistance and power rating (575 V)
06500190
Minimum
resistance*
Ω
Advanced
parameters
05500069
01200017
01200024
Table 4-22
NV Media
Card
Continuous
power rating
kW
In most applications, braking occurs only occasionally. This allows the
continuous power rating of the braking resistor to be much lower than
the power rating of the drive. It is therefore essential that the
instantaneous power rating and energy rating of the braking resistor are
sufficient for the most extreme braking duty that is likely to be
encountered.
Optimization of the braking resistor requires careful consideration of the
braking duty.
Select a value of resistance for the braking resistor that is not less than
the specified minimum resistance. Larger resistance values may give a
cost saving, as well as a safety benefit in the event of a fault in the
braking system. Braking capability will then be reduced, which could
cause the drive to trip during braking if the value chosen is too large.
02400013
Thermal protection circuit for the braking resistor
02400018
The thermal protection circuit must disconnect the AC supply from the
drive if the resistor becomes overloaded due to a fault. Figure 4-16
shows a typical circuit arrangement.
02400023
270
2.3
02400032
Figure 4-16
02400041
03400056
03400073
2.2
100
6.1
03400094
04400135
4
12.2
05400270
31.5
21.5
16.2
05400300
18
37.5
19.6
06400350
06400420
06400470
Optional
EMC
filter
3
50
04400170
Typical protection circuit for a braking resistor
Main contactor
power supply
Drive
21.6
17
39.8
Stop
25
32.7
Start /
Reset
Thermal
protection
device
+DC
BR
Braking resistor
See Figure 4-1 on page 45 to Figure 4-6 on page 47 for the location of
the +DC and braking resistor connections.
60
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
Safety
information
4.6.2
Product
information
Mechanical Electrical
installation installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
Optimization
parameters
motor
Braking resistor software overload protection
The drive software contains an overload protection function for a braking
resistor. In order to enable and set-up this function, it is necessary to
enter three values into the drive:
• Braking Resistor Rated Power (10.030)
• Braking Resistor Thermal Time Constant (10.031)
• Braking Resistor Resistance (10.061)
This data should be obtained from the manufacturer of the braking
resistors.
Pr 10.039 gives an indication of braking resistor temperature based on a
simple thermal model. Zero indicates the resistor is close to ambient and
100 % is the maximum temperature the resistor can withstand. A ‘br.rES’
alarm is given if this parameter is above 75 % and the braking IGBT is
active. An It.br trip will occur if Pr 10.039 reaches 100 %, when
Pr 10.037 is set to 0 (default value) or 1.
If Pr 10.037 is equal to 2 or 3, an It.br trip will not occur when Pr 10.039
reaches 100 %, but instead the braking IGBT will be disabled until
Pr 10.039 falls below 95 %. This option is intended for applications with
parallel connected DC buses where there are several braking resistors,
each of which cannot withstand full DC bus voltage continuously. With
this type of application it is unlikely the braking energy will be shared
equally between the resistors because of voltage measurement
tolerances within the individual drives. Therefore with Pr 10.037 set to 2
or 3, then as soon as a resistor has reached its maximum temperature
the drive will disable the braking IGBT, and another resistor on another
drive will take up the braking energy. Once Pr 10.039 has fallen below
95 % the drive will allow the braking IGBT to operate again.
NV Media
Card
Advanced
parameters
<1 mA (line to neutral supply, star point ground)
Size 2: <1.7 mA (line to line supply, star point ground)
<1.9 mA (line to neutral supply, star point ground)
Size 3: <3.3 mA (star point ground)
<4.9 mA (corner ground)
Size 4: < 3.5 mA (star point ground)
NOTE
The above leakage currents are just the leakage currents of the drive
with the internal EMC filter connected and do not take into account any
leakage currents of the motor or motor cable.
WARNING
WARNING
When the internal filter is installed the leakage current is
high. In this case a permanent fixed ground connection must
be provided, or other suitable measures taken to prevent a
safety hazard occurring if the connection is lost.
When the leakage current exceeds 3.5 mA, a permanent
fixed ground connection must be provided using two
independent conductors each with a cross-section equal to
or exceeding that of the supply conductors. The drive is
provided with two ground connections to facilitate this. Both
ground connections are necessary to meet EN 61800-5-1:
2007.
This software overload protection should be used in addition to an
external overload protection device.
1. AC - detects AC fault currents
The ground leakage current depends upon whether the internal EMC
filter is installed or not. The drive is supplied with the filter installed.
Instructions for removing the internal filter are given in section
4.8.2 Internal EMC filter on page 63.
9.36 mA* AC at 110 V, 50 Hz (2 phase, line to line supply, star point
ground)
16.4 mA* AC at 110 V, 50 Hz (1 phase, line to neutral supply, star
point ground)
5.3 mA* AC at 230 V, 50 Hz (3 phase supply, star point ground)
15.4 mA* AC at 230 V, 50 Hz (1 phase, line to neutral supply, star
point ground)
9.6 mA* AC at 400 V, 50 Hz (3 phase supply, star point ground)
Use of residual current device (RCD)
There are three common types of ELCB / RCD:
2. A - detects AC and pulsating DC fault currents (provided the DC
current reaches zero at least once every half cycle)
3. B - detects AC, pulsating DC and smooth DC fault currents
• Type AC should never be used with drives.
• Type A can only be used with single phase drives
• Type B must be used with three phase drives
With internal filter installed:
Size 1:
2.5 mA* AC at 230 V 50 Hz (line to line supply, star point ground)
9.2 mA* AC at 230 V 50 Hz (line to neutral supply, star point ground)
Size 2:
UL Listing
Size 1: <1.5 mA (line to line supply, star point ground)
4.7.1
Ground leakage
Diagnostics
With internal filter removed:
See the Parameter Reference Guide for more information on Pr 10.030,
Pr 10.031, Pr 10.037 and Pr 10.039.
4.7
Technical data
Only type B ELCB / RCD are suitable for use with 3 phase
inverter drives.
WARNING
If an external EMC filter is used, a delay of at least 50 ms should be
incorporated to ensure spurious trips are not seen. The leakage current
is likely to exceed the trip level if all of the phases are not energized
simultaneously.
Size 3:
19.7 mA* AC at 400 V 50 Hz (star point ground)
47.4 mA* AC at 400 V 50 Hz (corner ground)
Size 4:
21 mA* AC at 230 V 50 Hz (3 phase, star point ground)
6.8 mA* AC at 230 V 50 Hz (1 phase, line to line supply, star point
ground)
30 mA* AC at 230 V 50 Hz (1 phase, line to neutral supply, star point
ground)
50 mA* AC at 400 V 50 Hz (3 phase, star point ground)
* Proportional to the supply voltage and frequency.
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
61
Safety
information
4.8
Product
information
Mechanical Electrical
installation installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
Optimization
parameters
motor
EMC (Electromagnetic compatibility)
The requirements for EMC are divided into three levels in the following
three sections:
NV Media
Card
Advanced
parameters
Technical data
Diagnostics
UL Listing
See Figure 4-17 for details regarding the installation of the grounding bracket.
Figure 4-17
Installation of grounding bracket (size 1 to 4)
Section 4.10.3, General requirements for all applications, to ensure
reliable operation of the drive and minimise the risk of disturbing nearby
equipment. The immunity standards specified in Chapter 11 Technical
data on page 159 will be met, but no specific emission standards are
applied. Note also the special requirements given in Surge immunity of
control circuits - long cables and connections outside a building on
page 68 for increased surge immunity of control circuits where control
wiring is extended.
Section 4.8.4, Requirements for meeting the EMC standard for
power drive systems, IEC61800-3 (EN 61800-3:2004).
Section 4.8.5, Requirements for meeting the generic emission
standards for the industrial environment, IEC61000-6-4, EN 61000-64:2007.
The recommendations of section 4.8.3 General requirements for EMC
on page 65 will usually be sufficient to avoid causing disturbance to
adjacent equipment of industrial quality. If particularly sensitive
equipment is to be used nearby, or in a non-industrial environment, then
the recommendations of section 4.8.4 or section 4.8.5 should be
followed to give reduced radio-frequency emission.
In order to ensure the installation meets the various emission standards
described in:
•
•
•
The EMC data sheet available from the supplier of the drive
The Declaration of Conformity at the front of this manual
Chapter 11 Technical data on page 159
Loosen the ground connection screws and slide the grounding bracket in
the direction shown. Once in place, the ground connection screws
should be tightened to a maximum torque of 1.5 N m (1.1 lb ft).
Figure 4-18
Installation of grounding bracket (size 5 to 6 - size 5
shown)
The correct external EMC filter must be used and all of the guidelines in
section 4.8.3 General requirements for EMC on page 65 and section
4.8.5 Compliance with generic emission standards on page 66 must be
followed.
Table 4-23
Drive and EMC filter cross reference
Model
CT part number
200 V
05200250
4200-0312
06200330 to 06200440
4200-2300
400 V
05400270 to 05400300
4200-0402
06400350 to 06400470
4200-4800
575 V
05500030 to 05500069
4200-0122
06500100 to 06500350
4200-3690
WARNING
NOTE
High ground leakage current
When an EMC filter is used, a permanent fixed ground
connection must be provided which does not pass through a
connector or flexible power cord. This includes the internal
EMC filter.
N
The installer of the drive is responsible for ensuring compliance with the
EMC regulations that apply in the country in which the drive is to be
used.
4.8.1
Loosen the ground connection nuts and slide the grounding bracket in
the direction shown. Once in place, the ground connection nuts should
be tightened to a maximum torque of 2.0 N m (1.47 lb ft).
Grounding hardware
The drive is supplied with a grounding bracket / clamp to facilitate EMC
compliance. This provides a convenient method for direct grounding of
cable shields without the use of "pig-tails”. Cable shields can be bared
and clamped to the grounding bracket using metal clips or clamps1 (not
supplied) or cable ties. Note that the shield must in all cases be
continued through the clamp to the intended terminal on the drive, in
accordance with the connection details for the specific signal.
1
A suitable clamp is the Phoenix DIN rail mounted SK14 cable clamp
(for cables with a maximum outer diameter of 14 mm).
62
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
Safety
information
Figure 4-19
Product
information
Mechanical Electrical
installation installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
Optimization
parameters
motor
Installation of grounding clamp size 5
Loosen the ground connection nuts and slide the grounding clamp down
onto the pillars in the direction shown. Once in place, the ground
connection nuts should be tightened with a maximum torque of 2 N m
(1.47 lb ft).
NV Media
Card
Figure 4-20
Advanced
parameters
Technical data
Diagnostics
UL Listing
Installation of grounding clamp size 6
The grounding clamp is secured using the provided 2 x M4 x 10 mm
fasteners. The fasteners should be tightened with the maximum torque
of 2 N m (1.47 Ib ft).
4.8.2
Internal EMC filter
It is recommended that the internal EMC filter be kept in place unless
there is a specific reason for removing it. If the drive is used as a
motoring drive as part of a regen system, then the internal EMC filter
must be removed.
The internal EMC filter reduces radio-frequency emission into the line
power supply. Where the motor cable is short, it permits the
requirements of EN 61800-3:2004 to be met for the second environment
- see section 4.8.4 Compliance with EN 61800-3:2004 (standard for
Power Drive Systems) on page 66 and section on page 176. For longer
motor cables the filter continues to provide a useful reduction in
emission levels, and when used with any length of shielded motor cable
up to the limit for the drive, it is unlikely that nearby industrial equipment
will be disturbed. It is recommended that the filter be used in all
applications unless the instructions given above require it to be
removed, or where the ground leakage current of 9.2 mA for size 1 is
unacceptable. As shown in Figure 4-21 the size 1 internal EMC filter is
removed by removing the screw (1).
The supply must be disconnected before removing the
internal EMC filter.
WARNING
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
63
Safety
information
Figure 4-21
Product
information
Mechanical Electrical
installation installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
Optimization
parameters
motor
Removal of the size 1 internal EMC filter
Figure 4-24
NV Media
Card
Advanced
parameters
Technical data
Diagnostics
UL Listing
Removal of the size 4 internal EMC filter
1
1
To electrically disconnect the internal EMC filter, remove the screw as
shown above (1).
Figure 4-22
To electrically disconnect the internal EMC filter, remove the screw as
shown above (1).
Figure 4-25
Removal of the size 5 internal EMC filter
Removal of the size 2 internal EMC filter
3
1
2
1
To electrically disconnect the internal EMC filter, remove the screw as
shown above (1).
Figure 4-23
Removal of the size 3 internal EMC filter
Remove the three M4 terminal nuts (1). Lift away the cover (2) to expose
the M4 Torx internal EMC filter removal screw. Finally remove the M4
Torx internal EMC filter removal screw (3) to electrically disconnect the
internal EMC filter.
Figure 4-26
Removal of the size 6 internal EMC filter
1
1
To electrically disconnect the internal EMC filter, remove the screw as
shown above (1).
64
To electrically disconnect the internal EMC filter, remove the screw as
shown above (1).
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
Safety
information
4.8.3
Product
information
Mechanical Electrical
installation installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
Optimization
parameters
motor
NV Media
Card
Advanced
parameters
Technical data
Diagnostics
UL Listing
General requirements for EMC
Ground (earth) connections
The grounding arrangements should be in accordance with Figure 4-27, which shows a single drive on a back-plate with or without an additional
enclosure.
Figure 4-27 shows how to configure and minimise EMC when using unshielded motor cable. However shielded cable is a better option, in which case
it should be installed as shown in section 4.8.5 Compliance with generic emission standards on page 66.
Figure 4-27 General EMC enclosure layout showing ground connections
If ground connections are
made using a separate
cable, they should run
parallel to the appropriate
power cable to minimise
emissions
Metal backplate
Optional EMC
filter
If the control circuit 0V
is to be grounded, this
should be done at the
system controller only to
avoid injecting noise
currents into the 0V circuit
3 phase AC supply
External
controller
0V PE
~
PE
Grounding bar
The incoming supply ground
should be connected to a
single power ground bus bar
or low impedance earth
terminal inside the cubicle.
This should be used as a
common 'clean' ground for all
components inside the cubicle.
Use four core cable to
connect the motor to the drive.
The ground conductor in the
motor cable must be connected
directly to the earth terminal of
the drive and motor.
It must not be connected directly
to the power earth busbar.
Metal backplate
safety bonded to
power ground busbar
Optional
ground
connection
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
65
Safety
information
Product
information
Mechanical Electrical
installation installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
Optimization
parameters
motor
Cable layout
Figure 4-28 indicates the clearances which should be observed around
the drive and related ‘noisy’ power cables by all sensitive control signals
/ equipment.
Figure 4-28
Drive cable clearances
Optional braking resistor and overload
NV Media
Card
Advanced
parameters
Technical data
Diagnostics
UL Listing
Operation in the second environment
In all cases a shielded motor cable must be used, and an EMC filter is
required for all drives with a rated input current of less than 100 A.
The drive contains an in-built filter for basic emission control. In some
cases feeding the motor cables (U, V and W) once through a ferrite ring
can maintain compliance for longer cable lengths.
For longer motor cables, an external filter is required. Where a filter is
required, follow the guidelines in Section 4.8.5 Compliance with generic
emission standards .
Where a filter is not required, follow the guidelines given in section
4.8.3 General requirements for EMC on page 65.
CAUTION
The second environment typically includes an industrial lowvoltage power supply network which does not supply
buildings used for residential purposes. Operating the drive in
this environment without an external EMC filter may cause
interference to nearby electronic equipment whose sensitivity
has not been appreciated. The user must take remedial
measures if this situation arises. If the consequences of
unexpected disturbances are severe, it is recommended that
the guidelines in Section 4.8.5 Compliance with generic
emission standards be adhered to.
Refer to section 11.1.25 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) on
page 176 for further information on compliance with EMC standards and
definitions of environments.
Do not place sensitive
(unscreened) signal circuits
within a zone extending
300 mm (12 in) around the
Drive, motor cable, or input
cable from the EMC filter and
unshielded braking resistor
cable (if used)
Detailed instructions and EMC information are given in the EMC Data
Sheet which is available from the supplier of the drive.
4.8.5
Compliance with generic emission standards
The following information applies to frame sizes 1 to 6.
Use the recommended filter and shielded motor cable. Observe the
layout rules given in Figure 4-29. Ensure the AC supply and ground
cables are at least 100 mm from the power module and motor cable.
Figure 4-29
Supply and ground cable clearance (sizes 1 to 6)
300 mm
(12 in)
NOTE
≥100 mm
(4 in)
N
Any signal cables which are carried inside the motor cable (i.e. motor
thermistor, motor brake) will pick up large pulse currents via the cable
capacitance. The shield of these signal cables must be connected to
ground close to the motor cable, to avoid this noise current spreading
through the control system.
4.8.4
Compliance with EN 61800-3:2004 (standard
for Power Drive Systems)
Meeting the requirements of this standard depends on the environment
that the drive is intended to operate in, as follows:
Operation in the first environment
Observe the guidelines given in section 4.8.5 Compliance with generic
emission standards on page 66. An external EMC filter will always be
required.
This is a product of the restricted distribution class according
to IEC 61800-3
CAUTION
66
≥100 mm
(4 in)
Do not modify
the filter wires
In a residential environment this product may cause radio
interference in which case the user may be required to take
adequate measures.
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
Safety
information
Product
information
Mechanical Electrical
installation installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
Optimization
parameters
motor
NV Media
Card
Advanced
parameters
Technical data
Diagnostics
UL Listing
Avoid placing sensitive signal circuits in a zone 300 mm (12 in) in the
area immediately surrounding the power module.
The unbroken motor cable shield (unbroken) electrically connected to
and held in place by means of the grounding bracket.
Figure 4-30
Connect the shield of the motor cable to the ground terminal of the motor
frame using a link that is as short as possible and not exceeding 50 mm
(2 in) long.
Sensitive signal circuit clearance
A complete 360° termination of the shield to the terminal housing of the
motor is beneficial.
From an EMC consideration it is irrelevant whether the motor cable
contains an internal (safety) ground core, or if there is a separate
external ground conductor, or where grounding is through the shield
alone. An internal ground core will carry a high noise current and
therefore it must be terminated as close as possible to the shield
termination.
Figure 4-32
≥300 mm
(12 in)
Grounding the motor cable shield
Sensitive
signal
cable
Ensure good EMC grounding.
Figure 4-31
Grounding the drive, motor cable shield and filter
Unshielded wiring to the optional braking resistor(s) may be used
provided the wiring runs internally to the enclosure. Ensure a minimum
spacing of 300 mm (12 in) from the signal wiring and the AC supply
wiring to the external EMC filter. If this condition cannot be met then the
wiring must be shielded.
Figure 4-33
Shielding requirements of optional external braking
resistor
Optional external
braking resistor
Optional external
braking resistor
Enclosure
Enclosure
1
BR
+DC
OR
+DC
NOTE
1: Ensure direct metal contact at the drive and filter mounting points. Any
paint must be removed beforehand.
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
BR
+DC
BR
If the control wiring is to leave the enclosure, it must be shielded and the
shield(s) clamped to the drive using the grounding bracket as shown in
Figure 4-34.
67
Safety
information
Product
information
Mechanical Electrical
installation installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
Optimization
parameters
motor
NV Media
Card
Advanced
parameters
Technical data
Diagnostics
UL Listing
Remove the outer insulating cover of the cable to ensure the shield(s)
make direct contact with the bracket, but keep the shield(s) intact until as
close as possible to the terminals
The coupling-bar may be grounded to a known low-impedance ground
nearby, for example a large metallic structure which is connected closely
to the drive ground.
Alternatively, wiring may be passed through a ferrite ring, part number
3225-1004.
Figure 4-36
Figure 4-34
Connecting the motor cable to an isolator /
disconnect switch
Grounding of signal cable shields using the
grounding bracket
Isolator
From the
Drive
To the
motor
Coupling bar
(If required)
Surge immunity of control circuits - long cables and
connections outside a building
The input/output ports for the control circuits are designed for general
use within machines and small systems without any special precautions.
These circuits meet the requirements of EN 61000-6-2:2005 (1 kV
surge) provided the 0 V connection is not grounded.
4.8.6
Variations in the EMC wiring
Interruptions to the motor cable
The motor cable should ideally be a single length of shielded or armored
cable having no interruptions. In some situations it may be necessary to
interrupt the cable, as in the following examples:
•
•
Connecting the motor cable to a terminal block in the drive enclosure
Installing a motor isolator / disconnect switch for safety when work is
done on the motor
In these cases the following guidelines should be followed.
Terminal block in the enclosure
The motor cable shields should be bonded to the back-plate using
uninsulated metal cable-clamps which should be positioned as close as
possible to the terminal block. Keep the length of power conductors to a
minimum and ensure that all sensitive equipment and circuits are at
least 0.3 m (12 in) away from the terminal block.
Figure 4-35
Connecting the motor cable to a terminal block in the
enclosure
From the Drive
In applications where they may be exposed to high-energy voltage
surges, some special measures may be required to prevent malfunction
or damage. Surges may be caused by lightning or severe power faults in
association with grounding arrangements which permit high transient
voltages between nominally grounded points. This is a particular risk
where the circuits extend outside the protection of a building.
As a general rule, if the circuits are to pass outside the building where
the drive is located, or if cable runs within a building exceed 30 m, some
additional precautions are advisable. One of the following techniques
should be used:
1. Galvanic isolation, i.e. do not connect the control 0 V terminal to
ground. Avoid loops in the control wiring, i.e. ensure every control
wire is accompanied by its return (0 V) wire.
2. Shielded cable with additional power ground bonding. The cable
shield may be connected to ground at both ends, but in addition the
ground conductors at both ends of the cable must be bonded
together by a power ground cable (equipotential bonding cable) with
cross-sectional area of at least 10 mm2, or 10 times the area of the
signal cable shield, or to suit the electrical safety requirements of the
plant. This ensures that fault or surge current passes mainly through
the ground cable and not in the signal cable shield. If the building or
plant has a well-designed common bonded network this precaution
is not necessary.
3. Additional over-voltage suppression - for the analog and digital
inputs and outputs, a zener diode network or a commercially
available surge suppressor may be connected in parallel with the
input circuit as shown in Figure 4-37 and Figure 4-38.
If a digital port experiences a severe surge its protective trip may operate
(O.Ld1 trip). For continued operation after such an event, the trip can be
reset automatically by setting Pr 10.034 to 5.
Figure 4-37
Back-plate
Surge suppression for digital and unipolar inputs and
outputs
Signal from plant
Enclosure
30V zener diode
e.g. 2xBZW50-15
To the motor
Using a motor isolator / disconnect-switch
Signal to drive
0V
0V
The motor cable shields should be connected by a very short conductor
having a low inductance. The use of a flat metal coupling-bar is
recommended; conventional wire is not suitable.
The shields should be bonded directly to the coupling-bar using
uninsulated metal cable-clamps. Keep the length of the exposed power
conductors to a minimum and ensure that all sensitive equipment and
circuits are at least 0.3 m (12 in) away.
68
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
Safety
information
Product
information
Figure 4-38
Mechanical Electrical
installation installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
Optimization
parameters
motor
Surge suppression for analog and bipolar inputs and
outputs
Signal from plant
Signal to drive
Table 4-25
0V
Unipolar TT-UKK5-D/24 DC
Bipolar TT-UKK5-D/24 AC
These devices are not suitable for encoder signals or fast digital data
networks because the capacitance of the diodes adversely affects the
signal. Most encoders have galvanic isolation of the signal circuit from
the motor frame, in which case no precautions are required. For data
networks, follow the specific recommendations for the particular
network.
Figure 4-39
Location of the AI-485 Adaptor option
2
RX\ TX\
3
RX TX
4
120 Ω Termination resistor
5
TX Enable
6
+24 V (100 mA)
2
3
4
5
The serial PC communications port is single insulated and meets the
requirements for ELV.
WARNING
When using the communications port with a personal
computer or centralised controller e.g. PLC, an isolation
device must be included with a rated voltage at least equal
to the drive supply voltage. Ensure that the correct fuses are
installed at the drive input, and that the drive is connected to
the correct supply voltage.
If a serial communications converter other than the CT
Comms cable is used to connect to other circuits classified
as Safety Extra Low Voltage (SELV) (e.g. to a personal
computer), then a safety isolating barrier must be included to
maintain the SELV classification.
An isolated serial communications lead has been designed to connect
the drive to IT equipment (such as laptop computers), and is available
from the supplier of the drive. See below for details:
Isolated serial comms lead details
Part number
Description
4500-0096
CT USB Comms cable
6
8
UL Listing
Isolation of the 485 serial communications
port
Table 4-26
1
Diagnostics
Function
0V
Communications connections
Installing an AI-485 Adaptor provides the drive with a 2 wire 485 serial
communications interface. This enables the drive set-up, operation and
monitoring to be carried out with a PC or controller as required.
Technical data
Serial communication port pin-outs (screw terminal
block)
1
4.9.2
Surge suppression devices are available as rail-mounting modules, e.g.
from Phoenix Contact:
4.9
Advanced
parameters
Pin
2 x 15V zener diode
e.g. 2xBZW50-15
0V
NV Media
Card
1
The “isolated serial communications” lead has reinforced insulation as
defined in IEC60950 for altitudes up to 3,000 m.
4.10
Control connections
4.10.1
General
Table 4-27
The control connections consist of:
Qty
Control parameters
available
Terminal
number
Single ended analog
input
2
Mode, offset, invert, scaling,
destination
2, 5
Analog output
1
Source, mode, scaling,
Function
4.9.1
485 serial communications
The drive only supports Modbus RTU protocol. See Table 4-24 for the
connection details.
NOTE
Standard Ethernet cables are not recommended for use when
connecting drives on a 485 network as they do not have the correct
twisted pairs for the pinout of the serial comms port.
Table 4-24
Serial communication port pin-outs (RJ45)
Pin
Function
1
120 Ω Termination resistor
2
RX TX
3
0V
4
+24 V (100 mA)
5
Not connected
6
TX enable
7
RX\ TX\
8
RX\ TX\ (if termination resistors are required, link to pin 1)
Minimum number of connections are 2, 3, 7 and shield.
7
11, 12, 13,
14
Digital input
4
Destination, invert
Digital input / output
1
Input / output mode select,
destination / source, invert
Relay
1
Source, invert
Drive enable
1
11
+10 V User output
1
4
+24 V User output
1
9
0V common
1
1
10
41, 42
Key:
Destination parameter:
Indicates the parameter which is being controlled
by the terminal / function
Source parameter:
Indicates the parameter being output by the
terminal
Mode parameter:
Analog - indicates the mode of operation of the
terminal, i.e. voltage 0-10 V, current 4-20 mA etc.
Digital - indicates the mode of operation of the
terminal, (the Drive Enable terminal is fixed in
positive logic).
All analog terminal functions can be programmed in menu 7.
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
69
Safety
information
Product
information
Mechanical Electrical
installation installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
Optimization
parameters
motor
All digital terminal functions (including the relay) can be programmed in
menu 8.
WARNING
WARNING
CAUTION
NOTE
The control circuits are isolated from the power circuits in the
drive by basic insulation (single insulation) only. The installer
must ensure that the external control circuits are insulated
from human contact by at least one layer of insulation
(supplementary insulation) rated for use at the AC supply
voltage.
If the control circuits are to be connected to other circuits
classified as Safety Extra Low Voltage (SELV) (e.g. to a
personal computer), an additional isolating barrier must be
included in order to maintain the SELV classification.
If any of the digital inputs (including the drive enable input)
are connected in parallel with an inductive load (i.e.
contactor or motor brake) then suitable suppression (i.e.
diode or varistor) should be used on the coil of the load. If no
suppression is used then over voltage spikes can cause
damage to the digital inputs and outputs on the drive.
N
Any signal cables which are carried inside the motor cable (i.e. motor
thermistor, motor brake) will pick up large pulse currents via the cable
capacitance. The shield of these signal cables must be connected to
ground close to the point of exit of the motor cable, to avoid this noise
current spreading through the control system.
Figure 4-40
4.10.2
1
NV Media
Card
Technical data
Diagnostics
UL Listing
Control terminal specification
0V common
Function
2
Advanced
parameters
Common connection for all external devices
Analog input 1
Default function
Frequency reference
Type of input
Unipolar single-ended analog voltage or
unipolar current
Mode controlled by…
Pr 07.007
Operating in voltage mode (default)
Full scale voltage range
0 V to +10 V ±3 %
Maximum offset
±30 mV
Absolute maximum voltage range
-18 V to +30 V relative to 0 V
Input resistance
100 kΩ
Operating in current mode
Current ranges
0 to 20 mA ±5 %, 20 to 0 mA ±5 %,
4 to 20 mA ±5 %, 20 to 4 mA ±5 %
Maximum offset
250 µA
Absolute maximum voltage (reverse
bias)
-18 V to +30 V relative to 0 V
Absolute maximum current
25 mA
Equivalent input resistance
165 Ω
Common to all modes
Resolution
11 bits
Sample / update
5 ms
Default terminal functions
4
1
14
41 42
Supply for external analog devices
Nominal voltage
10.2 V
Voltage tolerance
±3 %
Maximum output current
5 mA
5
0V common
1
Analog
frequency
reference 1
Analog
frequency
reference 2
+10 V user output
Default function
Analog input 2
Default function
Frequency reference
Type of input
Unipolar single-ended analog voltage or
positive logic only digital input
Mode controlled by....
Pr 07.011
2
+10 V
4
Operating in voltage mode (default)
5
Frequency
7
Full scale voltage range
0 V to +10 V ±3 %
Maximum offset
±30 mV
Absolute maximum voltage range
-18 V to +30 V relative to 0 V
Input resistance
100 kΩ
Resolution
11 bits
Sample / update period
5 ms
Operating in digital mode
+24 V
At zero frequency
9
10
Drive enable
11
Run forward
12
Run reverse
13
Analog input 1/
input 2 select
Absolute maximum applied voltage
range
-18 V to +30 V relative to 0 V
Impedance
6.8 kΩ
Input threshold
10 V ±0.8 V from IEC 61131-2
Sample / update period
2 ms when routed to destinations Pr 06.035
or Pr 06.036, otherwise 6 ms.
Analog input 1 select
14
Analog input 2 select
41
Drive OK
42
70
Relay
(over-voltage
category II)
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
Safety
information
7
Product
information
Mechanical Electrical
installation installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
Optimization
parameters
motor
14
Analog output 1
Default function
Frequency output
Type of output
Unipolar single-ended analog voltage
Voltage range
+10 V
NV Media
Card
Advanced
parameters
Technical data
Diagnostics
UL Listing
Digital Input 5
Terminal 14 default function
Analog INPUT 1 / INPUT 2 select
Type
Positive logic only digital input. Frequency
input or motor thermistor input (bias for
DIN44081 ptc, KTY84, PT1000, PT2000
and other types) mode can be selected.
Maximum offset
15 mV
Load resistance
≥ 2 kΩ
Voltage range
0 V to +24 V
Protection
Short circuit relative to 0 V
Resolution
0.1 %
Absolute maximum applied
voltage range
-18 V to +30 V relative to 0 V
5 ms
Impedance
6.8 kΩ
Input threshold
10 V ±0.8 V from IEC 61131-2
Sample / update period
2 ms when routed to destinations Pr 06.035
or Pr 06.036, otherwise 6 ms.
Sample / update period
9
+24 V user output
Default function
Supply for external digital devices
Voltage tolerance
±20 %
Maximum output current
100 mA
41
Protection
Current limit and trip
42
10
Digital I/O 1
Relay contacts
Default function
Contact voltage rating
Drive OK indicator
240 Vac, Installation over-voltage category II
Default function
AT ZERO FREQUENCY output
Contact maximum current rating
Type
Positive logic digital input, positive logic
voltage source output.
PWM or frequency output modes can be
selected.
2 A AC 240 V
4 A DC 30 V resistive load
0.5 A DC 30 V inductive load (L/R = 40 ms)
Contact minimum recommended
rating
12 V 100 mA
Input / output mode controlled by …
Pr 08.031
Contact type
Normally open
Operating as in input
Absolute maximum applied voltage
range
Default contact condition
Closed when power applied and drive OK
Update period
4 ms
-8 V to +30 V relative to 0 V
Impedance
6.8 kΩ
Input threshold
10 V ±0.8 V from IEC 61131-2
To prevent the risk of a fire hazard in the event of a fault, a
fuse or other over-current protection must be installed in the
relay circuit.
Operating as an output
Nominal maximum output current
50 mA
Maximum output current
100 mA (total including +24 Vout)
WARNING
Common to all modes
Voltage range
0 V to +24 V
Sample / update period
2 ms when routed to destinations
Pr 06.035 or Pr 06.036, otherwise 6 ms
11
Digital Input 2
12
Digital Input 3
13
Digital Input 4
Terminal 11 default function
DRIVE ENABLE input
Terminal 12 default function
RUN FORWARD input
Terminal 13 default function
RUN REVERSE input
Type
Positive logic only digital inputs
Voltage range
0 V to +24 V
Absolute maximum applied voltage
range
-18 V to +30 V relative to 0 V
Impedance
6.8 kΩ
Input threshold
10 V ±0.8 V from IEC 61131-2
Sample / update period
2 ms when routed to destinations
Pr 06.035 or Pr 06.036, otherwise 6 ms.
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
71
Safety
information
5
Product
information
Mechanical
installation
Electrical
installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
Optimization
parameters
motor
Getting started
Understanding the display
5.1.1
Keypad
The red stop button
Table 5-1
UL Listing
is also used to reset the drive.
Keypad display formats
Display formats
The display also includes LED indicators showing units and status as
shown in Figure 5-1. When the drive is powered up, the display will show
the power up parameter defined by Parameter Displayed At Power-Up
(11.022).
Unidrive M200 keypad detail
Value
Standard
100.99
Date
31.12.11 or 12.31.11
Time
12.34.56
Character
ABCDEF
Binary
5
IP Address
192.168 88.1*
MAC Address
01.02.03 04.05.06*
Version number
01.23.45
*Alternate display
10
5.2
Keypad operation
5.2.1
Control buttons
7
The keypad consists of:
8
9
•
•
1
6
2
5
3
4
•
•
•
Escape button
Down button
Start button
Stop / Reset button (red)
Up button
Enter button
Run forward indicator
Run reverse indicator
Keypad reference indicator
Unit indicators
Figure 5-2
Diagnostics
The parameter value is correctly displayed on the keypad display as
shown in Table 5-1.
The option module Unidrive menu (S.mm.ppp) is only displayed if the
option module is installed. Where S signifies the option module slot
number and the mm.ppp signifies the menu and parameter number of
the option module’s internal menus and parameter.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Technical data
On the Unidrive M201, the speed reference potentiometer is used to
adjust the keypad reference.
The keypad display consists of a 6 digit LED display. The display shows
the drive status or the menu and parameter number currently being
edited.
Figure 5-1
Advanced
parameters
NOTE
This chapter introduces the user interfaces, menu structure and security
levels of the drive.
5.1
NV Media
Card
Up and down button - Used to navigate the parameter structure and
change parameter values.
Enter button - Used to toggle between parameter edit and view
mode. This button can also be used to select between slot menu and
parameter display.
Escape button - Used to exit from parameter edit or view mode. In
parameter edit mode, if parameter values are edited and the escape
button pressed, the parameter value will be restored to the value it
had on entry to edit mode.
Start button - Used to provide a 'Run' command if keypad mode is
selected.
Stop / Reset button - Used to reset the drive. In keypad mode can be
used for 'Stop'.
Unidrive M201 keypad detail
2
1
V A Hz rpm %
5
4
1
3
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
72
Run forward indicator
Unit indicators
Speed reference potentiometer
Keypad reference indicator
Run reverse indicator
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
Safety
information
Figure 5-3
Product
information
Mechanical
installation
Electrical
installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
Optimization
parameters
motor
NV Media
Card
Advanced
parameters
Technical data
Diagnostics
UL Listing
Display modes
Status
If Drive Status (Pr 10.101) = 4 (Run)
Show value only
If Drive Status (Pr 10.101) <> 4
Show status only
or
Timeout
240 s or hold
Press and release to
go back to status
Press and release.
Show last slot / menu / param
selected
or
Slot select
Go to Status if no
option installed
(Only if option installed)
or
Press
or
to select _ or 1
Edited digit flashes
Press and release to
edit Slot
Press and release to
edit Menu
Menu select
Press
or
Parameter format s.mm.ppp
s: _ or 0: for drive. If drive is
selected then hide first digit and
show only menu and parameter.
1: for option
mm: menu number (0 to 99)
ppp: parameter number (0 to 999)
to select menu
Edited digits flash
Press and release to
edit Parameter
Press and release to
edit Menu
Parameter select
Press
or
to select parameter.
Edited digits flash
Press and
release to view
Press and release to
edit Parameter
View
Show previous or next
parameter
or
Press and
release to
discard new
value and return
to original value
- Press and release to go to next or
previous parameter. Parameter flashes
briefly then goes back to View.
Press and release
to edit
- Press and release to accept
new value to be set.
- Reset drive if required.
- Execute action if required.
- Holding
or
scrolls through each
parameter within the menu.
- Holding
and
together sets value to
zero.
Edit
Press
or
to select value
- Edited digit flashes
- Holding or
increases or decreases value.
Holding
or timeout will discard
new value and return
to original value.
- Modified value has a direct effect on the drive
except routing parameters and special parameters.
- New value can be validated or discarded.
- Holding
digit.
+
or
edit the next or previous
NOTE
The up and down buttons can only be used to move between menus if Pr 00.010 has been set to show 'ALL'. Refer to section 5.9 Parameter access
level and security on page 76.
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
73
Safety
information
Figure 5-4
Product
information
Mechanical
installation
Electrical
installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
Optimization
parameters
motor
5.3
Mode examples
NV Media
Card
Advanced
parameters
Technical data
Diagnostics
UL Listing
Menu structure
The drive parameter structure consists of menus and parameters.


The drive initially powers up so that only Menu 0 can be viewed. The up
and down arrow buttons are used to navigate between parameters and
once Pr 00.010 has been set to 'All' the up and down buttons are used to
navigate between menus.
For further information refer to section 5.9 Parameter access level and
security on page 76.
1
2
The menus and parameters rollover in both directions i.e. if the last
parameter is displayed, a further press will cause the display to rollover
and show the first parameter.


When changing between menus, the drive remembers which parameter
was last viewed in a particular menu and thus displays that parameter.
5.4
3
1
4
Parameter view mode: Read write or Read only
2 Status mode: Drive OK status
If the drive is ok and the parameters are not being edited or viewed, the
display will show one of the following:
inh', 'rdy' or status mode parameter value.
3 Status mode: Trip status
When the drive is in trip condition, the display will indicate that the drive
has tripped and the display will show the trip code. For further
information regarding trip codes, refer to section 12.4 Trips, Sub-trip
numbers on page 180.
4 Status mode: Alarm status
During an 'alarm' condition the display flashes between the drive status
parameter value and the alarm.
Do not change parameter values without careful
consideration; incorrect values may cause damage or a
safety hazard.
Menu 0
Menu 0 is used to bring together various commonly used parameters for
basic easy set up of the drive. The parameters displayed in Menu 0 can
be configured in Menu 22.
Appropriate parameters are copied from the advanced menus into Menu
0 and thus exist in both locations.
For further information, refer to Chapter 6 Basic parameters on page 78.
Figure 5-5
Menu 0 copying
Menu 2
02.021 10.0
Menu 0
Menu 1
00.004 10
00.005 AV
00.006 0.00
11.034
AV
Menu 4
WARNING
NOTE
When changing the values of parameters, make a note of the new
values in case they need to be entered again.
05.007 0.00
NOTE
For new parameter values to apply after the line power supply to the
drive is interrupted, new values must be saved. Refer to section
5.7 Saving parameters on page 75.
74
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
Safety
information
5.5
Product
information
Mechanical
installation
Electrical
installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
Optimization
parameters
motor
Advanced menus
5.5.2
NV Media
Card
Advanced
parameters
Technical data
Diagnostics
UL Listing
Alarm indications
The advanced menus consist of groups or parameters appropriate to a
specific function or feature of the drive. Menus 0 to 22 can be viewed on
the Keypad.
An alarm is an indication given on the display by alternating the alarm
string with the drive status string on the display. Alarms strings are not
displayed when a parameter is being edited.
The option module menu (S.mm.ppp) is only displayed if the option
module is installed. Where S signifies the option module slot number
and the mm.ppp signifies the menu and parameter number of the option
module’s internal menus and parameter.
Table 5-4
Table 5-2
Alarm string
Description
br.res
Brake resistor overload. Braking Resistor Thermal
Accumulator (10.039) in the drive has reached 75.0
% of the value at which the drive will trip.
OV.Ld
Motor Protection Accumulator (04.019) in the drive
has reached 75.0 % of the value at which the drive
will trip and the load on the drive is >100 %.
d.OV.Ld
Drive over temperature. Percentage Of Drive
Thermal Trip Level (07.036) in the drive is greater
than 90 %.
Advanced menu descriptions
Menu
Alarm indications
Description
Commonly used basic set up parameters for quick / easy
programming
Frequency reference
Ramps
Frequency control
Torque and current control
Motor control
Sequencer and clock
Analog I/O
Digital I/O
Programmable logic, motorized pot, binary sum, timers
Status and trips
Drive set-up and identification, serial communications
Threshold detectors and variable selectors
User PID controller
Option module slot 1 set-up menu
General option module application menu 1
General option module application menu 2
Second motor parameters
Menu 0 set-up
Slot 1 option menus*
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
14
15
18
20
21
22
Slot 1
5.6
tuning
The autotune procedure has been initialized and an
autotune in progress.
LS
Limit switch active. Indicates that a limit switch is
active and that is causing the motor to be stopped.
Opt.AI
Option slot alarm.
Lo.AC
Low voltage mode. See Low AC Alarm (10.107).
I.AC.Lt
Current limit active. See Current Limit Active
(10.009).
Changing the operating mode
Procedure
Use the following procedure only if a different operating mode is
required:
1. Ensure the drive is not enabled, i.e. terminal 11 is open or Pr 06.015
is OFF (0)
2. Change the setting of Pr 00.079 as follows:
Pr 00.079 setting
* Only displayed when the option module is installed.
5.5.1


Display messages
The following tables indicate the various possible mnemonics which can
be displayed by the drive and their meaning.
Table 5-3
Status indications
Drive
output
stage
Operating mode
1
Open-loop
2
RFC-A
The figures in the second column apply when serial communications are
used.
NOTE
When the operating mode is changed, a parameter save is carried out.
String
Description
inh
The drive is inhibited and cannot be run.
The Drive Enable signal is not applied to
the drive enable terminal or Pr 06.015 is
set to 0. The other conditions that can
prevent the drive from enabling are shown
as bits in Enable Conditions (06.010)
Disabled
rdy
The drive is ready to run. The drive enable
is active, but the drive inverter is not active
because the final drive run is not active
Disabled
Stop
The drive is stopped / holding zero speed.
Enabled
S.Loss
Supply loss condition has been detected
Enabled
dc inj
The drive is applying dc injection braking
Enabled
1. Select ‘Save'* in Pr mm.000 (alternatively enter a value of 1000* in
Pr mm.000)
2. Either:
Er
The drive has tripped and no longer
controlling the motor. The trip code
appears on the display.
Disabled
•
•
UV
The drive is in the under voltage state
either in low voltage or high voltage mode.
Disabled
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
5.7
Saving parameters
When changing a parameter in Menu 0, the new value is saved when
pressing the Enter button
to return to parameter view mode
from parameter edit mode.
If parameters have been changed in the advanced menus, then the
change will not be saved automatically. A save function must be carried
out.
Procedure
Press the red
reset button
Carry out a drive reset through serial communications by setting
Pr 10.038 to 100
* If the drive is in the under voltage state (i.e. when the AI-Backup
adaptor terminals are being supplied from a +24 Vdc supply) a value of
1001 must be entered into Pr mm.000 to perform a save function.
75
Safety
information
5.8
Product
information
Mechanical
installation
Electrical
installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
Optimization
parameters
motor
Restoring parameter defaults
5.9.1
Restoring parameter defaults by this method saves the default values in
the drives memory. User security status (00.010) and User security code
(00.025) are not affected by this procedure).
Procedure
1. Ensure the drive is not enabled, i.e. terminal 11 is open or Pr 06.015
is OFF (0)
2. Select 'Def.50’ or 'Def.60' in Pr mm.000. (alternatively, enter 1233
(50 Hz settings) or 1244 (60 Hz settings) in Pr mm.000).
3. Either:
•
•
Press the red
reset button
Carry out a drive reset through serial communications by setting
Pr 10.038 to 100
NV Media
Card
Advanced
parameters
Technical data
Diagnostics
UL Listing
User Security Level / Access Level
The drive provides a number of different levels of security that can be set
by the user via User Security Status (11.044); these are shown in the
table below.
User Security
Status
(Pr 11.044)
Description
LEVEL.0 (0)
All writable parameters are available to be edited but
only parameters in Menu 0 are visible
ALL (1)
All parameters are visible and all writable parameters
are available to be edited
r.only.0 (2)
Access is limited to Menu 0 parameters only. All
parameters are read-only
r.only.A (3)
All parameters are read-only however all menus and
parameters are visible
The parameter access level determines whether the user has access to
Menu 0 only or to all the advanced menus (Menus 1 to 22) in addition to
Menu 0.
Status (4)
The keypad remains in status mode and no
parameters can be viewed or edited
The User Security determines whether the access to the user is read
only or read write.
no.acc (5)
The keypad remains in status mode and no
parameters can be viewed or edited. Drive
parameters cannot be accessed via a comms/fieldbus
interface in the drive or any option module
5.9
Parameter access level and security
Both the User Security and Parameter Access Level can operate
independently of each other as shown in table Table 5-5.
Table 5-5 Parameter access level and security
User
security
status
(11.044)
0
Access level
Menu 0
status
Advanced
menu status
Menu 0
All Menus
2
Read-only
Menu 0
Read-only
4
Status only
5
No access
Changing the User Security Level /Access
Level
The security level is determined by the setting of Pr 00.010 or Pr 11.044.
The Security Level can be changed through the keypad even if the User
Security Code has been set.
5.9.3
1
3
User
security
5.9.2
User Security Code
Open
RW
Not visible
Closed
RO
Not visible
The User Security Code, when set, prevents write access to any of the
parameters in any menu.
Open
RW
RW
Setting User Security Code
Closed
RO
RO
Open
RO
Not visible
Enter a value between 1 and 9999 in Pr 00.025 and press the
button; the security code has now been set to this value. In order to
activate the security, the Security level must be set to desired level in
Pr 00.010. When the drive is reset, the security code will have been
activated and the drive returns to Menu 0. The value of Pr 00.025 will
return to 0 in order to hide the security code.
Closed
RO
Not visible
Open
RO
RO
Closed
RO
RO
Open
Not visible
Not visible
Closed
Not visible
Not visible
Open
Not visible
Not visible
Closed
Not visible
Not visible
The default settings of the drive are Parameter Access Level Menu 0
and user Security Open i.e. read / write access to Menu 0 with the
advanced menus not visible.
Unlocking User Security Code
Select a parameter that need to be edited and press the
button,
the display will now show ‘Co’. Use the arrow buttons to set the security
code and press the
button. With the correct security code
entered, the display will revert to the parameter selected in edit mode.
If an incorrect security code is entered, the following message ‘Co.Err’ is
displayed, and the display will revert to parameter view mode.
Disabling User Security
Unlock the previously set security code as detailed above. Set Pr 00.025
to 0 and press the
button. The User Security has now been
disabled, and will not have to be unlocked each time the drive is
powered up to allow read / write access to the parameters.
5.10
Displaying parameters with nondefault values only
By selecting 'diff.d' in Pr mm.000 (Alternatively, enter 12000 in
Pr mm.000), the only parameters that will be visible to the user will be
those containing a non-default value. This function does not require a
drive reset to become active. In order to deactivate this function, return
to Pr mm.000 and select 'none' (alternatively enter a value of 0). Please
note that this function can be affected by the access level enabled, refer
to section 5.9 Parameter access level and security on page 76 for
further information regarding access level.
76
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
Safety
information
5.11
Product
information
Mechanical
installation
Electrical
installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
Optimization
parameters
motor
NV Media
Card
Advanced
parameters
Technical data
Diagnostics
UL Listing
Displaying destination parameters only
By selecting 'dest' in Pr mm.000 (Alternatively enter 12001 in
Pr mm.000), the only parameters that will be visible to the user will be
destination parameters. This function does not require a drive reset to
become active. In order to deactivate this function, return to Pr mm.000
and select 'none' (alternatively enter a value of 0).
Please note that this function can be affected by the access level
enabled, refer to section 5.9 Parameter access level and security on
page 76 for further information regarding access level.
5.12
Communications
Installing an AI-485 Adaptor provides the drive with a 2 wire 485 serial
communications interface. This enables the drive set-up, operation and
monitoring to be carried out with a PC or controller as required.
5.12.1
485 Serial communications
Communication is via the RJ45 connector or screw terminals (parallel
connection). The drive only supports Modbus RTU protocol.
The communications port applies a 1/4 unit load to the communications
network.
USB to EIA485 Communications
An external USB hardware interface such as a PC cannot be used
directly with the 2-wire EIA485 interface of the drive. Therefore a
suitable converter is required.
A suitable USB to EIA485 isolated converter is available from Control
Techniques as follows:
•
CT USB Comms cable (CT Part No. 4500-0096)
When using one of the above converters or any other suitable converter
with the drive, it is recommended that no terminating resistors be
connected on the network. It may be necessary to 'link out' the
terminating resistor within the converter depending on which type is used.
The information on how to link out the terminating resistor will normally be
contained in the user information supplied with the converter.
Serial communications set-up parameters
The following parameters need to be set according to the system
requirements.
Serial communications set-up parameters
Serial Mode
(11.024)
8 2 NP (0),
8 1 NP (1),
8 1 EP (2),
8 1 OP (3),
8 2 NP M (4),
8 1 NP M (5),
8 1 EP M (6),
8 1 OP M (7),
7 1 EP (8),
7 1 OP (9),
7 1 EP M (10),
7 1 OP M (11)
300 (0),
600 (1),
1200 (2),
2400 (3),
4800 (4),
Serial Baud Rate
9600 (5),
(11.025)
19200 (6),
38400 (7),
57600(8),
76800(9),
115200 (10)
Serial Address
(11.023)
1 to 247
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
The drive only supports the
Modbus RTU protocol and is
always a slave. This parameter
defines the supported data
formats used by the 485
comms port (if installed) on the
drive. This parameter can be
changed via the drive keypad,
via a option module or via the
comms interface itself.
This parameter can be
changed via the drive keypad,
via a option module or via the
comms interface itself. If it is
changed via the comms
interface, the response to the
command uses the original
baud rate. The master should
wait at least 20 ms before
sending a new message using
the new baud rate.
This parameter defines the
serial address and an
addresses between 1 and 247
are permitted.
77
Safety
information
6
Product
information
Mechanical
installation
Electrical
installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
Optimization
parameters
motor
NV Media
Card
Advanced
parameters
Technical data
Diagnostics
UL Listing
Basic parameters
Menu 0 is used to bring together various commonly used parameters for basic easy set up of the drive. All the parameters in Menu 0 appear in other
menus in the drive (denoted by {…}). Menus 22 can be used to configure the parameters in Menu 0.
6.1
Menu 0: Basic parameters
Parameter
00.001
Minimum Reference Clamp
Default (Ö)
Range (Ú)
OL
RFC-A
OL
Type
RFC-A
±VM_NEGATIVE_REF_CLAMP1 Hz
0.00 Hz
RW Num
US
±VM_POSITIVE_REF_CLAMP Hz
50Hz default: 50.00 Hz
60Hz default: 60.00 Hz
RW Num
US
00.002
Maximum Reference Clamp
00.003
Acceleration Rate 1
±VM_ACCEL_RATE s
5.0 s
RW Num
US
00.004
Deceleration Rate 1
±VM_ACCEL_RATE s
10.0 s
RW Num
US
00.005
Drive Configuration
AV (0), AI (1), AV.Pr (2), AI.Pr (3), Preset (4), Pad
(5), Pad.Ref (6), E.Pot (7), torque (8), Pid (9)
AV (0)
RW
00.006
Motor Rated Current
±VM_RATED_CURRENT A
Maximum Heavy Duty Rating
(11.032) A
00.007
Motor Rated Speed
0.0 to 80000.0 rpm
00.008
Motor Rated Voltage
00.009
Motor Rated Power Factor
00.010
User Security Status
00.015
Jog Reference
50Hz default:
1500.0 rpm
60Hz default:
1800.0 rpm
50Hz default:
1450.0 rpm
60Hz default:
1750.0 rpm
Txt
RW Num
PT US
RA
RW Num
US
US
±VM_AC_VOLTAGE_SET V
110V drive: 230 V
200V drive: 230 V
400V drive 50 Hz: 400 V
400V drive 60 Hz: 460 V
575V drive: 575 V
690V drive: 690 V
RW Num
RA
US
0.00 to 1.00
0.85
RW Num
RA
US
LEVEL.0 (0), ALL (1), r.only.0 (2), r.only.A (3),
Status (4), no.acc(5)
LEVEL.0 (0)
0.00 to 300.00 Hz
1.50 Hz
RW Num
US
4-20.S (-6), 20-4.S (-5), 4-20.L (-4),
20-4.L (-3), 4-20.H (-2), 20-4.H (-1), 0-20 (0), 20-0
(1), 4-20.tr (2), 20-4.tr (3), 4-20 (4), 20-4 (5), Volt (6)
Volt (6)
RW
Txt
US
RW
Bit
00.016
Analog Input 1 Mode
00.017
Bipolar Reference Enable
00.018
Preset Reference 1
00.025
User Security Code
00.027
Power-up Keypad Control Mode
Reference
00.028
Ramp Mode Select
00.029
Ramp Enable
00.030
Parameter Cloning
None (0), rEAd (1), Prog (2), Auto (3), boot (4)
00.031
Stop Mode
00.032
Dynamic V to F Select / Flux
Optimization Select
Off (0) or On (1)
Off (0)
±VM_SPEED_FREQ_REF Hz
0.00 Hz
0 to 9999
0
Reset (0), Last (1), Preset (2)
Reset (0)
Fast (0), Std (1), Std.bst (2), Fst.bst (3)
Std (1)
RW Num ND NC PT
US
RW Num
US
RW Num ND NC PT US
RW
Txt
US
RW
Txt
US
RW
Bit
None (0)
RW
Txt
Coast (0), rp (1), rp.dc I (2), dc I (3), td.dc I (4),
dis (5), No.rp (6)
rp (1)
RW
Txt
0 to 1
0
Off (0) or On (1)
On (1)
US
NC
US
US
RW Num
US
US
00.033
Catch A Spinning Motor
dis (0), Enable (1), Fr.Only (2), Rv.Only (3)
dis (0)
RW
Txt
00.034
Digital Input 5 Select
Input (0), th.Sct (1), th (2), th.Notr (3), Fr (4)
Input (0)
RW
Txt
00.035
Digital Output 1 Control
0 to 21
0
RW
US
00.036
Analog Output 1 Control
0
RW
US
3 (3) kHz
RW
00.037
Maximum Switching Frequency
00.038
Autotune
00.039
Motor Rated Frequency
00.040
Number of Motor Poles*
00.041
Control Mode
00.042
Low Frequency Voltage Boost
00.043
Serial Baud Rate
00.044
Serial Address
00.045
Reset Serial Communications
00.046
Brake Release Current Threshold
78
0 to 15
0.667 (0), 1 (1), 2 (2),
3 (3), 4 (4), 6 (5),
8 (6), 12 (7), 16 (8) kHz
2 (2), 3 (3), 4 (4),
6 (5), 8 (6), 12 (7),
16 (8) kHz
0 to 2
0 to 3
US
Txt
US
0
RW Num
NC
US
0.0 to VM_SPEED_FREQ_REF_UNIPOLAR Hz
50Hz: 50.00 Hz
60Hz: 60.00 Hz
RW Num
RA
US
Auto (0) to 32 (16)
Auto 0
RW Num
US
RW
US
Ur.S (0), Ur (1), Fd (2),
Ur.Auto (3), Ur.I (4),
SrE (5)
Ur.I (4)
0.0 to 25.0 %
3.0 %
300 (0), 600 (1), 1200 (2), 2400 (3), 4800 (4), 9600
(5), 19200 (6), 38400 (7), 57600 (8), 76800 (9),
115200 (10)
19200 (6)
Txt
RW Num
US
RW
US
Txt
1 to 247
1
Off (0) or On (1)
Off (0)
RW Num
RW
0 to 200 %
50 %
RW Num
US
ND NC
US
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
Safety
information
Product
information
Mechanical
installation
Electrical
installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
Optimization
parameters
motor
NV Media
Card
Technical data
Diagnostics
Default (Ö)
Range (Ú)
Parameter
Advanced
parameters
OL
RFC-A
OL
UL Listing
Type
RFC-A
00.047
Brake Apply Current Threshold
0 to 200 %
10 %
RW
US
00.048
BC Brake Release Frequency
0.00 to 20.00 Hz
1.00 Hz
RW Num
US
00.049
BC Brake Apply Frequency
0.00 to 20.00 Hz
2.00 Hz
RW Num
US
00.050
BC Brake Delay
0.0 to 25.0 s
1.0 s
RW Num
US
00.051
BC Post-brake Release Delay
00.053
BC Initial Direction
00.054
BC Brake Apply Through Zero
Threshold
00.055
BC Enable
00.065
Frequency Controller Proportional
Gain Kp1
0.000 to
200.000 s/rad
0.100 s/rad
RW Num
US
00.066
Frequency Controller Integral Gain
Ki1
0.00 to
655.35 s2/rad
0.10 s2/rad
RW Num
US
00.067
Sensorless Mode Filter
4 (0), 5 (1), 6 (2), 8 (3),
12 (4), 20 (5) ms
4 (0) ms
RW
US
00.069
Spin Start Boost
00.076
Action on Trip Detection
00.077
Maximum Heavy Duty Current
Rating
00.078
Software Version
0 to 999999
00.079
User Drive Mode
OPEn.LP (1), RFC-A (2)
OPEn.LP (1)
RW
Txt
ND NC PT US
00.080
User Security Status
LEVEL.0 (0), ALL (1), r.only.0 (2), r.only.A (3),
Status (4), no.acc(5)
LEVEL.O. (0)
RW
Txt
ND
RW
Read / Write
RO
Read only
ND
No default value
NC
Not copied
0.0 to 25.0 s
1.0 s
Ref (0), For (1), Rev (2)
Ref (0)
0.00 to 25.00 Hz
0.00 Hz
dis (0), Relay (1), dig IO (2), User (3)
dis (0)
US
US
RW Num
US
US
1.0
RW
0 to 31
0
RW
Num Number parameter
Protected parameter
Txt
RW
0.0 to 10.0
0.00 to 9999.99 A
PT
RW Num
RW
RO
Txt
Txt
US
US
Num ND NC PT
RO
ND NC PT
PT
Bit
Bit parameter
Txt
Text string
Bin
Binary parameter
FI
Filtered
RA
Rating dependent
US
User save
PS
Power-down save
DE
Destination
* If this parameter is read via serial communications, it will show pole pairs.
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
79
Safety
information
Product
information
Figure 6-1
Mechanical
installation
Electrical
installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
Optimization
parameters
motor
NV Media
Card
Advanced
parameters
Technical data
Diagnostics
UL Listing
Menu 0 logic diagram
14
Analog input 1/
input 2 select
Analog reference
2
00.016
Analog input
1 mode
Analog input 1
Analog input 2
5
01.015
01.050
Pr 01.050
set >1
Drive
Configuration
Preset
Reference 1
Keypad reference
00.017
00.005
Preset frequency
reference
00.018
Bipolar
Reference
Enable
AV
AI
AV.Pr
AI.Pr
Pr
Pad
Pad.Ref
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
E. Pot 7
tor 8
Pid 9
Key
X
X Input
X
X Output
terminals
terminals
00.XXX
Read-write (RW)
parameter
00.XXX
Read-only (RO)
parameter
The parameters are all shown in their default settings
80
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
Safety
information
Product
information
RUN
FORWARD
12
Mechanical
installation
Electrical
installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
Optimization
parameters
motor
RUN
REVERSE
NV Media
Card
Advanced
parameters
OL, RFC-A> FREQUENCY
13
Technical data
Diagnostics
UL Listing
AT ZERO FREQUENCY
7
10
Analog output
Digital output
Maximum
Reference
Clamp
Ramp
Enable
00.002
Minimum
Reference
Clamp
00.029
04.011
00.001
Torque Mode
Selector
00.033
RFC-A mode only
Motor parameters
00.006 ~ 00.009
Ramps
Power Factor
Rated Voltage
RFC-A Frequency-loop
PIDgains Frequency
00.003
Acceleration
Rate 1
00.004
Deceleration
Rate 1
00.028
Ramp Mode
Select
00.065 Controller
Proportional
Gain Kp 1
Frequency
00.066 Controller
Integral
Gain Ki 1
Frequency
Controller
03.012 Differential
Feedback
Gain Kd 1
Motor Rpm
Rated Speed
Rated Current
RFC-A>
OL>Motor-voltage control
00.041
Control mode
L1
05.004
00.042
Estimated Low Frequency
Motor
Voltage Boost
Speed
00.032
Dynamic V/f
Select
L2
Drive
L3
_
+
_
+
05.004
Power stage
00.037 Maximum Switching
Frequency
05.001 Output Frequency
RFC-A
Torque
Producing
Current
04.002
04.001
Current
Magnitude
U
V
W
_
+
BR
Magnetising
Current
Resistor
optional
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
81
Safety
information
Product
information
Mechanical
installation
Electrical
installation
Getting
started
6.2
Parameter descriptions
6.2.1
Pr mm.000
Basic
Running the
Optimization
parameters
motor
NV Media
Card
Advanced
parameters
Technical data
Diagnostics
UL Listing
Pr mm.000 is available in all menus, commonly used functions are provided as text strings in Pr mm.000 shown in Table 6-1. The functions in Table
6-1 can also be selected by entering the appropriate numeric values (as shown in Table 6-2) in Pr mm.000. For example, enter 7001 in Pr mm.000 to
store drive parameters on an NV media card.
Table 6-1 Commonly used functions in xx.000
Value
Equivalent value
String
Action
0
0
None
No action
1000
1
SAVE
Save drive parameters to non-volatile memory
6001
2
read1
Load the data from file 1 on a non-volatile media card into the drive provided it is a
parameter file
4001
3
SAVE1
Store the drive parameters in file 1 on a non-volatile media card
6002
4
read2
Load the data from file 2 on a non-volatile media card into the drive provided it is a
parameter file
4002
5
SAVE2
Store the drive parameters in file 2 on a non-volatile media card
6003
6
read3
Load the data from file 3 on a non-volatile media card into the drive provided it is a
parameter file
Store the drive parameters in file 3 on a non-volatile media card
4003
7
SAVE3
12000
8
diff.d
Only display parameters that are different from their default value
12001
9
dest
Only display parameters that are used to set-up destinations
1233
10
def.50
Load 50 Hz defaults
1244
11
def.60
Load 60 Hz defaults
1070
12
rst.opt
Reset all option modules
Table 6-2 Functions in Pr mm.000
Value
Action
1000
Save parameters when Under Voltage Active (Pr 10.016) is not active.
1001
Save parameter under all conditions
1070
Reset option module
1233
Load standard (50 Hz) defaults
1234
Load standard (50 Hz) defaults to all menus except option module menu 15
1244
Load US (60 Hz) defaults
1245
Load US (60 Hz) defaults to all menus except option module menu 15
1299
Reset {St.HF} trip.
2001*
Create a boot file on a non-volatile media card based on the present drive parameters including all Menu 20 parameters
4yyy*
NV media card: Transfer the drive parameters to parameter file yyy
6yyy*
NV media card: Load the drive parameters from parameter file yyy
7yyy*
NV media card: Erase file yyy
8yyy*
NV Media card: Compare the data in the drive with file yyy
9555*
NV media card: Clear the warning suppression flag
9666*
NV media card: Set the warning suppression flag
9777*
NV media card: Clear the read-only flag
9888*
NV media card: Set the read-only flag
12000**
Only display parameters that are different from their default value. This action does not require a drive reset.
12001**
Only display parameters that are used to set-up destinations (i.e. DE format bit is 1). This action does not require a drive reset.
40yyy
Backup all drive data (parameter differences from defaults and miscellaneous option data), including the drive name; the store will
occur to the </fs/MCDF/driveyyy/> folder; if it does not exist, it will be created. Since the name is stored, this is a backup, rather than
a clone. The command code will be cleared when all drive and option data have been saved.
60yyy
Load all drive data (parameter differences from defaults and miscellaneous option data); the load will come from the </fs/MCDF/
driveyyy/> folder. The command code will not be cleared until the drive and all option data have been loaded.
* See Chapter 9 NV Media Card on page 97 for more information on these functions.
** These functions do not require a drive reset to become active.
All other functions require a drive reset to initiate the function. Equivalent values and strings are also provided in the table above.
82
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
Safety
information
7
Product
information
Mechanical
installation
Electrical
installation
Getting
started
Basic
parameters
Running
the motor
Running the motor
This chapter takes the new user through all the essential steps to
running a motor for the first time, in each of the possible operating
modes.
For information on tuning the drive for the best performance, see
Chapter 8 Optimization on page 89.
NV Media
Card
Optimization
7.2
Advanced
parameters
Technical data
Changing the operating mode
Use the following procedure only if a different operating mode is
required:
1. Ensure that the drive is not enabled, i.e. terminal 11 is open or
Pr 06.015 is OFF(0).
2. Change the setting of Pr 00.079 as follows:
Pr 00.079 setting


WARNING
CAUTION
CAUTION
If the drive is started using the keypad it will run to the speed
defined by the keypad reference (Pr 01.017). This may not
be acceptable depending on the application. The user must
check in Pr 01.017 and ensure that the keypad reference
has been set to 0.
UL Listing
Procedure
Ensure that no damage or safety hazard could arise from the
motor starting unexpectedly.
The values of the motor parameters affect the protection of
the motor.
The default values in the drive should not be relied upon.
It is essential that the correct value is entered in Pr 00.006
Motor Rated Current. This affects the thermal protection of
the motor.
Diagnostics
Operating mode
1
Open-loop
2
RFC-A
The figures in the second column apply when serial communications are
used.
3. Either:
•
•
Press the red
reset button
Carry out a drive reset through serial communications by setting
Pr 10.038 to 100 (ensure that Pr. mm.000 returns to 0).
NOTE
When the operating mode is changed, a parameter save is carried out.
If the intended maximum speed affects the safety of the
machinery, additional independent over-speed protection
must be used.
WARNING
7.1
Quick start connections
7.1.1
Basic requirements
This section shows the basic connections which must be made for the
drive to run in the required mode. For minimal parameter settings to run
in each mode please see the relevant part of section 7.3 Quick start
commissioning / start-up on page 87.
Table 7-1
Minimum control connection requirements for each
control mode
Drive control method
Requirements
Terminal mode
Drive enable
Speed / Torque reference
Run forward / Run reverse
Keypad mode
Drive enable
Serial communications
Drive enable
Serial communications link
Table 7-2
Minimum control connection requirements for each
mode of operation
Operating mode
Requirements
Open loop mode
Induction motor
RFC – A mode
(without speed feedback)
Induction motor without speed
feedback
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
83
Safety
information
Figure 7-1
Product
information
Mechanical
installation
Electrical
installation
Getting
started
Basic
parameters
Running
the motor
Optimization
NV Media
Card
Advanced
parameters
Technical data
Diagnostics
UL Listing
Minimum connections to get the motor running in any operating mode (size 1 to 4)
1
2
4
5
0V
Frequency
Reference
input
+10 V
7
9
K
e
y
p
a
d
T
e
r
m
i
n
a
l
M
o
d
e
M
o
d
e
24 V
10
11
12
13
Drive enable
Run FWD
Run REV
14
+
L1 L2 L3 U V W
BR
1
U V W
Fuses
Braking resistor
(optional)
1
Thermal overload for braking resistor
to protect against fire risk. This must be
wired to interrupt the AC supply in the
event of a fault.
Induction motor
L1 L2
84
L3
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
Safety
information
Figure 7-2
Product
information
Mechanical
installation
Electrical
installation
Getting
started
Basic
parameters
Running
the motor
NV Media
Card
Optimization
Advanced
parameters
Technical data
Diagnostics
UL Listing
Minimum connections to get the motor running in any operating mode (size 5)
!
Braking resistor
(optional)
1
+
_ BR
1
2
4
5
0V
Frequency
Reference
input
+10 V
T
e
r
m
i
n
a
l
7
9
24 V
10
Drive enable
Run FWD
Run REV
11
12
13
14
K
e
y
p
a
d
M
o
d
e
M
o
d
e
L1 L2 L3
U V W
1 Thermal overload for braking resistor to protect
against fire risk. This must be wired to interrupt the
AC supply in the event of a fault.
U V W
Fuses
Open loop
RFC-A
Sensorless
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
L1 L2
L3
85
Safety
information
Figure 7-3
Product
information
Mechanical
installation
Electrical
installation
Getting
started
Basic
parameters
Running
the motor
NV Media
Card
Optimization
Advanced
parameters
Technical data
Diagnostics
UL Listing
Minimum connections to get the motor running in any operating mode (size 6)
Braking resistor
(optional)
!
1
_
+
BR
1
2
4
5
0V
Frequency
Reference
input
+10 V
T
e
r
m
i
n
a
l
7
9
24 V
10
Drive enable
Run FWD
Run REV
11
12
13
14
K
e
y
p
a
d
M
o
d
e
M
o
d
e
L1 L2 L3 U V W
1 Thermal overload for braking resistor to protect
against fire risk. This must be wired to interrupt the
AC supply in the event of a fault.
U V W
Fuses
Open loop
RFC-A
Sensorless
86
L1 L2
L3
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
Product
information
Mechanical
installation
Electrical
installation
Getting
started
Basic
parameters
Running
the motor
7.3
Quick start commissioning / start-up
7.3.1
Open loop
Action
Optimization
NV Media
Card
Advanced
parameters
Technical data
Diagnostics
UL Listing
Detail
Before power-up
Ensure:
•
The drive enable signal is not given (terminal 11)
•
Run signal is not given
•
Motor is connected
Power-up the drive
Verify that open loop mode is displayed as the drive powers up.
If the mode is incorrect see section 5.6 Changing the operating mode on page 75.
Ensure:
•
Drive displays ‘inh’
If the drive trips, see section 12 Diagnostics on page 179.
Enter motor
nameplate details
Enter:
•
Motor rated frequency in Pr 00.039 (Hz)
•
Motor rated current in Pr 00.006 (A)
•
Motor rated speed in Pr 00.007 (rpm)
•
Motor rated voltage in Pr 00.008 (V) - check if
Mot X XXXXXXXXX
No XXXXXXXXXX kg
IP55
or
connection
I.cl F °C 40 s S1
-1
V
Hz min kW cosφ
230 50 1445 2.20 0.80
400
CN = 14.5Nm
240 50 1445 2.20 0.76
415
CN = 14.4Nm
A
8.50
4.90
8.50
4.90
CTP- VEN 1PHASE 1=0,46A P=110W R.F 32MN
Set maximum
frequency
Enter:
•
Maximum frequency in Pr 00.002 (Hz)
I.E.C 34 1(87)
Safety
information
0.02
t
Set acceleration /
deceleration rates
Enter:
•
Acceleration rate in Pr 00.003 (s/100 Hz)
•
Deceleration rate in Pr 00.004 (s/100 Hz) (If braking resistor installed, set Pr 00.028 = FAST. Also
ensure Pr 10.030 and Pr 10.031 and Pr 10.061 are set correctly, otherwise premature ‘It.br’ trips
may be seen).
100Hz
0.03
0.04
t
The drive is able to perform either a stationary or a rotating autotune. The motor must be at a standstill
before an autotune is enabled. A rotating autotune should be used whenever possible so the measured
value of power factor of the motor is used by the drive.
WARNING
A rotating autotune will cause the motor to accelerate up to 2/3 base speed in the direction
selected regardless of the reference provided. Once complete the motor will coast to a
stop. The enable signal must be removed before the drive can be made to run at the
required reference.
The drive can be stopped at any time by removing the run signal or removing the drive
enable.
•
Autotune
Save parameters
Run
A stationary autotune can be used when the motor is loaded and it is not possible to uncouple the
load from the motor shaft. A stationary autotune measures the stator resistance of the motor and
the dead time compensation for the drive. These are required for good performance in vector
control modes. A stationary autotune does not measure the power factor of the motor so the value
on the motor nameplate must be entered into Pr 00.009.
•
A rotating autotune should only be used if the motor is uncoupled. A rotating autotune first performs
a stationary autotune before rotating the motor at 2/3 base speed in the direction selected. The
rotating autotune measures the power factor of the motor.
To perform an autotune:
•
Set Pr 00.038 = 1 for a stationary autotune or set Pr 00.038 = 2 for a rotating autotune
•
Close the Drive Enable signal (apply +24 V to terminal 11). The drive will display ’rdy’.
•
Close the run signal (apply +24 V to terminal 12 or 13). The display will flash ’tuning’ while the drive
is performing the autotune.
•
Wait for the drive to display ‘inh’ and for the motor to come to a standstill.
If the drive trips, see Chapter 12 Diagnostics on page 179.
•
Remove the drive enable and run signal from the drive.
cos ∅
RS
σLS
Select 'Save' in Pr mm.000 (alternatively enter a value of 1000 in Pr mm.000) and press the red
reset button.
Drive is now ready to run
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
87
Safety
information
7.3.2
Product
information
Mechanical
installation
Electrical
installation
Getting
started
Basic
parameters
Running
the motor
Optimization
NV Media
Card
Advanced
parameters
Technical data
Diagnostics
UL Listing
RFC - A mode (without position feedback)
Induction motor without position feedback
Action
Detail
Before power-up
Ensure:
•
The drive enable signal is not given (terminal 11)
•
Run signal is not given
Power-up the
drive
Verify that RFC-A mode is displayed as the drive powers up.
If the mode is incorrect see section 5.6 Changing the operating mode on page 75.
Ensure:
•
Drive displays ‘inh’
If the drive trips, see Chapter 12 Diagnostics on page 179.
Enter:
•
Motor rated frequency in Pr 00.039 (Hz)
•
Motor rated current in Pr 00.006 (A)
•
Motor rated speed in Pr 00.007 (rpm)
•
Motor rated voltage in Pr 00.008 (V) - check if
Mot X XXXXXXXXX
No XXXXXXXXXX kg
IP55
or
connection
I.cl F °C 40 s S1
V
Hz min-1 kW cosφ
230 50 1445 2.20 0.80
400
CN = 14.5Nm
240 50 1445 2.20 0.76
415
CN = 14.4Nm
A
8.50
4.90
8.50
4.90
CTP- VEN 1PHASE 1=0,46A P=110W R.F 32MN
Set maximum
frequency
0.02
Enter:
•
Maximum frequency in Pr 00.002 (Hz)
Enter:
Set acceleration / •
Acceleration rate in Pr 00.003 (s/100 Hz)
deceleration
•
Deceleration rate in Pr 00.004 (s/100 Hz) (If the braking resistor is installed, set Pr 00.028 = FAST. Also
rates
ensure Pr 10.030, Pr 10.031 and Pr 10.061 are set correctly, otherwise premature ‘It.br’ trips may be
seen).
The drive is able to perform either a stationary or a rotating autotune. The motor must be at a standstill before
an autotune is enabled. A stationary autotune will give moderate performance whereas a rotating autotune will
give improved performance as it measures the actual values of the motor parameters required by the drive.
WARNING
t
1000rpm
0.03
A stationary autotune can be used when the motor is loaded and it is not possible to uncouple the load
from the motor shaft. The stationary autotune measures the stator resistance and transient inductance of
the motor. These are used to calculate the current loop gains, and at the end of the test the values in
Pr 04.013 and Pr 04.014 are updated. A stationary autotune does not measure the power factor of the
motor so the value on the motor nameplate must be entered into Pr 00.009.
•
A rotating autotune should only be used if the motor is uncoupled. A rotating autotune first performs a
stationary autotune before rotating the motor at 2/3 base speed in the direction selected. The rotating
autotune measures the stator inductance of the motor and calculates the power factor.
To perform an autotune:
•
Set Pr 00.038 = 1 for a stationary autotune or set Pr 00.038 = 2 for a rotating autotune
•
Close the drive enable signal (apply +24 V to terminal 11). The drive will display ’rdy’.
•
Close the run signal (apply +24 V to terminal 12 or 13). The display will flash ‘tuning’ while the drive is
performing the autotune.
•
Wait for the drive to display ’inh’ and for the motor to come to a standstill
If the drive trips, see Chapter 12 Diagnostics on page 179.
•
Remove the drive enable and run signal from the drive.
Save parameters Select 'Save' in Pr mm.000 (alternatively enter a value of 1000 in Pr mm.000) and press red
Run
88
0.04
t
A rotating autotune will cause the motor to accelerate up to 2/3 base speed in the direction selected
regardless of the reference provided. Once complete the motor will coast to a stop. The enable signal
must be removed before the drive can be made to run at the required reference.
The drive can be stopped at any time by removing the run signal or removing the drive enable.
•
Autotune
I.E.C 34 1(87)
Enter motor
nameplate
details
cos ∅
RS
σLS
LS
T
Nm
saturation
breakpoints
N rpm
reset button.
The drive is now ready to run
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
Safety
information
8
Product
information
Mechanical
installation
Electrical
installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
Optimization
parameters
motor
NV Media
Card
Advanced
Technical data Diagnostics
parameters
UL Listing
Optimization
This chapter takes the user through methods of optimizing the drive set-up and maximize the performance. The auto-tuning features of the drive
simplify the optimization tasks.
8.1
Motor map parameters
8.1.1
Open loop motor control
Pr 00.006 {05.007} Motor Rated Current
•
•
•
•
•
•
Defines the maximum continuous motor current
The rated current parameter must be set to the maximum continuous current of the motor. The motor rated current is used in the following:
Current limits (see section section 8.3 Current limits on page 95, for more information)
Motor thermal overload protection (see section section 8.4 Motor thermal protection on page 95, for more information)
Vector mode voltage control (see Control Mode later in this table)
Slip compensation (see Enable Slip Compensation (05.027), later in this table)
Dynamic V/F control
Pr 00.008 {05.009} Motor Rated Voltage
Defines the voltage applied to the motor at rated frequency
Pr 00.039 {05.006} Motor Rated Frequency
Defines the frequency at which rated voltage is applied
The Motor Rated Voltage (00.008) and the Motor Rated Frequency (00.039) are used to define the voltage to frequency characteristic applied to the
motor (see Control Mode, later in this table). The Motor Rated Frequency is also used in conjunction with the motor rated speed to calculate the
rated slip for slip compensation (see Motor Rated Speed, later in this table).
Output
voltage
Output voltage characteristic
Pr 00.008
Pr 00.008 / 2
Pr 00.039 / 2
Pr 00.039
Output
frequency
Pr 00.007 {05.008} Motor Rated Speed
Defines the full load rated speed of the motor
Pr 00.040 {05.011} Number of Motor Poles
Defines the number of motor poles
The motor rated speed and the number of poles are used with the motor rated frequency to calculate the rated slip of induction machines in Hz.
00.040 00.007
Rated slip (Hz) = Motor rated frequency - (Number of pole pairs x [Motor rated speed / 60]) = 00.039 = ⎛ ------------------ × ------------------⎞
⎝ 2
60 ⎠
If Pr 00.007 is set to 0 or to synchronous speed, slip compensation is disabled. If slip compensation is required this parameter should be set to the
nameplate value, which should give the correct rpm for a hot machine. Sometimes it will be necessary to adjust this when the drive is commissioned
because the nameplate value may be inaccurate. Slip compensation will operate correctly both below base speed and within the field-weakening
region. Slip compensation is normally used to correct for the motor speed to prevent speed variation with load. The rated load rpm can be set higher
than synchronous speed to deliberately introduce speed droop. This can be useful to aid load sharing with mechanically coupled motors.
Pr 00.040 is also used in the calculation of the motor speed display by the drive for a given output frequency. When Pr 00.040 is set to ‘Auto’, the
number of motor poles is automatically calculated from the rated frequency Pr 00.039, and the motor rated speed Pr 00.007.
Number of poles = 120 x (Rated Frequency (00.039) / Rated Speed (00.007)) rounded to the nearest even number.
Pr 00.043 {05.010} Motor Rated Power Factor
Defines the angle between the motor voltage and current
The power factor is the true power factor of the motor, i.e. the angle between the motor voltage and current. The power factor is used in conjunction
with the Motor Rated Current (00.006), to calculate the rated active current and magnetising current of the motor. The rated active current is used
extensively to control the drive, and the magnetising current is used in vector mode stator resistance compensation. It is important that this
parameter is set up correctly. The drive can measure the motor rated power factor by performing a rotating autotune (see Autotune (Pr 00.038),
below).
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
89
Safety
information
Product
information
Mechanical
installation
Electrical
installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
Optimization
parameters
motor
NV Media
Card
Advanced
Technical data Diagnostics
parameters
UL Listing
Pr 00.038 {05.012} Autotune
There are two autotune tests available in open loop mode, a stationary and a rotating test. A rotating autotune should be used whenever possible so
the measured value of power factor of the motor is used by the drive.
•
A stationary autotune can be used when the motor is loaded and it is not possible to remove the load from the motor shaft. The stationary test
measures the Stator Resistance (05.017), Transient Inductance (05.024), Maximum Deadtime Compensation (05.059) and Current At
Maximum Deadtime Compensation (05.060) which are required for good performance in vector control modes (see Control Mode later in this
table). The stationary autotune does not measure the power factor of the motor so the value on the motor nameplate must be entered into
Pr 00.009. To perform a Stationary autotune, set Pr 00.038 to 1, and provide the drive with both an enable signal (on terminal 11) and a run
signal (on terminals 12 or 13).
•
A rotating autotune should only be used if the motor is unloaded. A rotating autotune first performs a stationary autotune, as above, then a
rotating test is performed in which the motor is accelerated with currently selected ramps up to a frequency of Motor Rated Frequency (05.006)
x 2/3, and the frequency is maintained at that level for 4 seconds. Stator Inductance (05.025) is measured and this value is used in conjunction
with other motor parameters to calculate Motor Rated Power Factor (05.010). To perform a Rotating autotune, set Pr 00.038 to 2, and provide
the drive with both an enable signal (on terminal 11) and a run signal (on terminals 12 or 13).
Following the completion of an autotune test the drive will go into the inhibit state. The drive must be placed into a controlled disable condition
before the drive can be made to run at the required reference. The drive can be put in to a controlled disable condition by removing the signal from
terminal 11, setting the Drive Enable (06.015) to OFF (0) or disabling the drive via the Control Word (06.042) and Control Word Enable (06.043).
Pr 00.041 {05.014} Control Mode
There are several voltage modes available which fall into two categories, vector control and fixed boost.
Vector control
Vector control mode provides the motor with a linear voltage characteristic from 0 Hz to Motor Rated Frequency, and then a constant voltage above
motor rated frequency. When the drive operates between motor rated frequency/50 and motor rated frequency/4, full vector based stator resistance
compensation is applied. When the drive operates between motor rated frequency/4 and motor rated frequency/2 the stator resistance
compensation is gradually reduced to zero as the frequency increases. For the vector modes to operate correctly the Motor Rated Power Factor,
Stator Resistance (05.017), Maximum Deadtime Compensation (05.059) and current at Maximum Deadtime Compensation (05.060) are all required
to be set up accurately. The drive can be made to measure these by performing an autotune (see Pr 00.038 Autotune). The drive can also be made
to measure the stator resistance automatically every time the drive is enabled or the first time the drive is enabled after it is powered up, by selecting
one of the vector control voltage modes.
(0) Ur S = The stator resistance is measured and the parameters for the selected motor map are over-written each time the drive is made to
run. This test can only be done with a stationary motor where the flux has decayed to zero. Therefore this mode should only be used if the motor
is guaranteed to be stationary each time the drive is made to run. To prevent the test from being done before the flux has decayed there is a
period of 1 second after the drive has been in the ready state during which the test is not done if the drive is made to run again. In this case,
previously measured values are used. Ur S mode ensures that the drive compensates for any change in motor parameters due to changes in
temperature. The new value of stator resistance is not automatically saved to the drive's EEPROM.
(4) Ur I = The stator resistance is measured when the drive is first made to run after each power-up. This test can only be done with a stationary
motor. Therefore this mode should only be used if the motor is guaranteed to be stationary the first time the drive is made to run after each
power-up. The new value of stator resistance is not automatically saved to the drive's EEPROM.
(1) Ur = The stator resistance and voltage offset are not measured. The user can enter the motor and cabling resistance into the Stator
Resistance (05.017). However this will not include resistance effects within the drive inverter. Therefore if this mode is to be used, it is best to
use an autotune test initially to measure the stator resistance.
(3) Ur_Auto= The stator resistance is measured once, the first time the drive is made to run. After the test has been completed successfully the
Control Mode (00.041) is changed to Ur mode. The Stator Resistance (05.017) parameter is written to, and along with the Control Mode
(00.041), are saved in the drive's EEPROM. If the test fails, the voltage mode will stay set to Ur Auto and the test will be repeated next time the
drive is made to run.
Fixed boost
The stator resistance is not used in the control of the motor, instead a fixed characteristic with low frequency voltage boost as defined by Pr 00.042,
is used. Fixed boost mode should be used when the drive is controlling multiple motors. There are two settings of fixed boost available:
(2) Fixed = This mode provides the motor with a linear voltage characteristic from 0 Hz to Motor Rated Frequency (00.039), and then a constant
voltage above rated frequency.
(5) Square = This mode provides the motor with a square law voltage characteristic from 0 Hz to Motor Rated Frequency (00.039), and then a
constant voltage above rated frequency. This mode is suitable for variable torque applications like fans and pumps where the load is
proportional to the square of the speed of the motor shaft. This mode should not be used if a high starting torque is required.
90
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
Safety
information
Product
information
Mechanical
installation
Electrical
installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
Optimization
parameters
motor
NV Media
Card
Advanced
Technical data Diagnostics
parameters
UL Listing
Pr 00.041 {05.014} Control Mode (cont)
For both these modes, at low frequencies (from 0 Hz to ½ x Pr 00.039) a voltage boost is applied as defined by Pr 00.042 as shown below:
Output
voltage
Output voltage characteristic
(Fd)
Pr 00.008
Pr 00.008
Pr 00.008 / 2
Voltage boost
Pr 00.042
Pr 00.039 / 2
Pr 00.039
Pr 00.042
Output
frequency
Pr 00.039
Pr 05.027 Enable Slip Compensation
When a motor, being controlled in open loop mode, has load applied a characteristic of the motor is that the output speed droops in proportion to the
load applied as shown:
Demanded speed
Shaft speed
Load
In order to prevent the speed droop shown above slip compensation should be enabled. To enable slip compensation Pr 05.027 must be set to a 1
(this is the default setting), and the motor rated speed must be entered in Pr 00.007 (Pr 05.008).
The motor rated speed parameter should be set to the synchronous speed of the motor minus the slip speed. This is normally displayed on the
motor nameplate, i.e. for a typical 18.5 kW, 50 Hz, 4 pole motor, the motor rated speed would be approximately 1465 rpm. The synchronous speed
for a 50 Hz, 4 pole motor is 1500 rpm, so therefore the slip speed would be 35 rpm. If the synchronous speed is entered in Pr 00.007, slip
compensation will be disabled. If too small a value is entered in Pr 00.007, the motor will run faster than the demanded frequency. The synchronous
speeds for 50 Hz motors with different numbers of poles are as follows:
2 pole = 3000 rpm, 4 pole = 1500 rpm, 6pole =1000 rpm, 8 pole = 750 rpm
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
91
Safety
information
8.1.2
Product
information
Mechanical
installation
Electrical
installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
Optimization
parameters
motor
NV Media
Card
Advanced
Technical data Diagnostics
parameters
UL Listing
RFC-A mode
Induction motor without Position feedback
Pr 00.006 {05.007} Motor Rated Current
Defines the maximum motor continuous current
The motor rated current parameter must be set to the maximum continuous current of the motor. The motor rated current is used in the following:
•
•
•
Current limits (see section 8.3 Current limits on page 95, for more information).
Motor thermal overload protection (see section 8.4 Motor thermal protection on page 95, for more information)
Vector control algorithm
Pr 00.008 {05.009} Motor Rated Voltage
Defines the voltage applied to the motor at rated frequency
Pr 00.039 {05.006} Motor Rated Frequency
Defines the frequency at which rated voltage is applied
The Motor Rated Voltage (00.008) and the Motor Rated Frequency
(Pr 00.039) are used to define the voltage to frequency characteristic
applied to the motor. The motor rated frequency is also used in
conjunction with the motor rated speed to calculate the rated slip for slip
compensation (see Motor Rated Speed (00.007), later in this table).
Output
voltage
Output voltage characteristic
Pr 00.008
Pr 00.008 / 2
Pr 00.039 / 2
Pr 00.039
Pr 00.007 {05.008} Motor Rated Speed
Defines the full load rated speed of the motor
Pr 00.040 {05.011} Number of Motor Poles
Defines the number of motor poles
Output
frequency
The motor rated speed and motor rated frequency are used to determine the full load slip of the motor which is used by the vector control algorithm.
Incorrect setting of this parameter has the following effects:
• Reduced efficiency of motor operation
• Reduction of maximum torque available from the motor
• Reduced transient performance
• Inaccurate control of absolute torque in torque control modes
The nameplate value is normally the value for a hot motor; however, some adjustment may be required when the drive is commissioned if the
nameplate value is inaccurate. A fixed value can be entered in this parameter.
When Pr 00.040 is set to 'Auto', the number of motor poles is automatically calculated from the Motor Rated Frequency (00.039), and the Motor
Rated Speed (00.007).
Number of poles = 120 x (Motor Rated Frequency (00.039 / Motor Rated Speed (00.007) rounded to the nearest even number.
Pr 00.009 {5.10} Motor Rated Power Factor
Defines the angle between the motor voltage and current
The power factor is the true power factor of the motor, i.e. the angle between the motor voltage and current. If the Stator Inductance (05.025) is set
to zero then the power factor is used in conjunction with the Motor Rated Current (00.006) and other motor parameters to calculate the rated active
and magnetising currents of the motor, which are used in the vector control algorithm. If the stator inductance has a non-zero value this parameter
is not used by the drive, but is continuously written with a calculated value of power factor. The stator inductance can be measured by the drive by
performing a rotating autotune (see Autotune (Pr 00.038), later in this table).
92
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
Safety
information
Product
information
Mechanical
installation
Electrical
installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
Optimization
parameters
motor
NV Media
Card
Advanced
Technical data Diagnostics
parameters
UL Listing
Pr 00.038 {05.012} Autotune
There are three autotune tests available in RFC-A mode, a stationary test, a rotating test and an inertia measurement test. A stationary autotune will
give moderate performance whereas a rotating autotune will give improved performance as it measures the actual values of the motor parameters
required by the drive. An inertia measurement test should be performed separately to a stationary or rotating autotune.
NOTE
It is highly recommended that a rotating autotune is performed (Pr 00.038 set to 2).
•
•
•
A stationary autotune can be used when the motor is loaded and it is not possible to remove the load from the motor shaft. The stationary
autotune measures the Stator Resistance (05.017) and Transient Inductance (05.024) of the motor. These are used to calculate the current loop
gains, and at the end of the test the values in Pr 04.013 and Pr 04.014 are updated. A stationary autotune does not measure the power factor of
the motor so the value on the motor nameplate must be entered into Pr 00.009. To perform a Stationary autotune, set Pr 00.038 to 1, and
provide the drive with both an enable signal (on terminal 11) and a run signal (on terminal 12 or 13).
A rotating autotune should only be used if the motor is unloaded. A rotating autotune first performs a stationary autotune, a rotating test is then
performed which the motor is accelerated with currently selected ramps up to a frequency of Motor Rated Frequency (05.006) x 2/3, and the
frequency is maintained at the level for up to 40 s. During the rotating autotune the Stator Inductance (05.025), and the motor saturation
breakpoints (Pr 05.029, Pr 05.030, Pr 05.062 and Pr 05.063) are modified by the drive. The power factor is also modified for user information
only, but is not used after this point as the stator inductance is used in the vector control algorithm instead. To perform a Rotating autotune, set
Pr 00.038 to 2, and provide the drive with both an enable signal (on terminal 11) and a run signal (on terminal 12 or 13).
The inertia measurement test can measure the total inertia of the load and the motor. This is used to set the speed loop gains (see Frequency
loop gains) and to provide torque feed-forwards when required during acceleration. During the inertia measurement test motor is accelerated
with the currently selected ramps up to a speed of Motor Rated Speed (05.008) / 4, and this speed is maintained at this level for 60 seconds.
The Motor And Load Inertia (03.018) is measured. If the required speed is not achieved on the final attempt the test is aborted and an Autotune
trip is initiated. To perform an Inertia measurement autotune, set Pr 00.038 to 3, and provide the drive with both an enable signal (on terminal
11) and a run signal (on terminal 12 or 13). Following the completion of an autotune test the drive will go into the inhibit state. The drive must be
placed into a controlled disable condition before the drive can be made to run at the required reference. The drive can be put in to a controlled
disable condition by removing the drive enable signal from terminal 11, setting the Drive Enable (06.015) to OFF (0) or disabling the drive via the
control word (Pr 06.042 & Pr 06.043).
{04.013} / {04.014} Current Loop Gains
The current loop gains proportional (Kp) and integral (Ki) gains control the response of the current loop to a change in current (torque) demand. The
default values give satisfactory operation with most motors. However, for optimal performance in dynamic applications it may be necessary to
change the gains to improve the performance. The Current Controller Kp Gain (04.013) is the most critical value in controlling the performance. The
values for the current loop gains can be calculated by performing a stationary or rotating autotune (see Autotune Pr 00.038 earlier in this table) the
drive measures the Stator Resistance (05.017) and Transient Inductance (05.024) of the motor and calculates the current loop gains.
This will give a step response with minimum overshoot after a step change of current reference. The proportional gain can be increased by a factor
of 1.5 giving a similar increase in bandwidth; however, this gives a step response with approximately 12.5 % overshoot. The equation for the integral
gain gives a conservative value. In some applications where it is necessary for the reference frame used by the drive to dynamically follow the flux
very closely (i.e. high speed Sensorless RFC-A induction motor applications) the integral gain may need to have a significantly higher value.
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
93
Safety
information
Product
information
Mechanical
installation
Electrical
installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
Optimization
parameters
motor
NV Media
Card
Advanced
Technical data Diagnostics
parameters
UL Listing
Frequency Loop Gains
(00.065 {03.010}, Pr 00.066 {03.011}
The frequency loop gains control the response of the frequency controller to a change in frequency demand. The frequency controller includes
proportional (Kp) and integral (Ki) feed forward terms, and a differential (Kd) feedback term. The drive holds two sets of these gains and either set
may be selected for use by the frequency controller with Pr 03.016. If Pr 03.016 = 0, gains Kp1, Ki1 and Kd1 (Pr 03.010 to Pr 03.012) are used, and
if Pr 03.016 = 1, gains Kp2, Ki2 and Kd2 (Pr 03.013 to Pr 03.015) are used. Pr 03.016 may be changed when the drive is enabled or disabled.
Frequency Controller Proportional Gain (Kp), Pr 00.007 {03.010} and Pr 03.013
If the proportional gain has a value and the integral gain is set to zero the controller will only have a proportional term, and there must be a
frequency error to produce a torque reference. Therefore as the motor load increases there will be a difference between the reference and actual
frequencies. This effect, called regulation, depends on the level of the proportional gain, the higher the gain the smaller the frequency error for a
given load. If the proportional gain is too high either the acoustic noise produced by numerical quantization becomes unacceptable, or the stability
limit is reached.
Frequency Controller Integral Gain (Ki), Pr 00.008 {03.011} and Pr 03.014
The integral gain is provided to prevent frequency regulation. The error is accumulated over a period of time and used to produce the necessary
torque demand without any frequency error. Increasing the integral gain reduces the time taken for the frequency to reach the correct level and
increases the stiffness of the system, i.e. it reduces the positional displacement produced by applying a load torque to the motor. Unfortunately
increasing the integral gain also reduces the system damping giving overshoot after a transient. For a given integral gain the damping can be
improved by increasing the proportional gain. A compromise must be reached where the system response, stiffness and damping are all adequate
for the application. For RFC-A Sensorless mode, it is unlikely that the integral gain can be increased much above 0.50.
Differential Gain (Kd), Pr 03.012 and Pr 03.015
The differential gain is provided in the feedback of the frequency controller to give additional damping. The differential term is implemented in a way
that does not introduce excessive noise normally associated with this type of function. Increasing the differential term reduces the overshoot
produced by under-damping, however, for most applications the proportional and integral gains alone are sufficient.
Gain Change Threshold, Pr 03.017
If the Frequency Controller Gain Select (03.016) = 2, gains Kp1, Ki1 and Kd1 (Pr 03.010 to Pr 03.012) are used while the modulus of the frequency
demand is less than the value held by Gain Change Threshold (03.017), else gains Kp2, Ki2 and Kd2 (Pr 03.013 to Pr 03.015) will be used.
Tuning the frequency loop gains:
This involves the connecting of an oscilloscope to analog output 1 to
monitor the frequency feedback.
Give the drive a step change in frequency reference and monitor the
response of the drive on the oscilloscope.
The proportional gain (Kp) should be set up initially. The value
should be increased up to the point where the frequency overshoots
and then reduced slightly.
The integral gain (Ki) should then be increased up to the point where
the frequency becomes unstable and then reduced slightly.
It may now be possible to increase the proportional gain to a higher
value and the process should be repeated until the system response
approaches the ideal response as shown.
The diagram shows the effect of incorrect P and I gain settings as
well as the ideal response.
Frequency demand
Insufficient proportional
gain [00.065]
Excessive proportional
gain [00.065]
Excessive integral gain
[00.066]
Ideal response
94
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
Safety
information
8.2
Product
information
Mechanical
installation
Electrical
installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
Optimization
parameters
motor
Maximum motor rated current
Figure 8-1
NV Media
Card
Advanced
Technical data Diagnostics
parameters
Motor thermal protection (Heavy Duty)
Size 1 to 4:
The maximum motor rated current is the Maximum Heavy Duty Current
Rating (11.032).
1.00
The values for the Heavy Duty rating can be found in section
2.2 Ratings on page 10.
0.70
UL Listing
1.05
Pr 04.025 = 0
Pr 04.025 = 1
K
Size 5 onwards:
The maximum motor rated current allowed by the drive is greater than
the Maximum Heavy Duty Current Rating (11.032). The ratio between
the Normal Duty rating and the Maximum Heavy Duty Current Rating
(11.032) varies between drive sizes. The values for the Normal and
Heavy Duty rating can be found in section 2.2 Ratings on page 10. If the
Motor Rated Current (00.006) is set above the Maximum Heavy Duty
Current Rating (11.032), the current limits and the motor thermal
protection scheme are modified (see section 8.3 Current limits on
page 95 and section 8.4 Motor thermal protection below for further
information).
8.3
Current limits
The default setting for the current limit parameters is:
•
•
165 % x motor rated current for open loop mode.
175 % x motor rated current for RFC-A mode.
0.00
50% of base
speed/frequency
If Pr 04.025 is 0 the characteristic is for a motor which can operate at
rated current over the whole speed range. Induction motors with this
type of characteristic normally have forced cooling. If Pr 04.025 is 1 the
characteristic is intended for motors where the cooling effect of motor
fan reduces with reduced motor speed below 50 % of base speed/
frequency. The maximum value for K1 is 1.05, so that above the knee of
the characteristics the motor can operate continuously up to 105 %
current.
Figure 8-2
Motor thermal protection (Normal Duty)
There are three parameters which control the current limits:
•
•
•
Motoring current limit: power flowing from the drive to the motor
Regen current limit: power flowing from the motor to the drive
Symmetrical current limit: current limit for both motoring and regen
operation
Base speed/
frequency
1.01
1.00
Pr 04.025 = 0
Pr 04.025 = 1
0.70
K
The lowest of either the motoring and regen current limit, or the
symmetrical current limit applies.
The maximum setting of these parameters depends on the values of
motor rated current, drive rated current and the power factor.
With size 5 upwards, increasing the motor rated current (Pr 00.006 /
Pr 05.007) above the Heavy Duty rating (default value), will
automatically reduce the current limits in Pr 04.005 to Pr 04.007. If the
motor rated current is then set to or below the Heavy Duty rating, the
current limits will be left at their reduced values.
The drive can be oversized to permit a higher current limit setting to
provide higher accelerating torque as required up to a maximum of
1000 %.
8.4
Motor thermal protection
A time constant thermal model is provided to estimate the motor
temperature as a percentage of its maximum allowed temperature.
The motor thermal protection is modelled using losses in the motor. The
losses in the motor are calculated as a percentage value, so that under
these conditions the Motor Protection Accumulator (04.019) would
eventually reach 100 %.
Percentage losses = 100 % x [Load related losses]
Where:
Load related losses = I / (K1 x IRated)2
Where:
I = Current Magnitude (04.001)
0.00
15% of
base speed/
frequency
50% of
base speed/
frequency
Base speed/
frequency
Both settings of Pr 04.025 are intended for motors where the cooling
effect of the motor fan reduces with reduced motor speed, but with
different speeds below which the cooling effect is reduced. If Pr 04.025
is 0 the characteristic is intended for motors where the cooling effect
reduces with motor speed below 15 % of base speed/frequency. If
Pr 04.025 is 1 the characteristic is intended for motors where the cooling
effect reduces with motor speed below 50 % of base speed/frequency.
The maximum value for K1 is 1.01, so that above the knee of the
characteristics the motor can operate continuously up to 101 % current
When the estimated temperature in Pr 04.019 reaches 100 % the drive
takes some action depending on the setting of Pr 04.016. If Pr 04.016 is
0, the drive trips when Pr 04.019 reaches 100 %. If Pr 04.016 is 1, the
current limit is reduced to (K - 0.05) x 100 % when Pr 04.019 reaches
100 %.
The current limit is set back to the user defined level when Pr 04.019
falls below 95 %. The thermal model temperature accumulator is reset
to zero at power-up and accumulates the temperature of the motor while
the drive remains powered-up. If the rated current defined by Pr 05.007
is altered, the accumulator is reset to zero.
The default setting of the thermal time constant (Pr 04.015) is 179 s
which is equivalent to an overload of 150 % for 120 s from cold.
IRated = Motor Rated Current (05.007)
If Motor Rated Current (05.007) ≤ Maximum Heavy Duty Current
(11.032)
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
95
Safety
information
Product
information
8.5
Mechanical
installation
Electrical
installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
Optimization
parameters
motor
Switching frequency
NV Media
Card
Advanced
Technical data Diagnostics
parameters
UL Listing
The default switching frequency is 3 kHz, however this can be increased
up to a maximum of 16 kHz by Pr 05.018 (dependent on drive size). The
available switching frequencies are shown below.
The saturation breakpoint parameters (Pr 05.029, Pr 05. 030, Pr 05.062
and Pr 05.063) found during the autotune in RFC-A mode ensure the
magnetizing current is reduced in the correct proportion for the specific
motor. (In open loop mode the magnetizing current is not actively
controlled).
Table 8-1 Available switching frequencies
8.5.2
Drive
size
Model
0.667
kHz
1
kHz
2
kHz
3
kHz
4
kHz
6
kHz
8
kHz
12
kHz
16
kHz
1 to 6
All
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
If switching frequency is increased from 3 kHz the following apply:
1. Increased heat loss in the drive, which means that derating to the
output current must be applied.
See the derating tables for switching frequency and ambient
temperature in section 11.1.1 Power and current ratings (Derating
for switching frequency and temperature) on page 159.
2. Reduced heating of the motor - due to improved output waveform
quality.
3. Reduced acoustic noise generated by the motor.
4. Increased sample rate on the speed and current controllers. A trade
off must be made between motor heating, drive heating and the
demands of the application with respect to the sample time required.
Table 8-2
0.667, 3, 6, 12
1 kHz
kHz
250 μs
Level 1
167 μs
2, 4, 8, 16
kHz
Open
loop
RFC-A
2 kHz = 250 μs
4 kHz = 125 μs
8 kHz = 125 μs
16 kHz = 125 μs
Peak limit
Current
controllers
Current
limit and
ramps
Speed
controller
and ramps
Level 2
250 μs
Level 3
1 ms
Voltage controller
Level 4
4 ms
Time critical user
interface
Over-modulation (open-loop only)
The maximum output voltage level of the drive is normally limited to an
equivalent of the drive input voltage minus voltage drops within the drive
(the drive will also retain a few percent of the voltage in order to maintain
current control). If the motor rated voltage is set at the same level as the
supply voltage, some pulse deletion will occur as the drive output voltage
approaches the rated voltage level. If Pr 05.020 (Over-modulation
enable) is set to 1 the modulator will allow over modulation, so that as
the output frequency increases beyond the rated frequency the voltage
continues to increase above the rated voltage. The modulation depth will
increase beyond unity; first producing trapezoidal and then quasi-square
waveforms.
This can be used for example:
To obtain high output frequencies with a low switching frequency
which would not be possible with space vector modulation limited to
unity modulation depth,
or
•
In order to maintain a higher output voltage with a low supply
voltage.
The disadvantage is that the machine current will be distorted as the
modulation depth increases above unity, and will contain a significant
amount of low order odd harmonics of the fundamental output frequency.
The additional low order harmonics cause increased losses and heating
in the motor.
Non-time critical user
interface
Background
8.5.1
8.5.3
•
Sample rates for various control tasks at each
switching frequency
Maximum frequency
In all operating modes the maximum output frequency is limited to 550
Hz.
Field weakening (constant power) operation
The drive can be used to run an induction machine above synchronous
speed into the constant power region. The speed continues to increase
and the available shaft torque reduces. The characteristics below show
the torque and output voltage characteristics as the speed is increased
above the rated value.
Figure 8-3
Torque and rated voltage against speed
Torque
Speed
Rated
voltage
Rated speed
Speed
Care must be taken to ensure the torque available above base speed is
sufficient for the application to run satisfactorily.
96
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
Safety
information
Product
information
Mechanical
installation
Electrical
installation
9
NV Media Card
9.1
Introduction
Getting
started
Basic
parameters
Running the
motor
The Non-Volatile Media Card feature enables simple configuration of
parameters, parameter back-up and drive cloning using an SD card.
The SD card can be used for:
•
•
Parameter copying between drives
Saving drive parameter sets
The NV Media Card (SD card) is located in the AI-Backup adaptor.
The drive only communicates with the NV Media Card when
commanded to read or write, meaning the card may be "hot swapped".
Figure 9-1
Installation of the SD card
Optimization
9.2.1
NV Media
Card
Advanced
parameters
Technical
Diagnostics
data
UL Listing
Changing the drive mode
If the source drive mode is different from the target drive mode then the
mode will be changed to the source drive mode before the parameters
are transferred. If the required drive mode is outside the allowed range
for the target then a {C.typ} trip is initiated and no data is transferred.
9.2.2
Different voltage ratings
If the voltage rating of the source and target drives is different then all
parameters except those that are rating dependent (i.e. attribute RA=1)
are transferred to the target drive. The rating dependent parameters are
left at their default values. After the parameters have been transferred
and saved to non-volatile memory a {C.rtg} trip is given as a warning.
The table below gives a list of the rating dependent parameters.
Parameters
Standard Ramp Voltage (02.008)
Motoring Current Limit (04.005)
M2 Motoring Current Limit (21.027)
Regenerating Current Limit (04.006)
M2 Regenerating Current Limit (21.028)
Symmetrical Current Limit (04.007)
M2 Symmetrical Current Limit (21.029)
1
User Current Maximum Scaling (04.024)
Motor Rated Current (05.007)
M2 Motor Rated Current (21.007)
Motor Rated Voltage (05.009)
M2 Motor Rated Voltage (21.009)
1. Installing the SD card
Motor Rated Power Factor (05.010)
NOTE
A flat bladed screwdriver or similar tool is required in order to insert /
remove the SD card fully into the AI-Backup adaptor.
Before inserting / removing the SD card into / from the AI-Backup
adaptor, the AI-Backup adaptor must be removed from the drive.
9.2
M2 Motor Rated Power Factor (21.010)
Stator Resistance (05.017)
M2 Stator Resistance (21.012)
Maximum Switching Frequency (05.018)
Transient Inductance /Ld (05.024)
M2 Transient Inductance /Ld (21.014)
SD card support
An SD memory card can be inserted in the AI-Backup Adaptor in order
to transfer data to the drive, however the following limitations should be
noted:
If a parameter from the source drive does not exist in the target drive
then no data is transferred for that parameter.
If the data for the parameter in the target drive is out of range then the
data is limited to the range of the target parameter.
If the target drive has a different rating to the source drive then the
normal rules for this type of transfer apply as described later.
No checking is possible to determine if the source and target product
types are the same, and so no warning is given if they are different.
Stator Inductance (05.025)
M2 Stator Inductance (21.024)
Injection Braking Level (06.006)
Supply Loss Detection Level (06.048)
9.2.3
Different option modules installed
If the option module ID code (15.001) is different for any option module
installed to the source drive compared to the destination drive, then the
parameters for the set-up for that option module are not transferred, but
and are instead set to their default values. After the parameters have
been transferred and saved to non-volatile memory, a {C.OPt} trip is
given as a warning.
If an SD card is used then the drive will recognise the following file types
through the drive parameter interface.
File Type
Description
Parameter file
A file that contains all clonable user save
parameters from the drive menus (1 to 30) in
difference from default format
Macro file
The same as a parameter file, but defaults are not
loaded before the data is transferred from the
card
These files can be created on a card by the drive and then transferred to
any other drive including derivatives. If the Drive Derivative (11.028) is
different between the source and target drives then the data is
transferred but a {C.Pr} trip is initiated.
It is possible for other data to be stored on the card, but this should not
be stored in the <MCDF> folder and it will not be visible via the drive
parameter interface.
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
97
Safety
information
9.2.4
Product
information
Mechanical
installation
Electrical
installation
Getting
started
Basic
parameters
Running the
motor
Different current ratings
If any of the current rating parameters (Maximum Heavy Duty Rating
(11.032), Maximum Rated Current (11.060) or Full Scale Current Kc
(11.061)) are different between the source and target then all parameters
are still written to the target drive, but some may be limited by their
allowed range. To give similar performance in the target compared to the
source drive the frequency and current controller gains are modified as
shown below. Note that this does not apply if the file identification
number is larger than 500.
Gains
Frequency Controller Proportional
Gain Kp1 (03.010)
Optimization
Frequency Controller Integral Gain Ki1 [Target Full Scale Current Kc
(11.061)]
(03.011)
Frequency Controller Proportional
Gain Kp2 (03.013)
Advanced
parameters
Technical
Diagnostics
data
UL Listing
The table below gives a summary of the values used in Pr mm.000 for
NV media card operations. The yyy represents the file identification
number.
Table 9-1
Functions in Pr mm.000
Value
Action
2001
Transfer the drive parameters to parameter file 001 and sets
the block as bootable.
This will include the parameters from the attached option
module.
4yyy
Transfer the drive parameters to parameter file yyy. This will
include the parameters from attached option module.
5yyy
Transfer the onboard user program to onboard user program
file yyy.
6yyy
Load the drive parameters from parameter file yyy or the
onboard user program from onboard user program file yyy.
Multiplier
[Source Full Scale Current Kc
(11.061)] /
NV Media
Card
7yyy
Erase file yyy.
8yyy
Compare the data in the drive with the file yyy. The data in
the drive is compared to the data in the file yyy. If the files are
the same then Pr mm.000 is simply reset to 0 when the
compare is complete. If the files are different a {Card
Compare} trip is initiated. All other NV media card trips also
apply.
9555
Clear the warning suppression flag.
Current Controller Ki Gain (04.014)
[Source Full Scale Current Kc
(11.061)] /
9666
Set the warning suppression flag.
M2 Current Controller Kp Gain
(21.022)
[Target Full Scale Current Kc
(11.061)]
9777
Clear the read-only flag.
Frequency Controller Integral Gain Ki2
(03.014)
M2 Frequency Controller Proportional
Gain Kp (21.017)
M2 Frequency Controller Integral Gain
Ki (21.018)
Current Controller Kp Gain (04.013)
9888
Set the read-only flag.
40yyy
Backup all drive data (parameter differences from defaults,
an onboard user program and miscellaneous option data),
including the drive name; the store will occur to the </fs/
MCDF/driveyyy/> folder; if it does not exist, it will be created.
Since the name is stored, this is a backup, rather than a
clone. The command value will be cleared when all drive and
option data has been saved.
60yyy
Load all drive data (parameter differences from defaults, an
onboard user program and miscellaneous option data); the
load will come from the <fs/MCDF/driveyyy/> folder. The
command value will not be cleared until the drive and all
option data have been loaded.
M2 Current Controller Ki Gain (21.023)
9.2.5
Different variable maximums
It should be noted that if ratings of the source and target drives are
different, it is possible that some parameters with variable maximums
may be limited and not have the same values as in the source drive.
9.2.6
Macro files
Macro files are created in the same way as parameter files except that
NV Media Card Create Special File (11.072) must be set to 1 before the
file is created on the NV media card. NV Media Card Create Special File
(11.072) is set to zero after the file has been created or the transfer fails.
When a macro file is transferred to a drive the drive mode is not changed
even if the actual mode is different to that in the file and defaults are not
loaded before the parameters are copied from the file to the drive.
98
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
Safety
information
9.3
Product
information
Mechanical
installation
Electrical
installation
Getting
started
Basic
parameters
Running the
motor
Optimization
NV Media
Card
Advanced
parameters
Technical
Diagnostics
data
UL Listing
NV Media Card parameters
Table 9-2
Key to parameter table coding
RW
Read / Write
ND
No default value
RO
Read only
NC
Not copied
Num
Number parameter
PT
Protected parameter
Bit
Bit parameter
RA
Rating dependant
Txt
Text string
US
User save
Bin
Binary parameter
PS
Power-down save
FI
Filtered
DE
Destination
11.036
RO
NV Media Card File Previously Loaded
Num
Ú
NC
PT
Ö
0 to 999
0
This parameter shows the number of the data block last transferred from
an SD card to the drive. If defaults are subsequently reloaded this
parameter is set to 0.
11.037
RW
NV Media Card File Number
Num
Ú
Ö
0 to 999
0
This parameter should have the data block number which the user would
like the information displayed in Pr 11.038, Pr 11.039.
11.038
RO
NV Media Card File Type
Txt
Ú
ND
NC
PT
Ö
0 to 2
0
Displays the type of data block selected with Pr 11.037.
Pr 11.038
Type / mode
None
No file selected
1
Open-loop
Open loop mode parameter file
2
RFC-A
RFC-A mode parameter file
11.039
RO
String
0
Num
Ú
NV Media Card File Version
ND
NC
PT
Ö
0 to 9999
0
Displays the version number of the file selected in Pr 11.037.
11.042
RW
Ú
9.4
Txt
Parameter Cloning
NC
None (0), Read (1), Prog
(2), Auto (3),
Boot (4)
US*
Ö
0
NV Media Card trips
After an attempt to read, write or erase data from a NV Media Card a trip
is initiated if there has been a problem with the command.
See Chapter 12 Diagnostics on page 179 for more information on NV
Media Card trips.
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
99
Safety
information
Product
information
10
Mechanical
installation
Electrical
installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
Optimization
parameters
motor
Advanced parameters
This is a quick reference to all parameters in the drive showing units,
ranges limits etc, with block diagrams to illustrate their function. Full
descriptions of the parameters can be found in the Parameter Reference
Guide.
WARNING
These advanced parameters are listed for reference
purposes only. The lists in this chapter do not include
sufficient information for adjusting these parameters.
Incorrect adjustment can affect the safety of the system,
and damage the drive and or external equipment. Before
attempting to adjust any of these parameters, refer to
the Parameter reference guide.
Table 10-1
Menu
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
14
15
18
20
21
22
Slot 1
Menu descriptions
Commonly used basic set up parameters for quick / easy
programming
Frequency reference
Ramps
Frequency control
Torque and current control
Motor control
Sequencer and clock
Analog I/O
Digital I/O
Programmable logic, motorized pot, binary sum, timers
Status and trips
Drive set-up and identification, serial communications
Threshold detectors and variable selectors
User PID controller
Option module slot 1 set-up menu
General option module application menu 1
General option module application menu 2
Second motor parameters
Menu 0 set-up
Slot 1 option menus**
Diagnostics
UL Listing
Open-loop: Sensorless control for induction motors
RFC-A: Asynchronous Rotor Flux Control for induction motors
Default abbreviations:
Standard default value (50 Hz AC supply frequency)
USA default value (60 Hz AC supply frequency)
NOTE
Parameter numbers shown in brackets {...} are the equivalent Menu 0
parameters. Some Menu 0 parameters appear twice since their function
depends on the operating mode.
In some cases, the function or range of a parameter is affected by the
setting of another parameter. The information in the lists relates to the
default condition of any parameters affected in this way.
Key to parameter table coding
Coding
Attribute
RW
Read/Write: can be written by the user
RO
Read only: can only be read by the user
Bit
1 bit parameter. ‘On’ or ‘Off’ on the display
Num
Number: can be uni-polar or bi-polar
Txt
Text: the parameter uses text strings instead of numbers.
Bin
Binary parameter
IP
IP Address parameter
Mac
Mac Address parameter
Date
Date parameter
Time
Time parameter
Chr
Character parameter
FI
Filtered: some parameters which can have rapidly changing
values are filtered when displayed on the drive keypad for
easy viewing.
DE
Destination: This parameter selects the destination of an
input or logic function.
RA
Rating dependent: this parameter is likely to have different
values and ranges with drives of different voltage and
current ratings. Parameters with this attribute will be
transferred to the destination drive by non-volatile storage
media when the rating of the destination drive is different
from the source drive and the file is a parameter file.
However, the values will be transferred if only the current
rating is different and the file is a difference from default
type file.
ND
No default: The parameter is not modified when defaults are
loaded
NC
Not copied: not transferred to or from non-volatile media
during copying.
PT
Protected: cannot be used as a destination.
US
User save: parameter saved in drive EEPROM when the
user initiates a parameter save.
PS
Power-down save: parameter automatically saved in drive
EEPROM when the under volts (UV) state occurs.
** Only displayed when the option module is installed.
100
Advanced
Technical data
parameters
Operation mode abbreviations:
Table 10-2
Description
NV Media
Card
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
Safety
information
Product
information
Table 10-3
Mechanical
installation
Electrical
installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
Optimization
parameters
motor
NV Media
Card
Advanced
Technical data
parameters
Diagnostics
UL Listing
Feature look-up table
Features
Related parameters (Pr)
Acceleration rates
02.010
Analog I/O
Menu 7
02.011 to 02.019
02.032
02.033
02.034 02.002
Analog input 1
Analog input 2
07.001
07.007
07.008
07.009
07.010
07.028 07.051
07.030
07.061 07.062 07.063 07.064
07.002
07.011
07.012
07.013
07.014
07.028 07.031
07.052
07.065 07.066 07.067 07.068
Analog output 1
07.019
07.020
07.055
07.099
Analog reference 1
01.036
07.010
07.001
07.007
07.008
07.009 07.028
07.051
07.030 07.061 07.062 07.063 07.064
Analog reference 2
01.037
07.014
01.041
07.002
07.011
07.012 07.013
07.032
07.031 07.065 07.066 07.067 07.068
10.005
10.007
05.024
05.025 05.010
05.029
05.030 05.062 05.063 05.059 05.060
09.032
09.033
09.034
12.050
12.051
10.031
06.001
02.004 02.002
10.012
10.039 10.040
06.025
06.026
06.027
Application menu
Menu 18
Menu 20
At frequency indicator bit
03.006
03.007
03.009
10.006
Auto reset
10.034
10.035
10.036
10.001
Autotune
05.012
Binary sum
09.029
05.017
09.030
Bipolar reference
01.010
Brake control
12.040 to 12.048
Braking
10.011
10.010
Catch a spinning motor
06.009
05.040
Coast to stop
06.001
09.031
10.030
Comms
11.023 to 11.027
Copying
11.042
11.036 to 11.040
Cost - per kWh electricity
06.016
06.017
Current controller
04.013
04.014
06.024
Current feedback
04.001
04.002
04.017
04.004
04.020
04.024
04.026 10.008 10.009 10.017
Current limits
04.005
04.006
04.007
04.018
04.015
04.019 04.016
05.007
05.010 10.008 10.009 10.017
DC bus voltage
05.005
02.008
DC injection braking
06.006
06.007
Deceleration rates
02.020
02.021 to 02.029
02.004
02.035 to 02.037 02.002
02.008
06.001 10.030 10.031 10.039 02.009
Defaults
11.043
11.046
Digital I/O
Menu 8
Digital I/O read word
08.020
08.003
08.004 10.040
06.001
Digital I/O T10
08.001
08.011
08.021
Digital I/O T11
08.002
08.012
08.022
Digital I/O T12
08.003
08.013
08.023
Digital input T13
08.004
08.014
08.024
Digital input T14
08.005
08.015
08.025
06.031
08.008
Direction
10.013
06.030
Drive active
10.002
10.040
Drive derivative
11.028
Drive OK
10.001
Dynamic performance
05.026
Dynamic V/F
05.013
Enable
06.015
Estimated frequency
03.002
External trip
10.032
Fan speed
06.045
Field weakening - induction
motor
Filter change
08.028
08.031
08.084
08.081
08.091 08.121
08.082
08.122
08.083
08.123
08.124
08.035
08.085 08.125
01.003
10.014
02.001 03.002
08.018
10.036
10.040
06.038
03.003
03.004
05.029
05.030
01.006
05.028
05.062
06.019
06.018
06.021
06.022
06.023
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
05.063
101
Safety
information
Product
information
Mechanical
installation
Electrical
installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
Optimization
parameters
motor
Features
NV Media
Card
Advanced
Technical data
parameters
11.029
Frequency controller
03.010 to 03.017
Frequency reference
selection
01.014
01.015
Frequency slaving
03.001
03.013
Hard frequency reference
03.022
03.023
Heavy duty rating
05.007
11.032
High stability space vector
modulation
05.019
I/O sequencer
06.004
Inertia compensation
Jog reference
Keypad reference
11.035
03.014
03.015
03.016
03.017 03.018
06.030
06.031
06.032
06.033
06.034 06.042
02.038
05.012
04.022
03.018
01.005
02.019
02.029
01.017
01.014
01.043
01.051
06.012
06.013
06.043
06.041
Limit switches
06.035
06.036
Line power supply loss
06.003
10.015
10.016
05.005
Logic function 1
09.001
09.004
09.005
09.006
09.007
09.008 09.009
09.010
Logic function 2
09.002
09.014
09.015
09.016
09.017
09.018 09.019
09.020
Maximum frequency
01.006
05.009
05.010
05.011
09.024
09.025
09.026 09.027
09.028
01.014 01.042
01.045 to 01.047
10.030 10.031
10.039
10.012
Menu 0 set-up
Motor map
Motor map 2
Menu 22
01.007
10.004
05.006
05.007
Menu 21
09.021
NV media card
11.036 to 11.040
Offset reference
01.004
01.038
Open loop vector mode
05.014
05.017
Operating mode
09.022
09.023
05.001
Over frequency threshold
03.008
Over modulation enable
05.020
05.002
01.009
05.014
05.003
05.004
Menu 14
11.022
Preset speeds
01.015
Programmable logic
Menu 9
Ramp (accel / decel) mode
02.004
02.008
06.001
02.002
02.003
Reference selection
01.014
01.015
01.049
01.050
01.001
Regenerating
10.010
10.011
10.030
10.031
06.001
02.004 02.002
Relay output
08.008
08.018
08.028
Reset
10.033
10.034
10.035
10.036 10.001
01.021 to 01.028
01.033
01.034 01.035
RFC mode
S ramp
02.006
Sample rates
05.018
Security code
11.030
Serial comms
11.023 to 11.027
05.040
01.031
01.032
10.039 10.040
11.044
01.029
01.030
Slip compensation
05.027
05.008
Status word
10.040
102
04.012
01.050
02.007
Skip speeds
Supply
09.003
11.042
11.031
Output
Power up parameter
05.008
11.45
Motorized potentiometer
PID controller
UL Listing
Related parameters (Pr)
Firmware version
Minimum frequency
Diagnostics
05.005
06.046
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
Safety
information
Product
information
Mechanical
installation
Electrical
installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
Optimization
parameters
motor
Features
NV Media
Card
Advanced
Technical data
parameters
Diagnostics
UL Listing
Related parameters (Pr)
Switching frequency
05.018
05.035
07.034
07.035
Thermal protection - drive
05.018
05.035
07.004
07.005
Thermal protection - motor
04.015
05.007
04.019
04.016
04.025
08.035
07.047
07.050
06.022
06.023
06.019
06.017
06.018
06.019
06.017
06.018
Thermistor input
Threshold detector 1
12.001
12.003 to 12.007
Threshold detector 2
12.002
12.023 to 12.027
Time - filter change
06.019
06.018
Time - powered up log
06.020
06.021
Time - run log
Torque
04.003
04.026
Torque mode
04.008
04.011
Trip detection
10.037
10.038
Trip log
10.020 to 10.029
Under voltage
05.005
10.016
V/F mode
05.015
05.014
Variable selector 1
12.008 to 12.016
Variable selector 2
12.028 to 12.036
Voltage controller
05.031
Voltage mode
05.014
05.017
Voltage rating
11.033
05.009
05.005
06.046
05.005
10.017
Voltage supply
Warning
10.019
10.012
Zero frequency indicator bit
03.005
10.003
07.035
10.018
08.035
05.032
10.020 to 10.029
10.041 to 10.060
10.070 to 10.079
10.015
05.015
10.018
10.040
Parameter ranges and Variable minimum/maximums:
Some parameters in the drive have a variable range with a variable minimum and a variable maximum values which is dependent on one of the
following:
•
•
•
•
The settings of other parameters
The drive rating
The drive mode
Combination of any of the above
The tables below give the definition of variable minimum/maximum and the maximum range of these.
VM_AC_VOLTAGE
Units
V
Range of [MIN]
0
Range of [MAX]
0 to the value listed below
VM_AC_VOLTAGE[MAX] is drive voltage rating dependent. See Table 10-4
Definition
VM_AC_VOLTAGE[MIN] = 0
VM_AC_VOLTAGE_SET
Units
V
Range of [MIN]
0
Range of [MAX]
0 to the value listed below
Definition
Range applied to parameters showing AC voltage
Range applied to the AC voltage set-up parameters
VM_AC_VOLTAGE_SET[MAX] is drive voltage rating dependent. See Table 10-4
VM_AC_VOLTAGE_SET[MIN] = 0
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
103
Safety
information
Product
information
Mechanical
installation
Electrical
installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
Optimization
parameters
motor
VM_ACCEL_RATE
Units
s / 100 Hz
Range of [MIN]
0.0
Range of [MAX]
0.0 to 3200.0
NV Media
Card
Advanced
Technical data
parameters
Diagnostics
UL Listing
Maximum applied to the ramp rate parameters
If Ramp Rate Units (02.039) = 0:
VM_ACCEL_RATE[MAX] = 3200.0
If Ramp Rate Units (02.039) = 1:
VM_ACCEL_RATE[MAX] = 3200.0 x Pr 01.006 / 100.00
Definition
VM_ACCEL_RATE[MIN] = 0.0
If the second motor map is selected (Pr 11.045 = 1) Pr 21.001 is used instead of Pr 01.006
VM_DC_VOLTAGE
Units
V
Range of [MIN]
0
Range of [MAX]
0 to the value listed below
Range applied to parameters showing DC voltage
VM_DC_VOLTAGE[MAX] is the full scale d.c. link voltage feedback (over voltage trip level) for the drive. This level is
drive voltage rating dependent. See Table 10-4
Definition
VM_DC_VOLTAGE[MIN] = 0
VM_DC_VOLTAGE_SET
Units
V
Range of [MIN]
0
Range of [MAX]
0 to the value listed below
Range applied to DC voltage reference parameters
VM_DC_VOLTAGE_SET[MAX] is drive voltage rating dependent. See Table 10-4
Definition
VM_DC_VOLTAGE_SET[MIN] = 0
VM_DRIVE_CURRENT
Units
A
Range of [MIN]
-9999.99 to 0.00
Range of [MAX]
0.00 to 9999.99
Range applied to parameters showing current in A
VM_DRIVE_CURRENT[MAX] is equivalent to the full scale (over current trip level) for the drive and is given by Full
Scale Current Kc (11.061).
Definition
VM_DRIVE_CURRENT[MIN] = - VM_DRIVE_CURRENT[MAX]
VM_DRIVE_CURRENT_UNIPOLAR
Units
A
Range of [MIN]
0.00
Range of [MAX]
0.00 to 9999.99
Unipolar version of VM_DRIVE_CURRENT
VM_DRIVE_CURRENT_UNIPOLAR[MAX] = VM_DRIVE_CURRENT[MAX]
Definition
VM_DRIVE_CURRENT_UNIPOLAR[MIN] = 0.00
VM_HIGH_DC_VOLTAGE
Range applied to parameters showing high DC voltage
Units
V
Range of [MIN]
0
Range of [MAX]
0 to 1500
Definition
VM_HIGH_DC_VOLTAGE[MAX] is the full scale d.c. link voltage feedback for the high d.c. link voltage measurement
which can measure the voltage if it goes above the normal full scale value. This level is drive voltage rating dependent.
See Table 10-4
VM_HIGH_DC_VOLTAGE[MIN] = 0
104
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
Safety
information
Product
information
Mechanical
installation
Electrical
installation
Getting
started
VM_MOTOR1_CURRENT_LIMIT
VM_MOTOR2_CURRENT_LIMIT
Units
%
Range of [MIN]
0.0
Range of [MAX]
0.0 to 1000.0
Basic
Running the
Optimization
parameters
motor
NV Media
Card
Advanced
Technical data
parameters
Diagnostics
UL Listing
Range applied to current limit parameters
VM_MOTOR1_CURRENT_LIMIT[MIN] = 0.0
Open-loop
VM_MOTOR1_CURRENT_LIMIT[MAX] = (ITlimit / ITrated) x 100 %
Where:
ITlimit = IMaxRef x cos(sin-1(IMrated / IMaxRef))
IMrated = Pr 05.007 sin φ
ITrated = Pr 05.007 x cos φ
cos φ = Pr 05.010
IMaxRef is 0.7 x Pr 11.061 when the motor rated current set in Pr 05.007 is less than or equal to Pr 11.032 (i.e.
Heavy duty), otherwise it is the lower of 0.7 x Pr 11.061 or 1.1 x Pr 11.060 (i.e. Normal Duty).
Definition
RFC-A
VM_MOTOR1_CURRENT_LIMIT[MAX] = (ITlimit / ITrated) x 100 %
Where:
ITlimit = IMaxRef x cos(sin-1(IMrated / IMaxRef))
IMrated = Pr 05.007 x cos φ1
ITrated = Pr 05.007 x sin φ1
φ1 = cos-1 (Pr 05.010) + φ2. φ1 is calculated during an autotune. See the variable minimum / maximum calculations
in the Parameter Reference Guide for more information regarding φ2.
IMaxRef is 0.9 x Pr 11.061 when the motor rated current set in Pr 05.007 is less than or equal to Pr 11.032 (i.e.
Heavy duty), otherwise it is the lower of 0.9 x Pr 11.061 or 1.1 x Pr 11.060 (i.e. Normal Duty).
For VM_MOTOR2_CURRENT_LIMIT[MAX] use Pr 21.007 instead of Pr 05.007 and Pr 21.010 instead of Pr 05.010.
VM_NEGATIVE_REF_CLAMP1
VM_NEGATIVE_REF_CLAMP2
Units
Hz
Range of [MIN]
-550.00 to 0.00
Range of [MAX]
0.00 to 550.00
Limits applied to the negative frequency or speed clamp
Negative
Reference
Clamp Enable
(01.008)
Bipolar Reference
Enable (01.010)
VM_NEGATIVE_REF_CLAMP1[MIN]
VM_NEGATIVE_REF_
CLAMP1[MAX]
0
0
0.00
Pr 01.006
0
1
0.00
0.00
X
VM_POSITIVE_REF_CLAMP[MAX]
0.00
Definition
1
VM_NEGATIVE_REF_CLAMP2 is defined in the same way except that Pr 21.001 is used instead of Pr 01.006.
VM_POSITIVE_REF_CLAMP
Limits applied to the positive frequency or speed reference clamp
Units
Hz
Range of [MIN]
0.00
Range of [MAX]
550.00
Definition
In all modes VM_POSITIVE_REF_CLAMP[MAX] is fixed at 550.00
In all modes VM_POSITIVE_REF_CLAMP[MIN] is fixed at 0.0
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
105
Safety
information
Product
information
Mechanical
installation
Electrical
installation
Getting
started
VM_POWER
Units
kW
Range of [MIN]
-999.99 to 0.00
Range of [MAX]
0.00 to 999.99
Basic
Running the
Optimization
parameters
motor
NV Media
Card
Advanced
Technical data
parameters
Diagnostics
UL Listing
Range applied to parameters that either set or display power
VM_POWER[MAX] is rating dependent and is chosen to allow for the maximum power that can be output by the drive
with maximum a.c. output voltage, at maximum controlled current and unity power factor.
Definition
VM_POWER[MAX] = √3 x VM_AC_VOLTAGE[MAX] x VM_DRIVE_CURRENT[MAX] / 1000
VM_POWER[MIN] = -VM_POWER[MAX]
VM_RATED_CURRENT
Units
A
Range of [MIN]
0.00
Range of [MAX]
0.00 to 9999.99
Range applied to rated current parameters
VM_RATED_CURRENT [MAX] = Maximum Rated Current (11.060) and is dependent on the drive rating.
Definition
VM_RATED_CURRENT [MIN] = 0.00
VM_FREQ
Units
Hz
Range of [MIN]
-550.00 to 0.00
Range of [MAX]
0.00 to 550.00
Range applied to parameters showing frequency
This variable minimum/maximum defines the range of frequency monitoring parameters. To allow headroom for
overshoot the range is set to twice the range of the frequency references.
Definition
VM_FREQ[MAX] = 2 x VM_SPEED_FREQ_REF[MAX]
VM_FREQ[MIN] = 2 x VM_SPEED_FREQ_REF[MIN]
VM_FREQ_UNIPOLAR
Unipolar version of VM_FREQ
Units
Hz
Range of [MIN]
Open-loop, RFC-A: 0.00
Range of [MAX]
Open-loop, RFC-A: 0.00 to 550.00
VM_FREQ_UNIPOLAR[MAX] = VM_FREQ[MAX]
Definition
VM_FREQ_UNIPOLAR[MIN] = 0.00
VM_SPEED_FREQ_REF
Units
Hz
Range of [MIN]
-550.00 to 0.00
Range of [MAX]
0.00 to 550.00
Definition
Range applied to the frequency or speed reference parameters
If Pr 01.008 = 0: VM_SPEED_FREQ_REF[MAX] = Pr 01.006
If Pr 01.008 = 1: VM_SPEED_FREQ_REF[MAX] = Pr 01.006 or |Pr 01.007|, whichever is larger.
If the second motor map is selected (Pr 11.045 = 1) Pr 21.001 is used instead of Pr 01.006 and Pr 21.002 instead of
Pr 01.007.
VM_SPEED_FREQ_REF[MIN] = -VM_SPEED_FREQ_REF[MAX].
VM_SPEED_FREQ_REF_UNIPOLAR
Units
Hz
Range of [MIN]
0.00
Range of [MAX]
0.00 to 550.00
Unipolar version of VM_SPEED_FREQ_REF
VM_SPEED_FREQ_REF_UNIPOLAR[MAX] = VM_SPEED_FREQ_REF[MAX]
Definition
VM_SPEED_FREQ_REF_UNIPOLAR[MIN] = 0.00
106
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
Safety
information
Product
information
Mechanical
installation
Electrical
installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
Optimization
parameters
motor
VM_SPEED_FREQ_USER_REFS
Units
Hz
Range of [MIN]
-550.00 to 0.00
Range of [MAX]
0.00 to 550.00
NV Media
Card
Advanced
Technical data
parameters
Diagnostics
UL Listing
Range applied to some Menu 1 reference parameters
VM_SPEED_FREQ_USER_REFS[MAX] = VM_SPEED_FREQ_REF[MAX]
Negative Reference
Clamp Enable (01.008)
Bipolar Reference
Enable (01.010)
0
0
0
1
-VM_SPEED_FREQ_REF[MAX]
1
0
0.00
1
1
-VM_SPEED_FREQ_REF[MAX]
Definition
VM_SPEED_FREQ_USER_REFS [MIN]
Pr 01.007
If the second motor map is selected (Pr 11.045 = 1) Pr 21.002 is used instead of Pr 01.007.
VM_STD_UNDER_VOLTS
Range applied the standard under-voltage threshold
Units
V
Range of [MIN]
0 to 1150
Range of [MAX]
0 to 1150
Definition
VM_STD_UNDER_VOLTS[MAX] = VM_DC_VOLTAGE_SET
VM_STD_UNDER_VOLTS[MIN] is voltage rating dependent. See Table 10-4
VM_SUPPLY_LOSS_LEVEL
Units
V
Range of [MIN]
0 to 1150
Range of [MAX]
0 to 1150
Range applied to the supply loss threshold
VM_SUPPLY_LOSS_LEVEL[MAX] = VM_DC_VOLTAGE_SET[MAX]
Definition
VM_SUPPLY_LOSS_LEVEL[MIN] is drive voltage rating dependent. See Table 10-4
VM_TORQUE_CURRENT
Units
%
Range of [MIN]
-1000.0 to 0.0
Range of [MAX]
0.0 to 1000.0
Range applied to torque and torque producing current parameters
Select Motor 2 Parameters (11.045)
VM_TORQUE_CURRENT [MAX]
0
VM_MOTOR1_CURRENT_LIMIT[MAX]
1
VM_MOTOR2_CURRENT_LIMIT[MAX]
Definition
VM_TORQUE_CURRENT[MIN] = -VM_TORQUE_CURRENT[MAX]
VM_TORQUE_CURRENT_UNIPOLAR
Units
%
Range of [MIN]
0.0
Range of [MAX]
0.0 to 1000.0
Unipolar version of VM_TORQUE_CURRENT
VM_TORQUE_CURRENT_UNIPOLAR[MAX] = VM_TORQUE_CURRENT[MAX]
Definition
VM_TORQUE_CURRENT_UNIPOLAR[MIN] =0.0
VM_USER_CURRENT
Units
%
Range of [MIN]
-1000.0 to 0.0
Range of [MAX]
0.0 to 1000.0
Definition
Range applied to torque reference and percentage load parameters with one decimal place
VM_USER_CURRENT[MAX] = User Current Maximum Scaling (04.024)
VM_USER_CURRENT[MIN] = -VM_USER_CURRENT[MAX]
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
107
Safety
information
Product
information
Mechanical
installation
Electrical
installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
Optimization
parameters
motor
NV Media
Card
Advanced
Technical data
parameters
Diagnostics
UL Listing
Table 10-4 Voltage ratings dependant values
Variable min/max
Voltage level
400 V
575 V
690 V
VM_DC_VOLTAGE_SET(MAX]
410
800
955
1150
VM_DC_VOLTAGE(MAX]
415
830
990
1190
VM_AC_VOLTAGE_SET(MAX]
240
480
575
690
VM_AC_VOLTAGE[MAX]
325
650
780
930
VM_STD_UNDER_VOLTS[MIN]
175
330
435
435
VM_SUPPLY_LOSS_LEVEL{MIN]
205
410
540
540
VM_HIGH_DC_VOLTAGE
1500
108
100 V
200 V
1500
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
Safety
information
Product
information
Mechanical
installation
Electrical
installation
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
Optimization
parameters
motor
NV Media
Card
Advanced
Technical data
parameters
Diagnostics
UL Listing
109
Safety
information
Product
information
10.1
Mechanical
installation
Electrical
installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
Optimization
parameters
motor
NV Media
Card
Advanced
Technical data
parameters
Diagnostics
UL Listing
Menu 1: Frequency reference
Figure 10-1
Menu 1 logic diagram
LOCAL/REMOTE
Analog Reference
Analog
Reference 1
Analog Input 1
Menu 8
01.036
Menu 7
01.041
Reference Select
Flag 1
01.042
Reference Select
Flag 2
01.037
Analog
Reference 2
Analog Input 2
Preset Reference
Reference Select
01.043 Flag 3
Preset Selector 01.015
Preset Reference Select Bits 1 ~ 3
01.047
01.046 01.045
Reference
Selector**
1
01.014
Reference
Selected
Indicator
8
01.049
01.021 ~01.028
0
+
Preset
References
1~8
+
9
Scan Timer
Percentage 01.038
Trim
1.20
Preset
Selected 01.050
Indicator
01.016
Pr 01.050 set
to greater than 1
01.048
Pr 01.049 Pr 01.050
1
1
>1
1
1
2
>1
2
x
3
x
4
x
5
x
6
Preset Selector
Timer Reset
Power-Up Keypad
Control Mode
Reference
01.051
01.017
Reference
Selected
01.004
Reference
Offset
Preset Selector
Timer
Reference being used
Analog Reference 1
Preset Reference defined by Pr 01.050
Analog Reference 2
Preset Reference defined by Pr 01.050
Preset Reference defined by Pr 01.050
Keypad Control Mode Reference (01.017)
Reserved
Keypad Control Mode Reference (01.017)
01.001
Max O/P
frequency
x (% trim / 100)
Reference
Offset Select
** Contolled by drive configuration (Pr 11.034)
Keypad Control
Mode Reference
Key
Input
terminals
Output
terminals
mm.ppp
Read-write (RW)
parameter
mm.ppp
Read-only (RO)
parameter
The parameters are all shown in their default settings
110
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
Safety
information
Product
information
Mechanical
installation
Electrical
installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
Optimization
parameters
motor
RUN FORWARD
NV Media
Card
Advanced
Technical data
parameters
Diagnostics
UL Listing
RUN REVERSE
Menu 8
Menu 6
Sequencer
Sequencer (Menu 6)
Jog select 01.013
Bipolar
reference
enable
Maximum
Reference
Clamp
01.010
01.006
Reverse
select
Negative
Reference
Clamp
Enable
01.008
x(-1)
Minimum
01.007 Reference
Clamp
Clamped
reference
[01.006]
[01.007]
01.070
[01.007]
[01.006]
01.072
Alternative
reference
[01.006]
01.005
Jog
reference
Alternative
reference
enable
01.071
[01.006]
[01.006]
[01.007]
01.035 Reference In
Rejection Zone
Pre-skip
Filter Reference
01.003 Pre-ramp
reference
01.002
Menu 2
Reference
On
01.011
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
01.029
01.031
01.033
Skip
Reference
1
Skip
Reference
2
Skip
Reference
3
01.030
Skip
Reference
Band
1
01.032
Skip
Reference
Band
2
01.034
Skip
Reference
Band
3
111
Safety
information
Product
information
Mechanical
installation
Electrical
installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
Optimization
parameters
motor
NV Media
Card
Range (Ú)
Parameter
OL
Advanced
Technical data
parameters
Diagnostics
Default (Ö)
RFC-A
OL
UL Listing
Type
RFC-A
01.001
Reference Selected
±VM_SPEED_FREQ_REF Hz
RO
Num
ND
NC
PT
01.002
Pre-skip Filter Reference
±VM_SPEED_FREQ_REF Hz
RO
Num
ND
NC
PT
01.003
Pre-ramp Reference
±VM_SPEED_FREQ_REF Hz
RO
Num
ND
NC
PT
01.004
Reference Offset
±VM_SPEED_FREQ_REF Hz
0.00 Hz
RW
Num
US
01.005
Jog Reference
0.00 to 300.00 Hz
1.50 Hz
RW
Num
US
01.006
Maximum Reference Clamp
±VM_POSITIVE_REF_CLAMP Hz
50Hz: 50.00 Hz
60Hz: 60.00 Hz
RW
Num
US
01.007
Minimum Reference Clamp
±VM_NEGATIVE_REF_CLAMP1 Hz
0.00 Hz
RW
Num
US
01.008
Negative Reference Clamp Enable
Off (0) or On (1)
Off (0)
RW
Bit
US
01.009
Reference Offset Select
0 to 2
0
RW
Num
US
01.010
Bipolar Reference Enable
Off (0) or On (1)
Off (0)
RW
Bit
01.011
Reference On
Off (0) or On (1)
RO
Bit
ND
NC
PT
01.012
Reverse Select
Off (0) or On (1)
RO
Bit
ND
NC
PT
01.013
Jog Select
Off (0) or On (1)
RO
Bit
ND
NC
PT
US
A1.A2 (0), A1.Pr (1), A2.Pr (2), PrESEt (3), PAd (4),
rES (5), PAd.rEF (6)
A1.A2 (0)
RW
Txt
0 to 9
0
RW
Num
US
0 to 400.0 s
10.0s
RW
Num
US
01.014
Reference Selector
01.015
Preset Selector
US
01.016
Preset Selector Timer
01.017
Keypad Control Mode Reference
±VM_SPEED_FREQ_USER_REFS Hz
0.00 Hz
RO
Num
01.021
Preset Reference 1
±VM_SPEED_FREQ_REF Hz
0.00 Hz
RW
Num
US
01.022
Preset Reference 2
±VM_SPEED_FREQ_REF Hz
0.00 Hz
RW
Num
US
01.023
Preset Reference 3
±VM_SPEED_FREQ_REF Hz
0.00 Hz
RW
Num
US
01.024
Preset Reference 4
±VM_SPEED_FREQ_REF Hz
0.00 Hz
RW
Num
US
01.025
Preset Reference 5
±VM_SPEED_FREQ_REF Hz
0.00 Hz
RW
Num
US
01.026
Preset Reference 6
±VM_SPEED_FREQ_REF Hz
0.00 Hz
RW
Num
US
01.027
Preset Reference 7
±VM_SPEED_FREQ_REF Hz
0.00 Hz
RW
Num
US
01.028
Preset Reference 8
±VM_SPEED_FREQ_REF Hz
0.00 Hz
RW
Num
US
01.029
Skip Reference 1
0.00 to VM_SPEED_FREQ_REF_UNIPOLAR Hz
0.00 Hz
RW
Num
US
01.030
Skip Reference Band 1
US
01.031
Skip Reference 2
01.032
Skip Reference Band 2
01.033
Skip Reference 3
01.034
Skip Reference Band 3
01.035
Reference In Rejection Zone
01.036
Analog Reference 1
01.037
Analog Reference 2
01.038
Percentage Trim
01.041
NC
PT
PS
0.00 to 25.00 Hz
0.50 Hz
RW
Num
0.00 to VM_SPEED_FREQ_REF_UNIPOLAR Hz
0.00 Hz
RW
Num
US
0.00 to 25.00 Hz
0.50 Hz
RW
Num
US
0.00 to VM_SPEED_FREQ_REF_UNIPOLAR Hz
0.00 Hz
RW
Num
US
0.00 to 25.00 Hz
0.50 Hz
RW
Num
US
RO
Bit
±VM_SPEED_FREQ_USER_REFS Hz
0.00 Hz
RO
Num
NC
±VM_SPEED_FREQ_USER_REFS Hz
0.00 Hz
RO
Num
NC
±100.00 %
0.00 %
RW
Num
NC
Reference Select Flag 1
Off (0) or On (1)
Off (0)
RW
Bit
NC
01.042
Reference Select Flag 2
Off (0) or On (1)
Off (0)
RW
Bit
NC
01.043
Reference Select Flag 3
Off (0) or On (1)
Off (0)
RW
Bit
NC
01.045
Preset Select Flag 1
Off (0) or On (1)
Off (0)
RW
Bit
NC
01.046
Preset Select Flag 2
Off (0) or On (1)
Off (0)
RW
Bit
NC
01.047
Preset Select Flag 3
Off (0) or On (1)
Off (0)
RW
Bit
NC
01.048
Preset Selector Timer Reset
Off (0) or On (1)
Off (0)
RW
Bit
NC
01.049
Reference Selected Indicator
1 to 6
RO
Num
ND
NC
PT
01.050
Preset Selected Indicator
1 to 8
RO
Num
ND
NC
PT
01.051
Power-up Keypad Control Mode Reference
01.057
Force Reference Direction
01.069
Reference in rpm
01.070
Clamped Reference
01.071
Alternative Reference
±VM_SPEED_FREQ_REF Hz
01.072
Alternative Reference Enable
RW Read / Write
RO
Read only
ND
NC
Not copied
112
No default value
Off (0) or On (1)
NC
PT
rESEt (0), LASt (1), PrESEt (2)
rESEt (0)
RW
Txt
None (0), For (1), rEv (2)
None (0)
RW
Txt
±VM_SPEED_FREQ_REF rpm
RO
Num
ND
NC
±VM_SPEED_FREQ_REF Hz
RO
Num
ND
NC
PT
RW
Num
NC
PT
RO
Bit
NC
PT
0.00 Hz
Off (0) or On (1)
Num Number parameter
PT
ND
Protected parameter
US
ND
PT
Bit
Bit parameter
Txt
Text string
Bin
Binary parameter
FI
Filtered
RA
Rating dependent
US
User save
PS
Power-down save
DE
Destination
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
Safety
information
Product
information
Mechanical
installation
Electrical
installation
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
Optimization
parameters
motor
NV Media
Card
Advanced
Technical data
parameters
Diagnostics
UL Listing
113
Safety
information
10.2
Figure 10-2
Product
information
Mechanical
installation
Electrical
installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
Optimization
parameters
motor
NV Media
Card
Advanced
Technical data
parameters
Diagnostics
UL Listing
Menu 2: Ramps
Menu 2 logic diagram
Key
Acceleration Rate Select Bits
02.034
02.033
2.32
02.032
Input
terminals
Output
terminals
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
1
0
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
mm.ppp
Read-write (RW)
parameter
mm.ppp
Read-only (RO)
parameter
The parameters are all shown in their default settings
Acceleration
Rate Selector
02.010
Acceleration rates 1 ~ 8
02.011
Acceleration Rate 1
02.012
Acceleration Rate 2
02.013
Acceleration Rate 3
02.014
Acceleration Rate 4
02.015
Acceleration Rate 5
02.016
Acceleration Rate 6
02.017
Acceleration Rate 7
02.018
Acceleration Rate 8
Preset Selected
Indicator
02.030
Acceleration
Rate Selected
01.050
Jog Acceleration
Rate
1
02.019
2
3
4
Jog Select
01.013
5
6
7
8
Reverse
Accel. Rate
Forward
Accel. Rate
N
N
t
t
Acceleration
Ramp Control
Pre-Ramp
01.003
Reference
114
02.003
Ramp Hold
02.004
Ramp Mode Select
02.008
Standard Ramp Voltage
02.009
Deceleration Fail
Detection Disable
02.039
Ramp Rate Units
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
Safety
information
Product
information
Mechanical
installation
Electrical
installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
Optimization
parameters
motor
NV Media
Card
Advanced
Technical data
parameters
Diagnostics
UL Listing
Deceleration Rate Select Bits
02.037
02.036
02.035
Deceleration
Rate Selector
02.020
Deceleration Rates 1 ~ 8
Deceleration
Rate Selected 02.031
01.050
02.029 Jog Deceleration
Rate
02.021
Deceleration Rate 1
02.022
Deceleration Rate 2
02.023
Deceleration Rate 3
02.024
Deceleration Rate 4
02.025
Deceleration Rate 5
02.026
Deceleration Rate 6
02.027
Deceleration Rate 7
02.028
Deceleration Rate 8
Preset
Selected
Indicator
1
2
3
4
01.013 Jog Select
5
6
Forward
Decel. rate
N
7
Reverse
Decel. rate
8
N
t
t
Current control
Menu 4
(Open-loop only)
Deceleration
Ramp Control
02.006
S-Ramp Enable
02.007
Maximum Rate Of Change
Of Acceleration
02.040
S-Ramp Percentage
02.041
S-Ramp Set-up Mode
_
+
02.002
Ramp Enable
(RFC-A mode only)
Ramps always enabled
in Open-loop
Post-Ramp
Reference
02.001
d/dt
Motor And Load
Inertia
03.018
Torque Per Amp
05.032
02.038
Inertia
Compensation
Torque
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
115
Safety
information
Product
information
Mechanical
installation
Electrical
installation
Post Ramp Reference
02.002
Ramp Enable
02.003
Ramp Hold
02.004
Ramp Mode Select
02.005
Disable Ramp Output
02.006
S Ramp Enable
02.007
Max Rate Of Change Of Acceleration
Basic
Running the
Optimization
parameters
motor
NV Media
Card
Range (Ú)
Parameter
02.001
Getting
started
Advanced
Technical data
parameters
Default (Ö)
OL
RFC-A
OL
±VM_SPEED_FREQ_REF Hz
On (1)
02.009
Deceleration Fail Detection Disable
Acceleration Rate Selector
Num
Bit
ND
NC
PT
US
Off (0)
RW
Bit
US
FASt (0), Std (1), Std.bSt (2), FSt.bSt (3)
Std (1)
RW
Txt
US
Off (0) or On (1)
02.010
RO
RW
Off (0) or On (1)
RW
Bit
US
Off (0)
Off (0)
RW
Bit
US
0.0 to 300.0 s²/100Hz
3.1 s²/100 Hz
RW
Num
US
±VM_DC_VOLTAGE_SET V
110 V drive: 375 V
200 V drive: 375 V
400 V drive 50 Hz: 750 V
400 V drive 60 Hz: 775 V
575 V drive: 895 V
690 V drive: 1075 V
RW
Num
Off (0) or On (1)
Off (0)
RW
Bit
US
0 to 9
0
RW
Num
US
Off (0) or On (1)
Standard Ramp Voltage
UL Listing
Type
RFC-A
Off (0) or On (1)
02.008
Diagnostics
RA
US
02.011
Acceleration Rate 1
±VM_ACCEL_RATE s
5.0 s
RW
Num
US
02.012
Acceleration Rate 2
±VM_ACCEL_RATE s
5.0 s
RW
Num
US
02.013
Acceleration Rate 3
±VM_ACCEL_RATE s
5.0 s
RW
Num
US
02.014
Acceleration Rate 4
±VM_ACCEL_RATE s
5.0 s
RW
Num
US
02.015
Acceleration Rate 5
±VM_ACCEL_RATE s
5.0 s
RW
Num
US
02.016
Acceleration Rate 6
±VM_ACCEL_RATE s
5.0 s
RW
Num
US
02.017
Acceleration Rate 7
±VM_ACCEL_RATE s
5.0 s
RW
Num
US
02.018
Acceleration Rate 8
±VM_ACCEL_RATE s
5.0 s
RW
Num
US
02.019
Jog Acceleration Rate
±VM_ACCEL_RATE s
0.2 s
RW
Num
US
02.020
Deceleration Rate Selector
0 to 9
0
RW
Num
US
02.021
Deceleration Rate 1
±VM_ACCEL_RATE s
10.0 s
RW
Num
US
02.022
Deceleration Rate 2
±VM_ACCEL_RATE s
10.0 s
RW
Num
US
02.023
Deceleration Rate 3
±VM_ACCEL_RATE s
10.0 s
RW
Num
US
02.024
Deceleration Rate 4
±VM_ACCEL_RATE s
10.0 s
RW
Num
US
02.025
Deceleration Rate 5
±VM_ACCEL_RATE s
10.0 s
RW
Num
US
02.026
Deceleration Rate 6
±VM_ACCEL_RATE s
10.0 s
RW
Num
US
02.027
Deceleration Rate 7
±VM_ACCEL_RATE s
10.0 s
RW
Num
US
02.028
Deceleration Rate 8
±VM_ACCEL_RATE s
10.0 s
RW
Num
US
02.029
Jog Deceleration Rate
±VM_ACCEL_RATE s
0.2 s
RW
Num
02.030
Acceleration Rate Selected
RO
Num
ND
02.031
Deceleration Rate Selected
RO
Num
ND
02.032
Acceleration Rate Select Bit 0
Off (0) or On (1)
Off (0)
RW
Bit
NC
02.033
Acceleration Rate Select Bit 1
Off (0) or On (1)
Off (0)
RW
Bit
NC
02.034
Acceleration Rate Select Bit 2
Off (0) or On (1)
Off (0)
RW
Bit
NC
02.035
Deceleration Rate Select Bit 0
Off (0) or On (1)
Off (0)
RW
Bit
NC
02.036
Deceleration Rate Select Bit 1
Off (0) or On (1)
Off (0)
RW
Bit
NC
02.037
Deceleration Rate Select Bit 2
Off (0) or On (1)
Off (0)
RW
Bit
02.038
Inertia Compensation Torque
RO
Num
02.039
Ramp Rate Units
02.040
S Ramp Percentage
02.041
S Ramp Set-up Mode
0 to 2
0
RW
Num
US
02.042
Maximum Rate Of Change Of Acceleration 1
0.0 to 300.0 s²/100 Hz
0.0 s²/100 Hz
RW
Num
US
02.043
Maximum Rate Of Change Of Acceleration 2
0.0 to 300.0 s²/100 Hz
0.0 s²/100 Hz
RW
Num
US
02.044
Maximum Rate Of Change Of Acceleration 3
0.0 to 300.0 s²/100 Hz
0.0 s²/100 Hz
RW
Num
US
02.045
Maximum Rate Of Change Of Acceleration 4
0.0 to 300.0 s²/100 Hz
0.0 s²/100 Hz
RW
Num
US
RW Read / Write
RO
Read only
ND
NC
Not copied
116
No default value
0 to 8
0 to 8
±1000.0 %
PT
NC
PT
NC
ND
NC
PT
0 to 1
0
RW
Num
US
0.0 to 50.0 %
0.0 %
RW
Num
US
Num Number parameter
PT
US
NC
Protected parameter
Bit
Bit parameter
Txt
Text string
Bin
Binary parameter
FI
Filtered
RA
Rating dependent
US
User save
PS
Power-down save
DE
Destination
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
Safety
information
10.3
Product
information
Mechanical
installation
Electrical
installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
Optimization
parameters
motor
NV Media
Card
Advanced
Technical data
parameters
Diagnostics
UL Listing
Menu 3: Frequency control
Figure 10-3
Menu 3 Open-loop logic diagram
Hard Frequency
03.022
Reference
Hard Frequency
Reference Select 1
03.023
Post Ramp
Reference
1
Reference
01.011
On
Slip
compensation
Menu 5
0
+
+
Zero
Frequency
Zero Frequency
Threshold
+
03.005
Bipolar Reference
Enable
01.010
Running At Or Below
Minimum Frequency
Minimum
Reference Clamp
+0.5Hz
1
+
_
10.004
0
Maximum
Reference
Clamp
Over
Frequency
Threshold
At Frequency
Lower Limit
03.006
Pre Ramp
Reference
03.008
+
At Frequency
Upper Limit
Over Speed
Trip
_
1
03.008>0
At Frequency
NOR
03.007
0
10.005
+
03.009
Absolute
At-Frequency
Select
+20%
Below Set-Frequency
+
_
0
+
01.006
_
1
01.003
05.001
10.003
_
01.007
Output
Frequency
+
+
02.001
Menu 2
0
_
10.006
Key
10.007
Above Set-Frequency
Input
terminals
Output
terminals
mm.ppp
Read-write (RW)
parameter
mm.ppp
Read-only (RO)
parameter
The parameters are all shown in their default settings
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
117
Safety
information
Product
information
Figure 10-4
Mechanical
installation
Electrical
installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
Optimization
parameters
motor
NV Media
Card
Advanced
Technical data
parameters
Diagnostics
UL Listing
Menu 3 RFC-A logic diagram
Hard Frequency
03.022
Reference
Hard Frequency
Reference Select 03.023
Reference
On
Post-Ramp
Reference
01.011
VM_SPEED_FREQ_REF[MAX]
Final Demand
Reference
+
+
02.001
02.005
03.001
VM_SPEED_FREQ_REF[MIN]
Disable Ramp
Output
03.080
Sensorless
Position
118
d/dt
03.079
Sensorless
Mode Filter
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
Safety
information
Product
information
Mechanical
installation
Electrical
installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
Optimization
parameters
motor
NV Media
Card
Advanced
Technical data
parameters
Diagnostics
UL Listing
Frequency Controller
Gain Select
03.016
Frequency Controller Gains
+
Frequency
Controller
Output
03.010 (Kp1)
Frequency
Error
0
03.011 (Ki1)
+
03.003
_
03.004
_
Menu 4
03.013 (Kp2)
1
03.014 (Ki2)
Frequency
Controller
Differential
Feedback
Gains
(Kd2)
(Kd1)
03.012
03.015
0
1
Zero
Frequency
Zero Frequency
Threshold
+
03.005
Bipolar Reference
Enable
01.010
10.003
_
Running At Or
Below Minimum
Frequency
1
Min Reference Clamp
01.007
+0.5 Hz
10.004
+
0
_
Estimated Frequency
+
Max Reference Clamp
01.006
03.002
+20%
Over Frequency
Threshold
0
Over Speed Trip
_
1
03.008
03.008 >0
At Frequency
Lower Limit 03.006
Pre Ramp
Reference
_
1
01.003
0
Below Set Frequency
+
_
10.005
At Frequency
+
03.009
Absolute At Frequency
Select
NOR
+
03.007
At Frequency
Upper Limit
_
10.006
10.007
Above Set Frequency
Key
X
X
Input
terminals
X
X
Output
terminals
mm.ppp
Read-write (RW)
parameter
mm.ppp
Read-only (RO)
parameter
The parameters are all shown in their default settings
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
119
Safety
information
Product
information
Figure 10-5
Mechanical
installation
Electrical
installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
Optimization
parameters
motor
NV Media
Card
Advanced
Technical data
parameters
Diagnostics
UL Listing
Menu 3 logic diagram
T14 DI5 control
08.085
T14 DI 05
Destination B
T14 Digital
Input 5 Select
08.035
32 Bit Position
Counter
T14 Digital Input 5
0 to 3
Position
Scaling
03.035
03.036
08.125
Position
≥1
03.029
T14 Digital input
5 destination A
08.025
Position Counter
03.032
Reset
Any unprotected
bit parameter
14
??.???
4
03.043
Maximum
Reference
Frequency
Frequency
Input
Limit
03.045
03.044
Frequency
Reference
Frequency
Reference
Scaling
01.041 Reference
Select Flag 1
??.???
T10 DO1
Control
08.091
T10 DI/O 01 Source
/ Destination B
08.121
T10 Digital I/O 01
Output Select
≥1
08.031
T10 Digital IO1 Source
08.021
/ Destination A
At Zero
Frequency
10.003
10
??.???
03.037
??.???
Any valid
parameter
T10 Digital
I/O 1
0 to 1
Frequency Output or
PWM Output Scaling
03.038
2 or 3
Maximum Output
Frequency
Key
Input
terminals
Output
terminals
mm.ppp
Read-write (RW)
parameter
mm.ppp
Read-only (RO)
parameter
The parameters are all shown in their default settings
120
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
Safety
information
Product
information
Mechanical
installation
Electrical
installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
Optimization
parameters
motor
NV Media
Card
Range (Ú)
Parameter
OL
Advanced
Technical data
parameters
Diagnostics
Default (Ö)
RFC-A
OL
Type
RFC-A
±VM_FREQ Hz
UL Listing
03.001
Final Demand Reference
RO
Num
ND
NC
PT
FI
03.002
Estimated Frequency
±VM_FREQ Hz
RO
Num
ND
NC
PT
FI
03.003
Frequency Error
±VM_FREQ Hz
RO
Num
ND
NC
PT
FI
03.004
Frequency Controller Output
±VM_TORQUE_CURRENT %
RO
Num
ND
NC
PT
03.005
Zero Frequency Threshold
RW
Num
03.006
At Frequency Lower Limit
0.00 to VM_SPEED_FREQ_REF_UNIPOLAR Hz
1.00 Hz
RW
Num
US
03.007
At Frequency Upper Limit
0.00 to VM_SPEED_FREQ_REF_UNIPOLAR Hz
1.00 Hz
RW
Num
US
03.008
Over Frequency Threshold
0.00 to VM_SPEED_FREQ_REF_UNIPOLAR Hz
0.00 Hz
RW
Num
US
03.009
Absolute At Frequency Select
Off (0) or On (1)
Off (0)
RW
Bit
US
03.010
Frequency Controller Proportional Gain Kp1
RW
Num
US
0.00 to 20.00 Hz
2.00 Hz
0.000 to 200.000 s/rad
03.011
Frequency Controller Integral GainKi1
03.012
Frequency Controller Differential Feedback Gain Kd1
03.013
Frequency Controller Proportional Gain Kp2
03.014
Frequency Controller Integral GainKi2
0.100 s/rad
0.00 to 655.35 s²/rad
0.10 s²/rad
RW
Num
US
0.00000 to 0.65535 1/rad
0.00000 1/rad
RW
Num
US
0.000 to 200.000 s/rad
0.100 s/rad
RW
Num
US
0.00 to 655.35 s²/rad
0.10 s²/rad
RW
Num
US
0.00000 to 0.65535 1/rad
0.00000 1/rad
RW
Num
US
0 to 2
0
RW
Num
US
0.00 to
VM_FREQ_UNIPOLAR Hz
0.00 Hz
RW
Num
FI
0.00 kgm²
US
03.015
Frequency Controller Differential Feedback Gain Kd2
03.016
Frequency Controller Gain Select
03.017
Gain Change Threshold
03.018
Motor and Load Inertia
03.022
Hard Frequency Reference
03.023
Hard Frequency Reference Select
03.029
Position (T14)
03.032
Position Counter Reset (T14)
03.035
Position Scaling Numerator (T14)
03.036
Position Scaling Denominator (T14)
03.037
Frequency Output or PWM Output Scaling (T10)
03.038
Maximum Output Frequency (T10)
03.043
Maximum Reference Frequency (T14)
03.044
Frequency Reference Scaling (T14)
03.045
Frequency Reference (T14)
0.00 to 100.00 %
03.047
Two Point Minimum Frequency (T14)
0.00 to 100.00 %
03.048
Drive Reference at Minimum Frequency (T14)
03.049
Two Point Maximum Frequency (T14)
03.050
Drive Reference at Maximum Frequency (T14)
03.072
Motor Speed Percent
03.079
Sensorless Mode Filter
03.080
Sensorless Position
0.00 to 1000.00 kgm²
RW
Num
±VM_SPEED_FREQ_REF Hz
0.00 Hz
RW
Num
US
Off (0) or On (1)
Off (0)
RW
Bit
US
RO
Num
Off (0) or On (1)
Off (0)
RW
Bit
0.000 to 1.000
1.000
RW
Num
US
0.000 to 100.000
1.000
RW
Num
US
US
0 to 65535
RO
Read only
No default value
NC
Not copied
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
FI
1.000
RW
Num
RW
Txt
US
0.00 to 100.00 kHz
10.00 kHz
RW
Num
US
0.000 to 4.000
1.000
RW
Num
RO
Num
0.00 %
RW
Num
US
0.00 to 100.00 %
0.00 %
RW
Num
US
0.00 to 100.00 %
100.00 %
RW
Num
US
0.00 to 100.00 %
100.00 %
RW
Num
US
Num Number parameter
PT
PT
5 (2) kHz
RO
4 (0) ms
0 to 65535
Read / Write
NC
NC
0.000 to 4.000
4 (0), 5 (1), 6 (2), 8 (3), 12 (4),
20 (5) ms
ND
ND
1 (0), 2 (1), 5 (2), 10 (3) kHz
±150.0 %
RW
FI
US
Protected parameter
US
ND
ND
RW
Txt
RO
Num
NC
NC
PT
PT
FI
FI
US
ND
NC
PT
Bit
Bit parameter
Txt
Text string
Bin
Binary parameter
FI
Filtered
RA
Rating dependent
US
User save
PS
Power-down save
DE
Destination
121
Safety
information
10.4
Product
information
Mechanical
installation
Electrical
installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
Optimization
parameters
motor
NV Media
Card
Advanced
Technical data
parameters
Diagnostics
UL Listing
Menu 4: Torque and current control
Figure 10-6
Menu 4 Open loop logic diagram
Menu 2 ramp
controller
Pre Ramp
Reference
Torque Mode
Selector
04.011
+
01.003
2.01
Post Ramp
Reference
+
10.009
Current
Limit
Active
Output
Frequency
Motor map
02.001
2.01
05.001
Current Controller
04.013 P Gain
Torque
Producing
Current
I Gain
04.014
Current
Magnitude
_
04.002
04.020
+
Output
Frequency
Motor
Rated
Frequency
05.001
05.006
Final
Torque
Reference
Torque
Reference* 04.008
Torque to
current
conversion
04.003
Current limits
Maximum
Heavy Duty
Rating
Motor
Rated
Current
04.005
11.032
Motoring
Regenerating
05.007
04.002 - Active
Current
(Amp)
04.020 - Percentage
Load
Final
Current
Reference
+
04.001
04.017
Magnetising
Current
04.004
_
Final
Current Limit
Motor Thermal
Time Constant 1
Thermal
Protection
Mode
Low Frequency
Thermal Protection
Mode
04.015
04.016
04.025
04.018
Symmetrical
Overload detection
10.008
10.009
10.039
04.019
10.017
Rated
Load Reached
Current Limit
Active
Braking Resistor
Thermal
Accumulator
Motor
Protection
Accumulator
Motor Overload
Alarm
Key
Input
terminals
Output
terminals
mm.ppp
Read-write (RW)
parameter
mm.ppp
Read-only (RO)
parameter
The parameters are all shown in their default settings
122
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
Safety
information
Figure 10-7
Product
information
Mechanical
installation
Electrical
installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
Optimization
parameters
motor
NV Media
Card
Advanced
Technical data
parameters
Diagnostics
UL Listing
Menu 4 RFC-A logic diagram
Inertia Compensation
Torque
02.038
Estimated
frequency
0 1
03.002
_
Final
Demand 03.001
Reference
Frequency
Controller
Output
+
03.004
+
Inertia
04.022 Compensation
Enable
Motor
Rated
Power
Factor
05.007
05.010
Torque Mode
04.011
Selector
+
Final
Torque
Reference
Current Controller
+
04.003
+
Frequency
Over-Ride
Level
Pre01.003
Ramp
Reference
Zero
Frequency 03.005
Threshold
Motor
Rated
Current
Current
Controller
P Gain
04.014
Current
Controller
I Gain
04.004
_
Final
Current
Reference
+
04.013
Coiler/Uncoiler
Frequency
Over-Ride
Level
Torque Producing
Current
(Amp)
Torque
Reference 04.008
04.002
User Current
Maximum Scaling
Current limits
Maximum
Heavy Duty
Rating
Motor
Rated
Current
11.032
04.005
Final
Current Limit
Motoring
Regenerating
05.007
04.018
Motor Thermal
Time Constant 1
04.015
Thermal
Protection
Mode
04.016
Current
Magnitude
04.001
04.017
Magnetising
Current
04.024
Low Frequency
Thermal Protection
Mode
04.025
Symmetrical
Overload detection
Key
Input
terminals
Output
terminals
mm.ppp
mm.ppp
Read-write (RW)
parameter
Read-only (RO)
parameter
10.008
10.009
10.039
04.019
10.017
Rated Load
Reached
Current Limit
Active
Braking Resistor
Thermal
Accumulator
Motor
Protection
Accumulator
Motor
Overload
Alarm
The parameters are all shown in their default settings
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
123
Safety
information
Product
information
Mechanical
installation
Electrical
installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
Optimization
parameters
motor
NV Media
Card
Range (Ú)
Parameter
Advanced
Technical data
parameters
Diagnostics
Default (Ö)
OL
RFC-A
OL
UL Listing
Type
RFC-A
04.001
Current Magnitude
±VM_DRIVE_CURRENT A
RO
Num
ND
NC
PT
FI
04.002
Torque Producing Current
±VM_DRIVE_CURRENT A
RO
Num
ND
NC
PT
FI
04.003
Final Torque Reference
±VM_TORQUE_CURRENT %
RO
Num
ND
NC
PT
FI
04.004
Final Current Reference
±VM_TORQUE_CURRENT %
RO
Num
ND
NC
PT
04.005
Motoring Current Limit
±VM_MOTOR1_CURRENT_LIMIT %
165.0 %
175.0 %
RW
Num
RA
04.006
Regenerating Current Limit
±VM_MOTOR1_CURRENT_LIMIT %
165.0 %
175.0 %
RW
Num
RA
04.007
Symmetrical Current Limit
±VM_MOTOR1_CURRENT_LIMIT %
165.0 %
175.0 %
RW
Num
RA
04.008
Torque Reference
RW
Num
±VM_USER_CURRENT %
0 to 1
0.0 %
US
US
US
04.011
Torque Mode Selector
0
RW
Num
US
04.013
Current Controller Kp Gain
0.00 to 4000.00
20.00
RW
Num
US
04.014
Current Controller Ki Gain
0.000 to 600.000
40.000
RW
Num
US
04.015
Motor Thermal Time Constant 1
1 to 3000 s
179 s
RW
Num
US
04.016
Thermal Protection Mode
0 (0) to 3 (3)
0 (0)
RW
Bin
04.017
Magnetising Current
±VM_DRIVE_CURRENT A
RO
Num
ND
NC
PT
04.018
Final Current Limit
±VM_TORQUE_CURRENT %
RO
Num
ND
NC
PT
04.019
Motor Protection Accumulator
0.0 to 100.0 %
RO
Num
ND
NC
PT
04.020
Percentage Load
±VM_USER_CURRENT %
RO
Num
ND
NC
PT
04.022
Inertia Compensation Enable
Off (0)
RW
Bit
04.024
User Current Maximum Scaling
175.0 %
RW
Num
04.025
Low Frequency Thermal Protection Mode
RW
Num
04.026
Percentage Torque
RO
Num
04.036
Motor Protection Accumulator Power-up Value
04.041
User Over Current Trip Level
RO
Read only
ND
NC
Not copied
124
Off (0) or On (1)
±VM_TORQUE_CURRENT_UNIPOLAR %
165.0 %
0 to 1
0
±VM_USER_CURRENT %
RW Read / Write
No default value
0 to 5
FI
US
Pr.dn (0), 0 (1), rEAL t (2)
Pr.dn (0)
RW
Txt
0 to 100 %
100 %
RW
Num
Num Number parameter
PT
Protected parameter
US
FI
PS
FI
US
RA
US
US
ND
NC
PT
FI
US
RA
US
Bit
Bit parameter
Txt
Text string
Bin
Binary parameter
FI
Filtered
RA
Rating dependent
US
User save
PS
Power-down save
DE
Destination
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
Safety
information
10.5
Product
information
Mechanical
installation
Electrical
installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
Optimization
parameters
motor
NV Media
Card
Advanced
Technical data
parameters
Diagnostics
UL Listing
Menu 5: Motor control
Figure 10-8
Menu 5 Open-loop logic diagram
05.014 Control Mode
Autotune
L1 L2 L3
05.012
DC Bus
Voltage
Motormap
Post Ramp
Reference
02.001
+
05.006
Motor Rated
Frequency
05.007
Motor Rated
Current
05.008
Motor Rated
Speed
05.009
Motor Rated
Voltage
05.010
Motor Rated
Power Factor
05.011
Number Of
Motor Poles*
05.013
05.015
Dynamic V To F
Select
Low Frequency
Voltage Boost
05.005
Stator
Resistance
05.024
Output
Voltage
Transient
Inductance
05.002
05.001
Output
Frequency
+
Enable
Slip
Compensation
05.004
Output
05.003
Power (kW)
05.027
Motor
RPM
√3xVxI
Volt
Hertz
Maximum
05.018 Switching
Frequency
High Stability
05.019 Space Vector
Modulation
Over Modulation
05.020 Enable
Auto Switching
05.035 Frequency
Change Disable
Slip
compensation
Torque
Producing
Current
Percentage
Load
Current
Magnitude
04.002
04.020
Voltage
05.031 Controller
Gain
04.001
Key
Input
terminals
Output
terminals
mm.ppp
Read-write (RW)
parameter
mm.ppp
Read-only (RO)
parameter
04.017
Magnetising
Current
The parameters are all shown in their default settings
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
125
Safety
information
Figure 10-9
Product
information
Mechanical
installation
Electrical
installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
Optimization
parameters
motor
NV Media
Card
Advanced
Technical data
parameters
Diagnostics
UL Listing
Menu 5 RFC-A, logic diagram
Output
Frequency
05.001
Flux Calculator
Motor Rated
Current
Number Of
05.011 Motor Poles*
05.017
Stator
Resistance
05.024
Transient
Inductance
RFC-A
Estimated
frequency
∫
03.002
05.006
Motor Rated
Frequency
05.008
Motor Rated
Speed
Position
05.010
Motor Rated
Voltage
Motor Rated
Power Factor
05.025
Stator
Inductance
05.029
Saturation
Break-Point 1
05.030
Saturation
Break-Point 3
05.062
Saturation
Break-Point 2
05.063
Saturation
Break-Point 4
05.009
Flux angle
Reference
frame
transformation
Flux
Magnitude
Current
References
Current control
Menu 4
Current limits
Overload detection
Current loop gains
Torque reference
Frequency
controller 03.004
output
Current
feedback
05.012
Autotune
05.015
Low frequency Voltage Boost
05.026
High Dynamic Performance Enable
05.031
Voltage Controller Gain
Key
Input
terminals
Output
terminals
mm.ppp
Read-write (RW)
parameter
mm.ppp
Read-only (RO)
parameter
The parameters are all shown in their default settings
126
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
Safety
information
Product
information
Mechanical
installation
Electrical
installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
Optimization
parameters
motor
NV Media
Card
Advanced
Technical data
parameters
Diagnostics
UL Listing
DC Bus
Voltage
05.005
Voltage reference
U
Modulator
05.018
Maximum Switching
V
Frequency
05.035
Auto Switching
Frequency Change
Disable
W
Flux Controller
05.009 Motor Rated
Voltage
RFC-A
Output
05.002 Voltage
Output
Power
Flux Optimization
05.013 Select
Power Calculation (V x I)
05.003
Current
Magnitude
04.002
Magnetising
Current
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
04.001
04.017
127
Safety
information
Product
information
Mechanical
installation
Electrical
installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
Optimization
parameters
motor
NV Media
Card
Range (Ú)
Parameter
Advanced
Technical data
parameters
Diagnostics
Default (Ö)
OL
RFC-A
OL
UL Listing
Type
RFC-A
05.001
Output Frequency
±VM_SPEED_FREQ_REF Hz
RO
Num
ND NC
PT
FI
05.002
Output Voltage
±VM_AC_VOLTAGE V
RO
Num
ND NC
PT
FI
05.003
Output Power
±VM_POWER kW
RO
Num
ND NC
PT
FI
05.004
Motor Rpm
±80000 rpm
RO
Num
ND NC
PT
FI
05.005
D.C. Bus Voltage
±VM_DC_VOLTAGE V
RO
Num
ND NC
PT
05.006
Motor Rated Frequency
RW
Num
RA
05.007
Motor Rated Current
±VM_RATED_CURRENT A
RA
05.008
Motor Rated Speed
0.0 to 80000.0 rpm
05.009
Motor Rated Voltage
±VM_AC_VOLTAGE_SET V
05.010
Motor Rated Power Factor
05.011
Number Of Motor Poles*
05.012
Autotune
05.013
Dynamic V To F Select / Flux Optimization Select
0.00 to VM_SPEED_FREQ_REF_UNIPOLAR Hz
05.015
Low Frequency Voltage Boost
05.017
Stator Resistance
50 Hz: 1450.0 rpm
60 Hz: 1750.0 rpm
110 V drive: 230 V, 200 V drive: 230 V
400 V drive 50Hz: 400 V
400 V drive 60Hz: 460 V
575 V drive: 575 V
690 V drive: 690 V
RW
Num
RW
Num
US
RW
Num
RA
US
RA
US
US
0.00 to 1.00
0.85
RW
Num
Auto (0)
RW
Num
0
RW
Num
0
RW
Num
US
RW
Txt
US
0 to 3
0 to 1
Ur.S (0), Ur (1),
Fd (2), Ur.Auto (3),
Ur.I (4), SrE (5)
Control Mode
Maximum Heavy Duty Rating (11.032)
50 Hz: 1500.0 rpm
60 Hz: 1800.0 rpm
FI
US
Auto (0) to 32 (16)
0 to 2
05.014
50 Hz: 50.00 Hz, 60 Hz: 60.00 Hz
Ur.I (4)
US
NC
0.0 to 50.0 %
3.0 %
RW
Num
0.0000 to 99.9999 Ω
0.0000 Ω
RW
Num
RA
US
3 (3) kHz
RW
Txt
RA
US
0.667 (0), 1 (1), 2 (2),
3 (3), 4 (4), 6 (5), 8 (6),
12 (7), 16 (8) kHz
2 (2), 3 (3), 4 (4), 6 (5),
8 (6), 12 (7), 16 (8) kHz
US
05.018
Maximum Switching Frequency
05.019
High Stability Space Vector Modulation
Off (0) or On (1)
Off (0)
RW
Bit
05.020
Over Modulation Enable
Off (0) or On (1)
Off (0)
RW
Bit
05.024
Transient Inductance
0.000 to 500.000 mH
0.000 mH
RW
Num
RA
US
05.025
Stator Inductance
0.00 to 5000.00 mH
0.00 mH
RW
Num
RA
US
05.026
High Dynamic Performance Enable
RW
Bit
US
05.027
Enable Slip Compensation
RW
Num
US
05.028
Flux Control Compensation Disable
RW
Bit
US
05.029
Saturation Breakpoint 1
0.0 to 100.0 %
50.0 %
RW
Num
US
05.030
Saturation Breakpoint 3
0.0 to 100.0 %
75.0 %
RW
Num
US
05.031
Voltage Controller Gain
RW
Num
US
05.032
Torque Per Amp
05.033
Slip Compensation Limit
05.034
Percentage Flux
05.035
Auto-switching Frequency Change Disable
05.036
Slip Compensation Filter
64 (0), 128 (1), 256 (2),
512 (3) ms
05.037
Switching Frequency
0.667 (0), 1 (1), 2 (2),
3 (3), 4 (4), 6 (5), 8 (6),
12 (7), 16 (8) kHz
05.040
Spin Start Boost
05.042
Reverse Output Phase Sequence
05.059
Maximum Deadtime Compensation
05.060
05.061
05.062
Saturation Breakpoint 2
0.0 to 100.0 %
05.063
Saturation Breakpoint 4
0.0 to 100.0 %
05.074
Boost End Voltage
0.0 to 100.0 %
05.075
Boost End Frequency
05.076
Off (0) or On (1)
±150.0 %
Off (0)
100.0 %
Off (0) or On (1)
Off (0)
1 to 30
1
0.00 to 500.00 Nm/A
0.00 to 10.00 Hz
5.00 Hz
0.0 to 150.0 %
0 to 2
0
128 (1) ms
2 (2), 3 (3), 4 (4), 6 (5),
8 (6), 12 (7), 16 (8) kHz
US
US
RO
Num
RW
Num
ND NC
PT
RO
Num
ND NC
PT
RW
Num
US
RW
Txt
US
RO
Txt
US
ND NC
PT
0.0 to 10.0
1.0
RW
Num
Off (0) or On (1)
Off (0)
RW
Bit
0.000 to 10.000 µs
0.000 µs
RO
Num
NC
PT
US
Current At Maximum Deadtime Compensation
0.00 to 100.00 %
0.00 %
RO
Num
NC
PT
US
Disable Deadtime Compensation
Off (0) or On (1)
Off (0)
RW
Bit
US
0.0 %
RW
Num
US
0.0 %
RW
Num
US
50.0 %
RW
Num
US
0.0 to 100.0 %
50.0 %
RW
Num
US
Second Point Voltage
0.0 to 100.0 %
55.0 %
RW
Num
US
05.077
Second Point Frequency
0.0 to 100.0 %
55.0 %
RW
Num
US
05.078
Third point voltage
0.0 to 100.0 %
75.0 %
RW
Num
US
05.079
Third point frequency
0.0 to 100.0 %
75.0 %
RW
Num
US
05.080
Low acoustic noise enable
Off (0) or On (1)
Off (0)
RW
Bit
US
05.081
Change to maximum drive switching frequency
at low output current
05.082
Motor Rated Power
05.083
Voltage Shelving Disable
Off (0) or On (1)
Off (0)
RW
Bit
US
05.084
Low Frequency Slip Boost
0.0 to 100.0 %
0.0 %
RW
Num
US
Off (0) or On (1)
Off (0)
RW
Bit
±VM_POWER kW
0.00 kW
RW
Num
US
US
US
RA
* If this parameter is read via serial communications, it will show pole pairs.
RW Read / Write
RO
Read only
ND
NC
Not copied
128
No default value
Num Number parameter
PT
Protected parameter
Bit
Bit parameter
Txt
Text string
Bin
Binary parameter
FI
Filtered
RA
Rating dependent
US
User save
PS
Power-down save
DE
Destination
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
Safety
information
10.6
Product
information
Mechanical
installation
Electrical
installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
Optimization
parameters
motor
NV Media
Card
Advanced
Technical data
parameters
Diagnostics
UL Listing
Menu 6: Sequencer and clock
Figure 10-10
Menu 6 logic diagram
Control word
Enable
06.043
0
Control Word
06.042
Drive Enable
06.015
0
Run Forward
1
T11 digital 2
Sequencer
06.030
T12 digital 3
Menu 8
06.001
Stop Mode
06.003
Supply Loss Mode
Jog Forward
06.031
1
06.008
Hold Zero Frequency
Run Reverse
06.032
0
06.009
Catch A
Spinning Motor
Forward / Reverse
06.033
0
06.040
Enable Sequencer
Latching
Run
06.034
0
Jog Reverse
06.037
0
Not Stop
06.039
0
T13 digital input 4
01.011 Reference On
01.012 Reverse Select
0
Hardware
06.029
Enable
01.013 Jog Select
Forward Limit Switch 06.035
0
Reverse Limit Switch 06.036
0
RUN
Inverter enable
RESET
STOP/
RESET
RFC only
Menu 2
Auxiliary
Logic 1
0
01.049
1
Pr 01.049 = 4
Reference
Selected
Indicator
Ramp enable
Open loop only
06.006 Injection
Braking Level
Menu 3
Hard Frequency
reference enable
06.007 Injection
Braking Time
06.012
Enable Stop
Key
Clock control
06.024 Reset Energy Meter
06.019
06.016 Date
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
06.017 Time
Day Of
06.018 Week
06.020 Date Format
Output
Date/Time
Selector
Set
Po.up
Run
Acc.po
AI
Re.PAD
Slot.1
Output
Power 05.003
06.023
Time Before Filter
Change Due
06.028
Running Cost
06.025
06.026
Energy Meter
06.021 Time Between Filter
Changes
Filter Change
06.022 Required / Change
Done
Energy Cost
06.027
Per kWh
Key
Input
terminals
Output
terminals
mm.ppp
Read-write (RW)
parameter
mm.ppp
Read-only (RO)
parameter
The parameters are all shown in their default settings
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
129
Safety
information
Product
information
Mechanical
installation
Electrical
installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
Optimization
parameters
motor
NV Media
Card
Range (Ú)
Parameter
OL
Advanced
Technical data
parameters
Diagnostics
Default(Ö)
RFC-A
OL
UL Listing
Type
RFC-A
CoASt (0), rP (1), rP.dc I (2), dc I (3), td.dc I (4),
diS (5), No.rP (6)
rP (1)
RW
Txt
US
StoP (0), rP (1)
rP (1)
RW
Txt
US
RW
Txt
US
RW
Num
06.001
Stop Mode
06.002
Limit Switch Stop Mode
06.003
Supply Loss Mode
diS (0), rP.StoP (1), ridE.th (2), Lt.StoP (3)
diS (0)
06.004
Start/Stop Logic Select
0 to 6
50 Hz: 0, 60 Hz: 4
06.006
Injection Braking Level
0.0 to 150.0 %
100.0 %
RW
Num
06.007
Injection Braking Time
0.0 to 25.0 s
1.0 s
RW
Num
06.008
Hold Zero Frequency
Off (0) or On (1)
Off (0)
RW
Bit
US
06.009
Catch A Spinning Motor
diS (0), EnAbLE (1), Fr.OnLy (2), rv.OnLy (3)
diS (0)
RW
Txt
US
US
RA
US
US
06.010
Enable Conditions
0 to 4087
RO
Bin
ND
NC
PT
06.011
Sequencer State Machine Inputs
0 to 127
RO
Bin
ND
NC
PT
06.012
Enable Stop Key
06.013
Enable Auxiliary Key
06.014
Disable Auto Reset On Enable
06.015
Drive Enable
06.016
Date
06.017
Time
06.018
Day Of Week
06.019
Date/Time Selector
06.020
Date Format
06.021
Time Between Filter Changes
06.022
Filter Change Required /Change Done
Off (0) or On (1)
RW
Bit
ND
NC
06.023
Time Before Filter Change Due
0 to 30000 Hours
RO
Num
ND
NC
PT
PS
06.024
Reset Energy Meter
Off (0) or On (1)
RW
Bit
06.025
Energy Meter: MWh
±999.9 MWh
RO
Num
ND
NC
PT
PS
06.026
Energy Meter: kWh
±99.99 kWh
RO
Num
ND
NC
PT
06.027
Energy Cost Per kWh
0.0 to 600.0
0.0
RW
Num
06.028
Running Cost
RO
Num
06.029
Hardware Enable
Off (0) or On (1)
On (1)
RO
Bit
06.030
Run Forward
Off (0) or On (1)
Off (0)
RW
Bit
NC
06.031
Jog Forward
Off (0) or On (1)
Off (0)
RW
Bit
NC
06.032
Run Reverse
Off (0) or On (1)
Off (0)
RW
Bit
NC
06.033
Forward/Reverse
Off (0) or On (1)
Off (0)
RW
Bit
NC
06.034
Run
Off (0) or On (1)
Off (0)
RW
Bit
NC
06.035
Forward Limit Switch
Off (0) or On (1)
Off (0)
RW
Bit
NC
06.036
Reverse Limit Switch
Off (0) or On (1)
Off (0)
RW
Bit
NC
06.037
Jog Reverse
Off (0) or On (1)
Off (0)
RW
Bit
NC
06.038
User Enable
Off (0) or On (1)
Off (0)
RW
Bit
NC
06.039
Not Stop
Off (0) or On (1)
Off (0)
RW
Bit
NC
06.040
Enable Sequencer Latching
Off (0) or On (1)
Off (0)
RW
Bit
06.041
Drive Event Flags
0 to 3
0
RW
Bin
06.042
Control Word
0 to 32767
0
RW
Bin
NC
06.043
Control Word Enable
0 to 1
0
RW
Num
NC
06.045
Cooling Fan control
0 to 5
2
RW
Num
US
06.046
Supply Loss Hold Disable
Off (0) or On (1)
Off (0)
RW
Bit
US
06.047
Input Phase Loss Detection Mode
FuLL (0), rIPPLE (1), diS (2)
FuLL (0)
RW
Txt
US
0 to VM_SUPPLY_LOSS_LEVEL V
110 V drive: 205 V, 200 V drive: 205 V
400 V drive: 410 V, 575 V drive: 540 V
690 V drive: 540 V
RW
Num
RA
Off (0) or On (1)
Off (0)
RW
Bit
NC
0 to 100 %
0%
RW
Num
Off (0) or On (1)
Off (0)
RW
Bit
diS (0), Fd.rv (1), rEv (2)
diS (0)
RW
Txt
US
US
Off (0) or On (1)
Off (0)
RW
Bit
US
Off (0) or On (1)
On (1)
RW
Bit
00-00-00 to 31-12-99
RW
Date
US
00:00:00 to 23:59:59
RW
Time
ND
NC
PT
Sun (0), Non (1), tuE (2), UEd (3),thu (4),
Fri (5), SAt (6)
RO
Txt
ND
NC
PT
ND
NC
PT
SEt (0), Po.uP (1), run (2), Acc.Po (3), AI (4),
rE.PAd (5), SLot.1 (6)
Po.uP (1)
RW
Txt
Std (0), US (1)
Std (0)
RW
Txt
US
0 to 30000 Hours
0 Hours
RW
Num
US
Off (0)
±32000
US
PS
US
ND
NC
PT
NC
US
NC
US
06.048
Supply Loss Detection Level
US
06.051
Allow Motoring Load
06.052
Motor Pre-heat Current Magnitude
06.059
Output Phase Loss Detection Enable
Off (0) or On (1)
Off (0)
RW
Bit
US
06.060
Standby Mode Enable
Off (0) or On (1)
Off (0)
RW
Bit
US
06.061
Standby Mode Mask
06.071
Slow Rectifier Charge Rate Enable
06.073
US
0 to 15
0
RW
Bin
US
Off (0) or On (1)
Off (0)
RW
Bit
US
Braking IGBT Lower Threshold
0 to VM_DC_VOLTAGE_SET V
110 V drive: 390 V, 200 V drive: 390 V
400 V drive: 780 V, 575 V drive: 930 V
690 V drive: 1120 V
RW
Num
US
06.074
Braking IGBT Upper Threshold
0 to VM_DC_VOLTAGE_SET V
110 V drive: 390 V, 200 V drive: 390 V
400 V drive: 780 V, 575 V drive: 930 V
690 V drive: 1120 V
RW
Num
US
06.075
Low Voltage Braking IGBT Threshold
0 to VM_DC_VOLTAGE_SET V
0V
RW
Num
US
06.076
Low Voltage Braking IGBT Threshold Select
Off (0) or On (1)
Off (0)
RW
Bit
06.077
Low DC Link Operation
Off (0)
RW
Bit
06.089
DC Injection Active
RO
Bit
Off (0) or On (1)
RW Read / Write
RO
Read only
ND
NC
Not copied
130
No default value
Off (0)
Off (0) or On (1)
Num Number parameter
PT
Protected parameter
US
NC
PT
US
Bit
Bit parameter
Txt
Text string
Bin
Binary parameter
FI
Filtered
RA
Rating dependent
US
User save
PS
Power-down save
DE
Destination
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
Safety
information
10.7
Product
information
Mechanical
installation
Electrical
installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
Optimization
parameters
motor
NV Media
Card
Advanced
Technical data
parameters
Diagnostics
UL Listing
Menu 7: Analog I/O
Figure 10-11
Menu 7 logic diagram
Analog Input 1
At Maximum
Reference
Analog Input 1
Maximum
Reference 07.063
07.064
Analog Input
1 Control
Analog
Input 1 Current
Loop Loss
Analog
Input 1
07.028
07.001
Analog Input 1
V/f
Analog Input 1
Destination B
Analog Input
1 Offset
07.090
07.030
07.010
+
07.007
≥1
Any
unprotected
variable
parameter
Analog Input 1
Destination A
+
??.???
07.008
Analog Input
1 Mode
Analog Input
1 Minimum 07.061
Reference
Analog
Input 1
Scaling
Analog
Ref. 1
01.036
??.???
x(-1)
07.009 Analog
Input 1 Invert
07.062
Analog Input 1
At Minimum Reference
Analog Input
2 Control
Analog Input 2
At Maximum
Reference
Analog Input 2
Maximum
Reference 07.067
07.051
Analog
Input 2
07.068
07.002
Analog Input 2
V/f
07.011
Analog Input 2
Destination B
Analog Input
2 Offset
07.094
07.031
07.014
+
≥1
Any
unprotected
variable
parameter
Analog Input 2
Destination A
+
??.???
07.012
Analog
Input 2
Scaling
Analog Input
2 Mode
Analog Input 2
Minimum 07.065
Reference
07.052
Analog
Ref. 2
01.037
??.???
x(-1)
07.013 Analog
Input 2 Invert
07.066
Analog Input 2
At Minimum Reference
Analog Output
1 Control
Analog Output
1 Source B
07.099
Analog Output
1 Source A
07.055
≥1
07.019
Any variable
parameter
OL>
RFC-A> 02.001
Post-ramp
reference
Analog Output 1
??.??
07.020
??.??
Analog
Output 1
Scaling
Key
Input
terminals
Output
terminals
mm.ppp
Read-write (RW)
parameter
mm.ppp
Read-only (RO)
parameter
The parameters are all shown in their default settings
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
131
Safety
information
Product
information
Mechanical
installation
Electrical
installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
Optimization
parameters
motor
NV Media
Card
Range (Ú)
Parameter
OL
Advanced
Technical data
parameters
Diagnostics
Default (Ö)
RFC-A
OL
UL Listing
Type
RFC-A
07.001
Analog Input 1 (T2)
±100.00 %
RO
Num
ND
NC
PT
FI
07.002
Analog Input 2 (T5)
0.00 to 100.00 %
RO
Num
ND
NC
PT
FI
07.004
Stack Temperature
±250 °C
RO
Num
ND
NC
PT
07.005
Auxiliary Temperature
±250 °C
RO
Num
ND
NC
PT
RW
Txt
4-20.S (-6), 20-4.S (-5), 4-20.L (-4),
20-4.L (-3), 4-20.H (-2), 20-4.H (-1),
0-20 (0), 20-0 (1), 4-20.tr (2), 20-4.tr (3), 4-20
(4), 20-4 (5), VoLt (6)
07.007
Analog Input 1 Mode (T2)
07.008
Analog Input 1 Scaling (T2)
0.000 to 10.000
1.000
RW
Num
US
07.009
Analog Input 1 Invert (T2)
Off (0) or On (1)
Off (0)
RW
Bit
US
07.010
Analog Input 1 Destination A (T2)
0.000 to 30.999
1.036
RW
Num
07.011
Analog Input 2 Mode (T5)
VoLt (6), dIg (7)
VoLt (6)
RW
Txt
07.012
Analog Input 2 Scaling (T5)
0.000 to 10.000
1.000
RW
Num
US
07.013
Analog Input 2 Invert (T5)
Off (0) or On (1)
Off (0)
RW
Bit
US
07.014
Analog Input 2 Destination A (T5)
0.000 to 30.999
1.037
RW
Num
07.019
Analog Output 1 Source A (T7)
0.000 to 30.999
2.001
RW
Num
07.020
Analog Output 1 Scaling (T7)
0.000 to 40.000
1.000
RW
Num
07.026
Analog Input 1 Preset on Current Loss (T2)
4.00 to 20.00
4.00
RW
Num
07.028
Analog Input 1 Current Loop Loss (T2)
RO
Bit
07.030
Analog Input 1 Offset (T2)
±100.00 %
0.00 %
RW
Num
07.031
Analog Input 2 Offset (T5)
±100.00 %
0.00 %
RW
Num
07.034
Inverter Temperature
±250 °C
RO
Num
ND
NC
PT
07.035
Percentage Of d.c. Link Thermal Trip Level
0 to 100 %
RO
Num
ND
NC
PT
07.036
Percentage Of Drive Thermal Trip Level
0 to 100 %
RO
Num
ND
NC
PT
07.037
Temperature Nearest To Trip Level
0 to 29999
RO
Num
ND
NC
PT
07.046
Thermistor Type
d44081 (0)
RW
Txt
07.047
Thermistor Feedback
0 to 4000 Ω
RO
Num
07.048
Thermistor Trip Threshold
0 to 4000 Ω
3300 Ω
RW
Num
07.049
Thermistor Reset Threshold
0 to 4000 Ω
1800 Ω
RW
Num
07.050
Thermistor Temperature
RO
Num
07.051
Analog Input 1 Control (T2)
RW
Num
07.052
Analog Input 2 Control (T5)
0 to 5
0
RW
Num
US
07.055
Analog Output 1 Control (T7)
0 to 15
0
RW
Num
US
07.061
Analog Input 1 Minimum Reference (T2)
0.00 to 100.00 %
0.00 %
RW
Num
US
07.062
Analog Input 1 At Minimum Reference (T2)
±100.00 %
0.00 %
RW
Num
US
07.063
Analog Input 1 Maximum Reference (T2)
0.00 to 100.00 %
100.00 %
RW
Num
US
07.064
Analog Input 1 At Maximum Reference (T2)
±100.00 %
100.00 %
RW
Num
US
07.065
Analog Input 2 Minimum Reference (T5)
0.00 to 100.00 %
0.00 %
RW
Num
US
07.066
Analog Input 2 At Minimum Reference (T5)
07.067
Analog Input 2 Maximum Reference (T5)
07.068
Analog Input 2 At Maximum Reference (T5)
07.090
Analog Input 1 Destination B (T2)
07.094
07.099
Off (0) or On (1)
d44081 (0), 84 (1), Pt1000 (2),
Pt2000 (3),othEr (4)
-50 to 300 °C
0 to 5
0
US
DE
PT
US
US
DE
PT
US
PT
US
US
US
ND
NC
PT
US
US
US
ND
NC
PT
FI
US
US
ND
NC
PT
FI
US
±100.00 %
0.00 %
RW
Num
US
0.00 to 100.00 %
100.00 %
RW
Num
US
±100.00 %
100.00 %
RW
Num
0.000 to 30.999
RO
Num
DE
PT
US
Analog Input 2 Destination B (T5)
0.000 to 30.999
RO
Num
DE
PT
US
Analog Output 1 Source B (T7)
0.000 to 30.999
RO
Num
PT
US
RW Read / Write
RO
Read only
ND
NC
Not copied
132
VoLt (6)
No default value
Num Number parameter
PT
Protected parameter
US
Bit
Bit parameter
Txt
Text string
Bin
Binary parameter
FI
Filtered
RA
Rating dependent
US
User save
PS
Power-down save
DE
Destination
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
Safety
information
Product
information
Mechanical
installation
Electrical
installation
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
Optimization
parameters
motor
NV Media
Card
Advanced
Technical data
parameters
Diagnostics
UL Listing
133
Safety
information
10.8
Product
information
Mechanical
installation
Electrical
installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
Optimization
parameters
motor
NV Media
Card
Advanced
Technical data
parameters
Diagnostics
UL Listing
Menu 8: Digital I/O
Figure 10-12
Menu 8 logic diagram
T10 DI1 Control
T10 DO1 Control
08.081
08.091
T10 DI/O 01 Source
/ Destination B
08.121
T10 Digital I/O 1
≥1 source / destination A
08.021
T10 Digital I/O
1 State
08.001
T10 Digital I/O
01 Output Select
At Zero
Frequency
??.???
10.003
08.031
??.???
x(-1)
Any bit
parameter
T10 Digital I/O 1
0 or 1
08.011
T10 Digital
I/O 1 Invert
Any
unprotected
bit parameter
2 or 3
??.???
Frequency or
PWM output
x(-1)
??.???
T11 DI 2 Control
08.082
T11 Digital
input 2 invert
T11 Digital
input 2 state 08.002
08.012
08.122
T11 DI 02
Destination B
08.022
T11 Digital Input 02
Destination A
≥1
Any unprotected
bit parameter
T11 Digital input 2
??.???
06.038
x(-1)
User
enable
??.???
Key
Input
terminals
Output
terminals
mm.ppp
Read-write (RW)
parameter
mm.ppp
Read-only (RO)
parameter
The parameters are all shown in their default settings
134
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
Safety
information
Product
information
Mechanical
installation
Electrical
installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
Optimization
parameters
motor
NV Media
Card
Advanced
Technical data
parameters
Diagnostics
UL Listing
T12 DI3 Control
08.083
T12 DI 03
Destination B
08.123
≥1
T12 Digital
Input 3 State
T12 Digital input
3 destination A
08.023
T12 Digital
Input 3 Invert
08.003
Any unprotected
bit parameter
08.013
T12 Digital Input 3
??.???
Run forward
06.030
x(-1)
??.???
T13 DI4 Control
08.084
T13 DI 04
Destination B
08.124
≥1
T13 Digital
Input 4 State
08.024
T13 Digital
Input 4 Invert
08.004
T13 Digital input
4 destination A
Any unprotected
bit parameter
08.014
T13 Digital Input 4
??.???
Run reverse
06.032
x(-1)
??.???
T14 DI5 Control
08.085
T14 DI 05
Destination B
08.125
≥1
T14 Digital
Input 5 Select
08.035
T14 Digital Input 5
T14 Digital
Input 5 State
T14 Digital
Input 5 Invert
08.005
08.015
0
1
x(-1)
1 to 3
T14 Digital input
5 destination A
08.025
Any unprotected
bit parameter
Reference
??.???
Select Flag 1
01.041
??.???
Thermistor mode
Frequency
input
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
135
Safety
information
Product
information
Figure 10-13
Mechanical
installation
Electrical
installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
Optimization
parameters
motor
NV Media
Card
Advanced
Technical data
parameters
Diagnostics
UL Listing
Menu 8 logic (cont)
Relay 1
control
08.098
Relay 1
Invert
08.018
08.128
Relay 1
source B
08.028
Relay 1 Output
Source A
Any bit
parameter
Relay 1
Output State
??.???
Drive OK
10.001
08.008
??.???
x(-1)
0V
Figure 10-14
Menu 8 logic (cont)
Keypad Run
Button State
Keypad Run
Keypad Run Button
Button Destination
Invert/Toggle
08.041
08.051
Any
unprotected
bit parameter
08.061
??.???
0
Run button
1
00.000
2
??.???
x(-1)
Toggle
Keypad Auxiliary
Button State
Keypad Auxiliary
Button Invert/Toggle
Keypad
Auxiliary Button
Destination
08.052
08.062
08.042
Auxiliary Button*
Any
unprotected
bit parameter
??.???
0
00.000
1
2
??.???
x(-1)
Key
Toggle
X
X
Input
terminals
X
X
Output
terminals
mm.ppp
Read-write (RW)
parameter
mm.ppp
Read-only (RO)
parameter
The parameters are all shown in their default settings
* The auxiliary button will be available with the future remote keypad.
136
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
Safety
information
Product
information
Mechanical
installation
Electrical
installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
Optimization
parameters
motor
NV Media
Card
Range (Ú)
Parameter
OL
Advanced
Technical data
parameters
Diagnostics
Default (Ö)
RFC-A
OL
UL Listing
Type
RFC-A
08.001
Digital I/O 1 State (T10)
Off (0) or On (1)
RO
Bit
ND
NC
PT
08.002
Digital Input 2 State (T11)
Off (0) or On (1)
RO
Bit
ND
NC
PT
08.003
Digital Input 3 State (T12)
Off (0) or On (1)
RO
Bit
ND
NC
PT
08.004
Digital Input 4 State (T13)
Off (0) or On (1)
RO
Bit
ND
NC
PT
08.005
Digital Input 5 State (T14)
Off (0) or On (1)
RO
Bit
ND
NC
PT
08.008
Relay 1 Output State
Off (0) or On (1)
RO
Bit
ND
NC
PT
08.011
Digital I/O 1 Invert (T10)
Not.Inv (0), InvErt (1)
Not.Inv (0)
RW
Txt
08.012
Digital Input 2 Invert (T11)
Not.Inv (0), InvErt (1)
Not.Inv (0)
RW
Txt
US
08.013
Digital Input 3 Invert (T12)
Not.Inv (0), InvErt (1)
Not.Inv (0)
RW
Txt
US
08.014
Digital Input 4 Invert (T13)
Not.Inv (0), InvErt (1)
Not.Inv (0)
RW
Txt
US
08.015
Digital Input 5 Invert (T14)
Not.Inv (0), InvErt (1)
Not.Inv (0)
RW
Txt
US
08.018
Relay 1 Invert
Not.Inv (0), InvErt (1)
Not.Inv (0)
RW
Txt
US
08.020
Digital I/O Read Word
RO
Num
ND
08.021
Digital IO1 Source / Destination A (T10)
0.000 to 30.999
10.003
RW
Num
DE
PT
08.022
Digital Input 02 Destination A (T11)
0.000 to 30.999
50 Hz: 6.038
60 Hz: 6.039
RW
Num
DE
PT
US
08.023
Digital Input 03 Destination A (T12)
0.000 to 30.999
6.030
RW
Num
DE
PT
US
08.024
Digital Input 04 Destination A (T13)
0.000 to 30.999
6.032
RW
Num
DE
PT
US
08.025
Digital Input 05 Destination A (T14)
0.000 to 30.999
1.041
RW
Num
DE
PT
US
08.028
Relay 1 Output Source A
0.000 to 30.999
10.001
RW
Num
PT
US
08.031
Digital I/O 01 Output Select (T10)
InPut (0), OutPut (1), Fr (2), PuLSE (3)
OutPut (1)
RW
Txt
08.035
Digital Input 5 Select (T14)
InPut (0), th.Sct (1), th (2), th.Notr (3), Fr (4)
InPut (0)
RW
Txt
08.041
Keypad Run Button State
Off (0) or On (1)
RO
Bit
ND
NC
PT
08.042
Keypad Auxiliary Button State
Off (0) or On (1)
RO
Bit
ND
NC
PT
08.043
24 V Supply Input State
Off (0) or On (1)
RO
Bit
ND
NC
PT
08.051
Keypad Run Button Invert / Toggle
Not.Inv (0), InvErt (1), toggLE (2)
Not.Inv (0)
RW
Txt
US
08.052
Keypad Auxiliary Button Invert / Toggle
Not.Inv (0), InvErt (1), toggLE (2)
Not.Inv (0)
RW
Txt
US
08.053
24 V Supply Input Invert
Not.Inv (0), InvErt (1),
Not.Inv (0)
RW
Txt
08.061
Keypad Run Button Destination
0.000 to 30.999
0.000
RW
Num
DE
PT
US
08.062
Keypad Auxiliary Button Destination
0.000 to 30.999
0.000
RW
Num
DE
PT
US
08.063
24 V Supply Input Destination
0.000 to 30.999
0.000
RW
Num
DE
PT
US
08.081
DI1 Control (T10)
0 to 26
0
RW
Num
US
08.082
DI2 Control (T11)
0 to 26
0
RW
Num
US
08.083
DI3 Control (T12)
0 to 26
0
RW
Num
US
08.084
DI4 Control (T13)
0 to 26
0
RW
Num
US
08.085
DI5 Control (T14)
0 to 26
0
RW
Num
US
08.091
DO1 Control (T10)
0 to 21
0
RW
Num
US
08.098
Relay 1 Control
0 to 21
0
RW
Num
US
08.121
DI/O 01 Source / Destination B (T10)
0.000 to 30.999
RO
Num
DE
PT
US
08.122
DI 02 Destination B (T11)
0.000 to 30.999
RO
Num
DE
PT
US
08.123
DI 03 Destination B (T12)
0.000 to 30.999
RO
Num
DE
PT
US
08.124
DI 04 Destination B (T13)
0.000 to 30.999
RO
Num
DE
PT
US
08.125
DI 05 Destination B (T14)
0.000 to 30.999
RO
Num
DE
PT
US
08.128
Relay 01 Source B
0.000 to 30.999
RW
Num
PT
US
0 to 2048
RW
Read / Write
RO
Read only
ND
No default value
NC
Not copied
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
Num Number parameter
PT
Protected parameter
0.000
US
NC
PT
US
US
US
US
Bit
Bit parameter
Txt
Text string
Bin
Binary parameter
FI
Filtered
RA
Rating dependent
US
User save
PS
Power-down save
DE
Destination
137
Safety
information
10.9
Product
information
Mechanical
installation
Electrical
installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
Optimization
parameters
motor
NV Media
Card
Advanced
Technical data
parameters
Diagnostics
UL Listing
Menu 9: Programmable logic, motorized pot, binary sum and timers
Figure 10-15
Menu 9 logic diagram: Programmable logic
Any bit
parameter
Logic Function 1
09.005
Source 1 Invert
??.???
??.???
Logic Function
1 Output
Logic Function 1
Output Invert
x(-1)
09.001
Logic Function
1 Destination
09.010
09.008
09.004 Logic Function 1
Source 1
Any bit
parameter
Logic Function 1
09.007
Source 2 Invert
??.???
09.009
Logic Function
1 Delay
x(-1)
??.???
??.???
Logic Function
1 Source 2
Logic Function 2
09.015
Source 1 Invert
??.???
Logic Function
2 Output
??.???
x(-1)
09.014
Any bit
parameter
09.002
Logic Function 2
Output Invert 09.018
Logic Function
2 Destination
09.020
Logic Function 2
Source 1
Logic Function 2
09.017
Source 2 Invert
Any
unprotected
bit
parameter
??.???
09.019
Logic Function
2 Delay
x(-1)
??.???
??.???
??.???
x(-1)
09.006
Any bit
parameter
Any
unprotected
bit
parameter
??.???
x(-1)
Key
09.016 Logic Function 2
Source 2
X
X
X
Input
terminals
X
Output
terminals
mm.ppp
Read-write (RW)
parameter
mm.ppp
Read-only (RO)
parameter
The parameters are all shown in their default settings
138
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
Safety
information
Product
information
Figure 10-16
Mechanical
installation
Electrical
installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
Optimization
parameters
motor
NV Media
Card
Advanced
Technical data
parameters
Diagnostics
UL Listing
Menu 9 logic diagram: Motorized pot and binary sum
Motorized
Pot. Bipolar
Select
Motorized
Pot. Rate
Motorized Pot.
Output
09.022
09.023
Motorized Pot.
Destination
09.003
09.025
Motorized Pot.
Up
Any
unprotected
variable
parameter
09.026
??.???
M
09.024
Motorized Pot.
Scaling
09.027
Function disabled if set
to a non valid destination
Motorized Pot.
Down
09.028
09.021
Motorized Pot.
Reset
Motorized Pot.
Mode
Binary Sum
Offset
Binary Sum
Output
09.034
09.029
Binary Sum
Destination
09.032
09.033
Any
unprotected
bit
parameter
Binary Sum
Ones
??.???
+
09.030
Binary Sum
Twos
??.???
Σ
+
??.???
Function disabled if set
to a non valid destination
09.031
Key
Binary Sum
Fours
X
X
Input
terminals
X
X
Output
terminals
mm.ppp
Read-write (RW)
parameter
mm.ppp
Read-only (RO)
parameter
The parameters are all shown in their default settings
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
139
Safety
information
Product
information
Figure 10-17
Mechanical
installation
Electrical
installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
Optimization
parameters
motor
NV Media
Card
Advanced
Technical data
parameters
Diagnostics
UL Listing
Menu 9 logic diagram: Timers
Timer 1
Output
Timer 1
Invert
09.035
Timer 1 Start Date
Timer 1
Enable
09.036
Timer 1 Start Time
09.040
09.037
Timer 1 Stop Date
09.043
09.041
Any
unprotected
bit
parameter
??.???
09.038 Timer 1 Stop Time
09.039
09.042
Timer 1
Destination
x(-1)
??.???
Timer disabled if set
to a non valid destination
Timer 1 Repeat
Function
Timer 2
Output
Timer 2
Invert
09.045
Timer 2 Start Date
Timer 2
Enable
09.046
Timer 2 Start Time
09.050
09.047
Timer 2 Stop Date
09.048
Timer 2 Stop Time
09.049
Timer 2 Repeat
Function
09.051
09.052
Timer 2
Destination
09.053
Any
unprotected
bit
parameter
??.???
x(-1)
??.???
Timer disabled if set
to a non valid destination
Key
X
X
Input
terminals
X
X
Output
terminals
mm.ppp
Read-write (RW)
parameter
mm.ppp
Read-only (RO)
parameter
The parameters are all shown in their default settings
140
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
Safety
information
Product
information
Mechanical
installation
Electrical
installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
Optimization
parameters
motor
NV Media
Card
Range(Ú)
Parameter
OL
Advanced
Technical data
parameters
Default(Ö)
RFC-A
OL
Diagnostics
UL Listing
Type
RFC-A
09.001
Logic Function 1 Output
Off (0) or On (1)
RO
Bit
ND
NC
09.002
Logic Function 2 Output
Off (0) or On (1)
RO
Bit
ND
NC
PT
09.003
Motorized Pot Output
±100.00 %
RO
Num
ND
NC
PT
PS
09.004
Logic Function 1 Source 1
0.000 to 30.999
0.000
RW
Num
PT
US
09.005
Logic Function 1 Source 1 Invert
Off (0) or On (1)
Off (0)
RW
Bit
09.006
Logic Function 1 Source 2
0.000 to 30.999
0.000
RW
Num
PT
US
09.007
Logic Function 1 Source 2 Invert
Off (0) or On (1)
Off (0)
RW
Bit
09.008
Logic Function 1 Output Invert
Off (0) or On (1)
Off (0)
RW
Bit
US
09.009
Logic Function 1 Delay
±25.0 s
0.0 s
RW
Num
US
09.010
Logic Function 1 Destination
0.000 to 30.999
0.000
RW
Num
09.014
Logic Function 2 Source 1
0.000 to 30.999
0.000
RW
Num
09.015
Logic Function 2 Source 1 Invert
Off (0) or On (1)
Off (0)
RW
Bit
09.016
Logic Function 2 Source 2
0.000 to 30.999
0.000
RW
Num
09.017
Logic Function 2 Source 2 Invert
Off (0) or On (1)
Off (0)
RW
Bit
09.018
Logic Function 2 Output Invert
Off (0) or On (1)
Off (0)
RW
Bit
US
09.019
Logic Function 2 Delay
±25.0 s
0.0 s
RW
Num
US
09.020
Logic Function 2 Destination
0.000 to 30.999
0.000
RW
Num
09.021
Motorized Pot Mode
0 to 4
0
RW
Num
09.022
Motorized Pot Bipolar Select
Off (0) or On (1)
Off (0)
RW
Bit
US
09.023
Motorized Pot Rate
0 to 250 s
20 s
RW
Num
US
09.024
Motorized Pot Scaling
0.000 to 4.000
1.000
RW
Num
09.025
Motorized Pot Destination
0.000 to 30.999
0.000
RW
Num
09.026
Motorized Pot Up
Off (0) or On (1)
Off (0)
RW
Bit
NC
09.027
Motorized Pot Down
Off (0) or On (1)
Off (0)
RW
Bit
NC
09.028
Motorized Pot Reset
Off (0) or On (1)
Off (0)
RW
Bit
NC
09.029
Binary Sum Ones
Off (0) or On (1)
Off (0)
RW
Bit
09.030
Binary Sum Twos
Off (0) or On (1)
Off (0)
RW
Bit
09.031
Binary Sum Fours
Off (0) or On (1)
Off (0)
RW
Bit
09.032
Binary Sum Output
RO
Num
ND
09.033
Binary Sum Destination
0.000 to 30.999
0.000
RW
Num
DE
09.034
Binary Sum Offset
0 to 248
0
RW
Num
US
09.035
Timer 1 Start Date
00-00-00 to 31-12-99
00-00-00
RW
Date
US
09.036
Timer 1 Start Time
00:00:00 to 23:59:59
00:00:00
RW
Time
US
09.037
Timer 1 Stop Date
00-00-00 to 31-12-99
00-00-00
RW
Date
US
09.038
Timer 1 Stop Time
09.039
Timer 1 Repeat Function
09.040
09.041
0 to 255
PT
US
US
DE
PT
US
PT
US
PT
US
US
US
DE
PT
US
US
US
DE
PT
NC
US
PT
PT
US
00:00:00 to 23:59:59
00:00:00
RW
Time
US
NonE (0), 1 (1), 2 (2), 3 (3),
4 (4), 5 (5), 6 (6), 7 (7)
NonE (0)
RW
Txt
US
Timer 1 Enable
Off (0) or On (1)
Off (0)
RW
Bit
US
Timer 1 Invert
Off (0) or On (1)
Off (0)
RW
Bit
09.042
Timer 1 Output
Off (0) or On (1)
RO
Bit
ND
09.043
Timer 1 Destination
0.000 to 30.999
0.000
RW
Num
DE
09.045
Timer 2 Start Date
00-00-00 to 31-12-99
00-00-00
RW
Date
09.046
Timer 2 Start Time
00:00:00 to 23:59:59
00:00:00
RW
Time
US
09.047
Timer 2 Stop Date
00-00-00 to 31-12-99
00-00-00
RW
Date
US
09.048
Timer 2 Stop Time
US
NC
PT
PT
US
US
00:00:00 to 23:59:59
00:00:00
RW
Time
US
NonE (0), 1 (1), 2 (2), 3 (3), 4 (4),
5 (5), 6 (6), 7 (7)
09.049
Timer 2 Repeat Function
NonE (0)
RW
Txt
US
09.050
Timer 2 Enable
Off (0) or On (1)
Off (0)
RW
Bit
US
09.051
Timer 2 Invert
Off (0) or On (1)
Off (0)
RW
Bit
09.052
Timer 2 Output
Off (0) or On (1)
RO
Bit
ND
09.053
Timer 2 Destination
0.000 to 30.999
RW
Num
DE
RW
Read / Write
RO
Read only
Num
ND
No default value
NC
Not copied
PT
IP
IP address
Mac
Mac address
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
Date
0.000
US
NC
PT
PT
US
Number parameter
Bit
Bit parameter
Txt
Text string
Bin
Binary parameter
FI
Filtered
Protected parameter
RA
Rating dependent
US
User save
PS
Power-down save
DE
Destination
Slot,menu,parameter
Chr
Character parameter
Ver
Version number
Date parameter
Time
Time parameter
SMP
141
Safety
information
10.10
Product
information
Mechanical
installation
Electrical
installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
Optimization
parameters
motor
NV Media
Card
Advanced
Technical data
parameters
Diagnostics
UL Listing
Menu 10: Status and trips
Parameter
Range (Ú)
OL
Default (Ö)
RFC-A
OL
Type
RFC-A
10.001
Drive OK
Off (0) or On (1)
RO
Bit
ND
NC
PT
10.002
Drive Active
Off (0) or On (1)
RO
Bit
ND
NC
PT
10.003
Zero Frequency
Off (0) or On (1)
RO
Bit
ND
NC
PT
10.004
Running At Or Below Minimum Frequency
Off (0) or On (1)
RO
Bit
ND
NC
PT
10.005
Below Set Frequency
Off (0) or On (1)
RO
Bit
ND
NC
PT
10.006
At Frequency
Off (0) or On (1)
RO
Bit
ND
NC
PT
10.007
Above Set Frequency
Off (0) or On (1)
RO
Bit
ND
NC
PT
10.008
Rated Load Reached
Off (0) or On (1)
RO
Bit
ND
NC
PT
10.009
Current Limit Active
Off (0) or On (1)
RO
Bit
ND
NC
PT
10.010
Regenerating
Off (0) or On (1)
RO
Bit
ND
NC
PT
10.011
Braking IGBT Active
Off (0) or On (1)
RO
Bit
ND
NC
PT
10.012
Braking Resistor Alarm
Off (0) or On (1)
RO
Bit
ND
NC
PT
10.013
Reverse Direction Commanded
Off (0) or On (1)
RO
Bit
ND
NC
PT
10.014
Reverse Direction Running
Off (0) or On (1)
RO
Bit
ND
NC
PT
10.015
Supply Loss
Off (0) or On (1)
RO
Bit
ND
NC
PT
10.016
Under Voltage Active
Off (0) or On (1)
RO
Bit
ND
NC
PT
10.017
Motor Overload Alarm
Off (0) or On (1)
RO
Bit
ND
NC
PT
10.018
Drive Over-temperature Alarm
Off (0) or On (1)
RO
Bit
ND
NC
PT
10.019
Drive Warning
Off (0) or On (1)
RO
Bit
ND
NC
PT
10.020
Trip 0
0 to 255
RO
Txt
ND
NC
PT
PS
10.021
Trip 1
0 to 255
RO
Txt
ND
NC
PT
PS
10.022
Trip 2
0 to 255
RO
Txt
ND
NC
PT
PS
10.023
Trip 3
0 to 255
RO
Txt
ND
NC
PT
PS
10.024
Trip 4
0 to 255
RO
Txt
ND
NC
PT
PS
10.025
Trip 5
0 to 255
RO
Txt
ND
NC
PT
PS
10.026
Trip 6
0 to 255
RO
Txt
ND
NC
PT
PS
10.027
Trip 7
0 to 255
RO
Txt
ND
NC
PT
PS
10.028
Trip 8
0 to 255
RO
Txt
ND
NC
PT
PS
10.029
Trip 9
0 to 255
RO
Txt
ND
NC
PT
10.030
Braking Resistor Rated Power
0.0 to 99999.9 kW
0.0 kW
RW
Num
10.031
Braking Resistor Thermal Time Constant
0.00 to 1500.00 s
0.00 s
RW
Num
10.032
External Trip
Off (0) or On (1)
Off (0)
RW
Bit
NC
10.033
Drive Reset
Off (0) or On (1)
Off (0)
RW
Bit
NC
10.034
Number Of Auto-reset Attempts
NonE (0), 1 (1), 2 (2), 3 (3), 4 (4),
5 (5),inF (6)
NonE (0)
RW
Txt
10.035
Auto-reset Delay
10.036
Auto-reset Hold Drive OK
10.037
10.038
10.039
Braking Resistor Thermal Accumulator
10.040
Status Word
10.041
PS
US
US
US
0.0 to 600.0 s
1.0 s
RW
Num
US
Off (0) or On (1)
Off (0)
RW
Bit
US
Action On Trip Detection
0 to 31
0
RW
Num
User Trip
0 to 255
RW
Num
ND
NC
0.0 to 100.0 %
RO
Num
ND
NC
0 to 32767
RO
Num
ND
NC
PT
Trip 0 Date
00-00-00 to 31-12-99
RO
Date
ND
NC
PT
10.042
Trip 0 Time
00:00:00 to 23:59:59
RO
Time
ND
NC
PT
PS
10.043
Trip 1 Date
00-00-00 to 31-12-99
RO
Date
ND
NC
PT
PS
10.044
Trip 1 Time
00:00:00 to 23:59:59
RO
Time
ND
NC
PT
PS
10.045
Trip 2 Date
00-00-00 to 31-12-99
RO
Date
ND
NC
PT
PS
10.046
Trip 2 Time
00:00:00 to 23:59:59
RO
Time
ND
NC
PT
PS
10.047
Trip 3 Date
00-00-00 to 31-12-99
RO
Date
ND
NC
PT
PS
10.048
Trip 3 Time
00:00:00 to 23:59:59
RO
Time
ND
NC
PT
PS
10.049
Trip 4 Date
00-00-00 to 31-12-99
RO
Date
ND
NC
PT
PS
10.050
Trip 4 Time
00:00:00 to 23:59:59
RO
Time
ND
NC
PT
PS
10.051
Trip 5 Date
00-00-00 to 31-12-99
RO
Date
ND
NC
PT
PS
10.052
Trip 5 Time
00:00:00 to 23:59:59
RO
Time
ND
NC
PT
PS
10.053
Trip 6 Date
00-00-00 to 31-12-99
RO
Date
ND
NC
PT
PS
10.054
Trip 6 Time
00:00:00 to 23:59:59
RO
Time
ND
NC
PT
PS
10.055
Trip 7 Date
00-00-00 to 31-12-99
RO
Date
ND
NC
PT
PS
10.056
Trip 7 Time
00:00:00 to 23:59:59
RO
Time
ND
NC
PT
PS
10.057
Trip 8 Date
00-00-00 to 31-12-99
RO
Date
ND
NC
PT
PS
10.058
Trip 8 Time
00:00:00 to 23:59:59
RO
Time
ND
NC
PT
PS
10.059
Trip 9 Date
00-00-00 to 31-12-99
RO
Date
ND
NC
PT
PS
10.060
Trip 9 Time
00:00:00 to 23:59:59
ND
NC
PT
10.061
Braking Resistor Resistance
0.00 to 10000.00 Ω
10.064
Remote Keypad Battery Low
10.065
Autotune Active
10.066
Limit Switch Active
142
US
PT
RO
Time
RW
Num
Off (0) or On (1)
RO
Bit
ND
NC
PT
Off (0) or On (1)
RO
Bit
ND
NC
PT
Off (0) or On (1)
RO
Bit
ND
NC
PT
0.00 Ω
PS
PS
US
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
Safety
information
Product
information
Mechanical
installation
Electrical
installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
Optimization
parameters
motor
NV Media
Card
Range (Ú)
Parameter
OL
Advanced
Technical data
parameters
Diagnostics
Default (Ö)
RFC-A
OL
UL Listing
Type
RFC-A
10.069
Additional Status Bits
0 to 65535
RO
Num
ND
NC
PT
10.070
Trip 0 Sub-trip Number
0 to 65535
RO
Num
ND
NC
PT
PS
10.071
Trip 1 Sub-trip Number
0 to 65535
RO
Num
ND
NC
PT
PS
10.072
Trip 2 Sub-trip Number
0 to 65535
RO
Num
ND
NC
PT
PS
10.073
Trip 3 Sub-trip Number
0 to 65535
RO
Num
ND
NC
PT
PS
10.074
Trip 4 Sub-trip Number
0 to 65535
RO
Num
ND
NC
PT
PS
10.075
Trip 5 Sub-trip Number
0 to 65535
RO
Num
ND
NC
PT
PS
10.076
Trip 6 Sub-trip Number
0 to 65535
RO
Num
ND
NC
PT
PS
10.077
Trip 7 Sub-trip Number
0 to 65535
RO
Num
ND
NC
PT
PS
10.078
Trip 8 Sub-trip Number
0 to 65535
RO
Num
ND
NC
PT
PS
10.079
Trip 9 Sub-trip Number
0 to 65535
RO
Num
ND
NC
PT
PS
10.080
Stop Motor
Off (0) or On (1)
RO
Bit
ND
NC
PT
10.081
Phase Loss
Off (0) or On (1)
RO
Bit
ND
NC
PT
10.090
Drive Ready
Off (0) or On (1)
RO
Bit
ND
NC
PT
10.101
Drive Status
Inh (0), rdy (1), StoP (2), rES (3), run (4),
S.LoSS (5), rES (6), dc.inJ (7), rES (8),
Error (9), ActivE (10), rES (11), rES (12),
rES (13), HEAt (14), UU (15)
RO
Txt
ND
NC
PT
10.102
Trip Reset Source
0 to 1023
RO
Num
ND
NC
PT
10.103
Trip Time Identifier
-2147483648 to 2147483647 ms
RO
Num
ND
NC
PT
10.104
Active Alarm
NonE (0), br.rES (1), OV.Ld (2), rES (3),
d.OV.Ld (4), tuning (5), LS (6), rES (7),
rES (8), OPt.AL (9), rES (10), rES (11),
rES(12), Lo.AC (13), I.AC.Lt (14)
RO
Txt
ND
NC
PT
10.106
Potential Drive Damage Conditions
0 to 3
RO
Bin
ND
NC
PT
10.107
Low AC Alarm
Off (0) or On (1)
RO
Bit
ND
NC
PT
10.108
Reversed cooling fan detected
Off (0) or On (1)
RO
Bit
ND
RW
Read / Write
RO
Read only
Num
ND
No default value
NC
Not copied
PT
IP
IP address
Mac
Mac address
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
Date
PS
PS
PT
Number parameter
Bit
Bit parameter
Txt
Text string
Bin
Binary parameter
FI
Filtered
Protected parameter
RA
Rating dependent
US
User save
PS
Power-down save
DE
Destination
Slot,menu,parameter
Chr
Character parameter
Ver
Version number
Date parameter
Time
Time parameter
SMP
143
Safety
information
10.11
Product
information
Mechanical
installation
Electrical
installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
Optimization
parameters
motor
NV Media
Card
Advanced
Technical data
parameters
Diagnostics
UL Listing
Menu 11: General drive set-up
Range (Ú)
Parameter
Default (Ö)
OL
RFC-A
OL
Type
RFC-A
11.018
Status Mode Parameter 1
0.000 to 30.999
2.001
RW
Num
PT
US
11.019
Status Mode Parameter 2
0.000 to 30.999
4.020
RW
Num
PT
US
11.020
Reset Serial Communications
Off (0) or On (1)
RW
Bit
11.021
Customer Defined Scaling
0.000 to 10.000
1.000
RW
Num
11.022
Parameter Displayed At Power-up
0.000 to 0.080
0.010
RW
Num
PT
US
11.023
Serial Address
ND
NC
US
1 to 247
1
RW
Num
US
8.2NP (0), 8.1NP (1), 8.1EP (2),
8.1OP (3), 8.2NP E (4), 8.1NP E (5),
8.1EP E (6), 8.1OP E (7), 7.1EP (8),
7.1OP (9), 7.1EP E (10), 7.1OP E (11)
8.2NP (0)
RW
Txt
US
300 (0), 600 (1), 1200 (2), 2400 (3), 4800 (4),
9600 (5), 19200 (6), 38400 (7), 57600 (8),
76800 (9), 115200 (10)
19200 (6)
RW
Txt
US
US
11.024
Serial Mode
11.025
Serial Baud Rate
11.026
Minimum Comms Transmit Delay
0 to 250 ms
2 ms
RW
Num
11.027
Silent Period
0 to 250 ms
0 ms
RW
Num
11.028
Drive Derivative
0 to 255
RO
Num
11.029
Software Version
00.00.00 to 99.99.99
RO
Ver
ND
NC
PT
11.030
User Security Code
0 to 9999
RW
Num
ND
NC
PT
US
11.031
User Drive Mode
OPEn.LP (1), rFC-A (2)
RW
Txt
ND
NC
PT
US
11.032
Maximum Heavy Duty Rating
0.00 to 9999.99 A
RO
Num
ND
NC
PT
11.033
Drive Rated Voltage
110V (0), 200V (1), 400V (2),
575V (3), 690V (4)
RO
Txt
ND
NC
PT
11.034
Drive Configuration
AV (0), AI (1), AV.Pr (2), AI.Pr (3),
PrESEt (4), PAd (5), PAd.rEF (6), E.Pot (7),
torque (8), Pid (9)
AV (0)
RW
Txt
11.035
Power Software Version
RO
Ver
11.036
NV Media Card File Previously Loaded
0 to 999
0
RO
Num
11.037
NV Media Card File Number
0 to 999
0
RW
Num
11.038
NV Media Card File Type
11.039
NV Media Card File Version
11.042
Parameter Cloning
11.043
Load Defaults
11.044
User Security Status
11.045
00.00.00 to 99.99.99
US
ND
NC
PT
PT
ND
NC
PT
NC
PT
NonE (0), OPEn.LP (1), rFC-A (2)
RO
Txt
ND
NC
PT
0 to 9999
RO
Num
ND
NC
PT
RW
Txt
NonE (0), rEAd (1), Prog (2),
Auto (3), boot (4)
NonE (0)
NC
US
NonE (0), Std (1), US (2)
NonE (0)
RW
Txt
LEVEL.0 (0), ALL (1), r.onLy.0 (2), r.onLy.A (3),
StAtUS (4), no.Acc (5)
LEVEL.0 (0)
RW
Txt
Select Motor 2 Parameters
1 (0), 2 (1)
1 (0)
RW
Txt
11.046
Defaults Previously Loaded
0 to 2000
RO
Num
ND
NC
PT
11.052
Serial Number LS
0 to 999999
RO
Num
ND
NC
PT
11.053
Serial Number MS
0 to 999999
RO
Num
ND
NC
PT
11.054
Drive Date Code
0 to 9999
RO
Num
ND
NC
PT
11.060
Maximum Rated Current
0.000 to 999.999 A
RO
Num
ND
NC
PT
11.061
Full Scale Current Kc
0.000 to 999.999 A
RO
Num
ND
NC
PT
11.063
Product Type
0 to 255
RO
Num
ND
NC
PT
11.064
Product Identifier Characters
200 (1295134768) to (2147483647)
RO
Chr
ND
NC
PT
11.065
Frame size and voltage code
0 to 999
RO
Num
ND
NC
PT
11.066
Power Stage Identifier
0 to 255
RO
Num
ND
NC
PT
11.067
Control Board Identifier
0 to 255
RO
Num
ND
NC
PT
11.068
Drive current rating
0 to 32767
RO
Num
ND
NC
PT
11.070
Core Parameter Database Version
0.00 to 99.99
RO
Num
ND
NC
PT
11.072
NV Media Card Create Special File
0 to 1
RW
Num
11.073
NV Media Card Type
NonE (0), rES (1), Sd.CArd (2)
RO
Num
ND
NC
PT
11.075
NV Media Card Read-only Flag
Off (0) or On (1)
RO
Bit
ND
NC
PT
11.076
NV Media Card Warning Suppression Flag
Off (0) or On (1)
RO
Bit
ND
NC
PT
11.077
NV Media Card File Required Version
0 to 9999
RW
Num
ND
NC
PT
0
US
NC
ND
PT
US
US
NC
11.079
Drive Name Characters 1-4
(-2147483648) to
(-2147483647)
- - - - (757935405)
RW
Chr
PT
US
11.080
Drive Name Characters 5-8
(-2147483648) to
(-2147483647)
- - - - (757935405)
RW
Chr
PT
US
11.081
Drive Name Characters 9-12
(-2147483648) to
(-2147483647)
- - - - (757935405)
RW
Chr
PT
US
11.082
Drive Name Characters 13-16
(-2147483648) to
(-2147483647)
- - - - (757935405)
RW
Chr
PT
US
11.084
Drive Mode
OPEn.LP (1), rFC-A (2)
RO
Txt
ND
NC
PT
11.085
Security Status
NonE (0), r.onLy.A (1), StAtUS (2), no.Acc (3)
RO
Txt
ND
NC
PT
PS
11.086
Menu Access Status
LEVEL.0 (0), ALL (1)
RO
Txt
ND
NC
PT
PS
11.091
Additional Identifier Characters 1
(-2147483648) to (2147483647)
RO
Chr
ND
NC
PT
11.092
Additional Identifier Characters 2
(-2147483648) to (2147483647)
RO
Chr
ND
NC
PT
11.093
Additional Identifier Characters 3
(-2147483648) to (2147483647)
RO
Chr
ND
NC
11.094
Disable String Mode
RW
Bit
RO
Txt
11.097
Off (0) or On (1)
NonE (0), Sd.CArd (1), rS-485 (2),
boot (3), rS-485 (4)
AI ID Code
RW
Read / Write
RO
Read only
Num
ND
No default value
NC
Not copied
PT
IP
IP address
Mac
Mac address
144
Off (0)
Date
PT
PT
ND
NC
US
PT
Number parameter
Bit
Bit parameter
Txt
Text string
Bin
Binary parameter
FI
Filtered
Protected parameter
RA
Rating dependent
US
User save
PS
Power-down save
DE
Destination
Slot,menu,parameter
Chr
Character parameter
Ver
Version number
Date parameter
Time
Time parameter
SMP
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
Safety
information
Product
information
10.12
Figure 10-18
Mechanical
installation
Electrical
installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
Optimization
parameters
motor
NV Media
Card
Advanced
Technical data
parameters
Diagnostics
UL Listing
Menu 12: Threshold detectors, variable selectors and brake control function
Menu 12 logic diagram
Threshold
Detector 1
Threshold
Detector 1
Output
Threshold
Detector 1
Level
12.004
Any variable
parameter
Threshold
Detector 1
Destination
12.001
Threshold
Detector 1
12.007
??.???
Any
unprotected
bit parameter
??.???
??.???
??.???
x(-1)
12.003
12.005
12.006
Threshold
Detector 1
Source
Threshold
Detector 1
Hysteresis
Threshold
Detector 1
Output Invert
Threshold
Detector 2
Threshold
Detector 2
Output
Threshold
Detector 2
Level
12.024
Any variable
parameter
Threshold
Detector 2
Threshold
Detector 2
Destination
12.002
12.027
??.???
Any
unprotected
bit parameter
??.???
??.???
??.???
x(-1)
12.023
12.025
Threshold
Detector 2
Source
Threshold
Detector 2
Hysteresis
12.026
Threshold
Detector 2
Invert
All parameters are shown
at their default setting
Key
X
X
X
X
Input
terminals
Output
terminals
mm.ppp
Read-write (RW)
parameter
mm.ppp
Read-only (RO)
parameter
The parameters are all shown in their default settings
Hysteresis
Threshold
level
t
Threshold
output
t
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
145
Safety
information
Product
information
Figure 10-19
Mechanical
installation
Electrical
installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
Optimization
parameters
motor
NV Media
Card
Advanced
Technical data
parameters
Diagnostics
UL Listing
Menu 12 logic diagram (continued)
Variable Selector 1
Any variable
parameter
??.???
Variable
Selector 1
Output
Variable Selector 1
Source 1 Scaling
12.013
Variable
Selector 1
Destination
12.011
12.012
??.???
12.008 Variable Selector 1
Source 1
Any variable
parameter
Variable Selector 1
??.???
Source 2 Scaling
12.014
??.???
12.009
Variable Selector 1
Source 2
12.010
Any
unprotected
variable
parameter
??.???
Variable Selector 1
Mode
12.015 Variable Selector 1
Control
??.???
12.016
Variable
Selector 1
Enable
Variable Selector 2
Any variable
parameter
??.???
Variable Selector 2
Source 1 Scaling
12.033
Variable
Selector 2
Enable
Variable
Selector 2
Output
12.036
Variable
Selector 2
Destination
12.032
??.???
12.028 Variable Selector 2
Source 1
Any variable
parameter
Variable Selector 2
??.???
Source 2 Scaling
12.031
Any
unprotected
variable
parameter
12.030 Variable Selector 2
Mode
??.???
12.035 Variable Selector 2
Control
??.???
12.034
Key
??.???
12.029
Variable Selector 2
Source 2
Input
terminals
Output
terminals
mm.ppp
Read-write (RW)
parameter
mm.ppp
Read-only (RO)
parameter
The parameters are all shown in their default settings
146
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
Safety
information
Product
information
Mechanical
installation
Electrical
installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
Optimization
parameters
motor
NV Media
Card
Advanced
Technical data
parameters
Diagnostics
UL Listing
WARNING
The brake control functions are provided to allow well co-ordinated operation of an external brake with the drive. While both hardware and
software are designed to high standards of quality and robustness, they are not intended for use as safety functions, i.e. where a fault or
failure would result in a risk of injury. In any application where the incorrect operation of the brake release mechanism could result in injury,
independent protection devices of proven integrity must also be incorporated.
WARNING
The control terminal relay can be selected as an output to release a brake. If a drive is set up in this manner and a drive replacement takes
place, prior to programming the drive on initial power up, the brake may be released.
When drive terminals are programmed to non default settings the result of incorrect or delayed programming must be considered. The use of
an NV media card in boot mode can ensure drive parameters are immediately programmed to avoid this situation.
Figure 10-20
Brake function
Percentage
flux
+
05.034
_
90%
OL mode
Current
magnitude
RFC-A
Mode
Flux and
Current
Detection
BC Brake Delay
(12.046)
04.001
+
_
BC Lower Current
Threshold (12.043)
Ramp Hold
(02.003)
Latch
Hysteriesis
BC Upper Current Threshold (12.042)
BC Lower Current Threshold (12.043)
Drive Active
Output
Frequency
05.001
12.040
BC Post-brake
Release Delay
(12.047)
OL mode
or RFC-A
mode
Frequency
Detection
10.002
Modulus
Estimated
Frequency
BC Brake
Release
Hold Zero
Frequency
(06.008)
+
_
Latch
03.002
BC Brake Release
Frequency (12.044)
_
BC Brake Apply
Frequency (12.045)
+
01.011
Reference On
BC Brake Apply
Through Zero
Threshold (12.051)
+
_
Key
Input
terminals
Output
terminals
mm.ppp
Read-write (RW)
parameter
mm.ppp
Read-only (RO)
parameter
The parameters are all shown in their default settings
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
147
Safety
information
Product
information
Figure 10-21
Mechanical
installation
Electrical
installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
Optimization
parameters
motor
NV Media
Card
Advanced
Technical data
parameters
Diagnostics
UL Listing
Brake sequence
Pr 12.044 Brake Control:
Brake Release Frequency
Pr 12.045 Brake Control:
Brake Apply Frequency
Pr 05.001 Output Frequency
Pr 12.042 Brake Control:
Upper Current Threshold
Pr 04.001 Current Magnitude
Pr 10.002 Drive Active
Pr 01.011 Reference On
1. Wait for upper current threshold and brake release frequency
2. Pre-brake release delay
3. Post-brake release delay
4. Wait for brake apply frequency
5. Wait for zero frequency
6. 1s delay as phase 2 of stopping sequence (Pr 06.001=1,2 or 3)
Pr 12.040 Brake Control:
Brake Release
Pr 02.003 Ramp Hold
1
2
3
4
5
6
Pr 12.046 Pr 12.047
148
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
Safety
information
Product
information
Mechanical
installation
Electrical
installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
Optimization
parameters
motor
NV Media
Card
Range(Ú)
Parameter
OL
Advanced
Technical data
parameters
Diagnostics
Default(Ö)
RFC-A
OL
UL Listing
Type
RFC-A
12.001
Threshold Detector 1 Output
Off (0) or On (1)
RO
Bit
ND
NC
12.002
Threshold Detector 2 Output
Off (0) or On (1)
RO
Bit
ND
NC
PT
12.003
Threshold Detector 1 Source
0.000 to 30.999
0.000
RW
Num
12.004
Threshold Detector 1 Level
0.00 to 100.00 %
0.00 %
RW
Num
12.005
Threshold Detector 1 Hysteresis
0.00 to 25.00 %
0.00 %
RW
Num
US
12.006
Threshold Detector 1 Output Invert
Off (0) or On (1)
Off (0)
RW
Bit
US
12.007
Threshold Detector 1 Destination
0.000 to 30.999
0.000
RW
Num
PT
US
12.008
Variable Selector 1 Source 1
0.000 to 30.999
0.000
RW
Num
PT
US
12.009
Variable Selector 1 Source 2
PT
US
12.010
Variable Selector 1 Mode
PT
PT
US
US
DE
0.000 to 30.999
0.000
RW
Num
0 (0), 1 (1), 2 (2), 3 (3), 4 (4), 5 (5), 6 (6), 7 (7),
8 (8), 9 (9)
0 (0)
RW
Txt
0.000 to 30.999
0.000
RW
Num
DE
RO
Num
ND
US
12.011
Variable Selector 1 Destination
12.012
Variable Selector 1 Output
12.013
Variable Selector 1 Source 1 Scaling
±4.000
1.000
RW
Num
US
12.014
Variable Selector 1 Source 2 Scaling
±4.000
1.000
RW
Num
US
12.015
Variable Selector 1 Control
0.00 to 100.00
0.00
RW
Num
US
12.016
Variable Selector 1 Enable
Off (0) or On (1)
On (1)
RW
Bit
US
12.023
Threshold Detector 2 Source
12.024
Threshold Detector 2 Level
12.025
12.026
12.027
Threshold Detector 2 Destination
0.000 to 30.999
0.000
RW
Num
PT
US
12.028
Variable Selector 2 Source 1
0.000 to 30.999
0.000
RW
Num
PT
US
12.029
Variable Selector 2 Source 2
PT
US
12.030
Variable Selector 2 Mode
12.031
Variable Selector 2 Destination
12.032
Variable Selector 2 Output
12.033
Variable Selector 2 Source 1 Scaling
±4.000
12.034
Variable Selector 2 Source 2 Scaling
±4.000
12.035
Variable Selector 2 Control
12.036
Variable Selector 2 Enable
12.040
BC Brake Release
12.041
BC Enable
12.042
±100.00 %
PT
NC
US
PT
0.000 to 30.999
0.000
RW
Num
0.00 to 100.00 %
0.00 %
RW
Num
PT
US
Threshold Detector 2 Hysteresis
0.00 to 25.00 %
0.00 %
RW
Num
US
Threshold Detector 2 Output Invert
Off (0) or On (1)
Off (0)
RW
Bit
US
US
DE
0.000 to 30.999
0.000
RW
Num
0 (0), 1 (1), 2 (2), 3 (3), 4 (4),
5 (5), 6 (6), 7 (7), 8 (8), 9 (9)
0 (0)
RW
Txt
0.000 to 30.999
0.000
RW
Num
DE
RO
Num
ND
1.000
RW
Num
US
1.000
RW
Num
US
0.00 to 100.00
0.00
RW
Num
US
Off (0) or On (1)
On (1)
RW
Bit
US
RO
Bit
diS (0), rELAy (1), dig IO (2), USEr (3)
diS (0)
RW
Txt
BC Upper Current Threshold
0 to 200 %
50 %
RW
Num
US
12.043
BC Lower Current Threshold
0 to 200 %
10 %
RW
Num
US
12.044
BC Brake Release Frequency
0.00 to 20.00 Hz
1.00 Hz
RW
Num
US
12.045
BC Brake Apply Frequency
0.00 to 20.00 Hz
2.00 Hz
RW
Num
US
12.046
BC Brake Delay
0.0 to 25.0 s
1.0 s
RW
Num
US
12.047
BC Post-brake Release Delay
0.0 to 25.0 s
1.0 s
RW
Num
US
12.050
BC Initial Direction
12.051
BC Brake Apply Through Zero Threshold
±100.00 %
Off (0) or On (1)
RW
Read / Write
RO
Read only
ND
No default value
NC
Not copied
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
ND
PT
NC
NC
US
PT
PT
US
rEf (0), For (1), rEv (2)
rEf (0)
RW
Txt
US
0.00 to 25.00 Hz
0.00 Hz
RW
Num
US
Num Number parameter
PT
US
Protected parameter
Bit
Bit parameter
Txt
Text string
Bin
Binary parameter
FI
Filtered
RA
Rating dependent
US
User save
PS
Power-down save
DE
Destination
149
Safety
information
Product
information
10.13
Figure 10-22
Mechanical
installation
Electrical
installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
Optimization
parameters
motor
NV Media
Card
Advanced
Technical data
parameters
Diagnostics
UL Listing
Menu 14: User PID controller
Menu 14 Logic diagram
PID1 Feed-forwards
Reference Source
14.002
Any variable
parameter
PID1 Feed-forwards
Reference
??.???
14.019
??.???
PID1 Reference
Source
14.003
Any variable
parameter
??.???
+
14.005 PID1 Reference
Invert
PID1
Reference
??.???
+
PID1 Error
PID1 Reference Scaling
0
14.020
14.023
14.025
PID1 Digital
Reference
x(-1)
1
+
14.007
PID1 Reference
Slew-Rate
PID1 Feedback
Source
PID1 Feedback
Invert
14.004
14.006
Any variable
parameter
PID1
Feedback
??.???
PID1 Feedback Scaling
+
x(-1)
PID1 Digital
14.026
Feedback
1
Logic 1
Any bit
parameter
1
??.???
0
Logic 1
Any bit
parameter
1
??.???
??.???
0
14.009
PID1 Enable
Source 1
Source
not used
??.???
14.027
PID1 Enable
Source 2
150
0
14.021
14.024
+
??.???
PID1 Enable
14.008
14.022
_
Source
not used
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
Safety
information
Product
information
Mechanical
installation
Electrical
installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
Optimization
parameters
motor
PID1 Integral
Hold
14.017
14.013
PID1 Output
Upper Limit
14.014
PID1 Output
Lower Limit
14.018
PID1 Symmetrical
Limit Enable
14.010
PID1 Proportional
Gain
14.011
PID1 Integral
Gain
NV Media
Card
PID1 Output
14.001
Advanced
Technical data
parameters
Diagnostics
UL Listing
PID1
Destination
14.016
PID1 Output
Scaling
+
??.???
+
14.015
Any
unprotected
variable
parameter
14.012
??.???
PID1 Derivative
Gain
Key
X
X
Input
terminals
X
X
Output
terminals
mm.ppp
Read-write (RW)
parameter
mm.ppp
Read-only (RO)
parameter
The parameters are all shown in their default settings
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
151
Safety
information
Product
information
Mechanical
installation
Electrical
installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
Optimization
parameters
motor
NV Media
Card
Range (Ú)
Parameter
OL
Advanced
Technical data
parameters
Diagnostics
Default (Ö)
RFC-A
OL
Type
RFC-A
±100.00 %
UL Listing
14.001
PID1 Output
RO
Num
14.002
PID1 Feed-forwards
Reference Source
0.000 to 30.999
0.000
RW
Num
ND
NC
PT
PT
US
14.003
PID1 Reference Source
0.000 to 30.999
0.000
RW
Num
PT
US
14.004
PID1 Feedback Source
0.000 to 30.999
0.000
RW
Num
PT
14.005
PID1 Reference Invert
Off (0) or On (1)
Off (0)
RW
Bit
14.006
PID1 Feedback Invert
Off (0) or On (1)
Off (0)
RW
Bit
US
14.007
PID1 Reference Slew Rate
0.0 to 3200.0 s
0.0 s
RW
Num
US
14.008
PID1 Enable
Off (0) or On (1)
Off (0)
RW
Bit
14.009
PID1 Enable Source 1
0.000 to 30.999
0.000
RW
Num
14.010
PID1 Proportional Gain
0.000 to 4.000
1.000
RW
Num
US
14.011
PID1 Integral Gain
0.000 to 4.000
0.500
RW
Num
US
14.012
PID1 Differential Gain
14.013
PID1 Output Upper Limit
14.014
PID1 Output Lower Limit
14.015
PID1 Output Scaling
14.016
PID1 Destination
14.017
US
US
US
PT
US
0.000 to 4.000
0.000
RW
Num
US
0.00 to 100.00 %
100.00 %
RW
Num
US
±100.00 %
-100.00 %
RW
Num
US
0.000 to 4.000
1.000
RW
Num
0.000 to 30.999
0.000
RW
Num
PID1 Integral Hold
Off (0) or On (1)
Off (0)
RW
Bit
14.018
PID1 Symmetrical Limit Enable
Off (0) or On (1)
Off (0)
RW
Bit
14.019
PID1 Feed-forwards Reference
±100.00 %
RO
Num
ND
NC
PT
14.020
PID1 Reference
±100.00 %
RO
Num
ND
NC
PT
14.021
PID1 Feedback
±100.00 %
RO
Num
ND
NC
PT
14.022
PID1 Error
±100.00 %
RO
Num
ND
NC
PT
14.023
PID1 Reference Scaling
0.000 to 4.000
1.000
RW
Num
US
14.024
PID1 Feedback Scaling
0.000 to 4.000
1.000
RW
Num
US
14.025
PID1 Digital Reference
±100.00 %
0.00 %
RW
Num
US
14.026
PID1 Digital Feedback
±100.00 %
0.00 %
RW
Num
14.027
PID1 Enable Source 2
0.000 to 30.999
0.000
RW
Num
RW Read / Write
RO
Read only
ND
NC
Not copied
152
No default value
Num Number parameter
PT
Protected parameter
US
DE
PT
US
US
US
PT
US
Bit
Bit parameter
Txt
Text string
Bin
Binary parameter
FI
Filtered
RA
Rating dependent
US
User save
PS
Power-down save
DE
Destination
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
Safety
information
Product
information
10.14
Mechanical
installation
Electrical
installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
Optimization
parameters
motor
NV Media
Card
Advanced
Technical data
parameters
Diagnostics
UL Listing
Menu 15: Option module set-up
Figure 10-23
Location of option module slot and its corresponding menu number
1
1. Option Module Slot 1 - Menu 15
10.14.1
Parameters common to all categories
Range(Ú)
Parameter
15.001
15.002
15.003
15.004
15.005
15.051
Module ID
Software Version
Hardware Version
Serial Number LS
Serial Number MS
Software Sub-version
0 to 65535
00.00 to 99.99
0.00 to 99.99
0 to 999999
0 to 99
Default(Ö)
Type
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
Num
Num
Num
Num
Num
Num
ND
ND
ND
ND
ND
ND
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
PT
PT
PT
PT
PT
PT
The option module ID indicates the type of module that is installed in the corresponding slot. See the relevant option module user guide for more
information regarding the module.
Option module ID
0
209
443
447
448
Module
No module installed
SI-I/O
SI-PROFIBUS
SI-DeviceNet
SI-CANopen
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
Category
Automation (I/O Expansion)
Fieldbus
Fieldbus
Fieldbus
153
Safety
information
10.15
Product
information
Mechanical
installation
Electrical
installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
Optimization
parameters
motor
NV Media
Card
Advanced
Technical data
parameters
Diagnostics
UL Listing
Menu 18: Application menu 1
Range (Ú)
Parameter
OL
RFC-A
Default(Ö)
OL
Type
RFC-A
18.001
Application Menu 1 Power-down Save Integer
RW
Num
18.002
Application Menu 1 Read-only Integer 2
RO
Num
ND
NC
18.003
Application Menu 1 Read-only Integer 3
RO
Num
ND
NC
18.004
Application Menu 1 Read-only Integer 4
RO
Num
ND
NC
18.005
Application Menu 1 Read-only Integer 5
RO
Num
ND
NC
18.006
Application Menu 1 Read-only Integer 6
RO
Num
ND
NC
18.007
Application Menu 1 Read-only Integer 7
RO
Num
ND
NC
18.008
Application Menu 1 Read-only Integer 8
RO
Num
ND
NC
18.009
Application Menu 1 Read-only Integer 9
RO
Num
ND
NC
18.010
Application Menu 1 Read-only Integer 10
RO
Num
ND
NC
18.011
Application Menu 1 Read-write Integer 11
RW
Num
US
18.012
Application Menu 1 Read-write Integer 12
RW
Num
US
18.013
Application Menu 1 Read-write Integer 13
RW
Num
US
18.014
Application Menu 1 Read-write Integer 14
RW
Num
US
18.015
Application Menu 1 Read-write Integer 15
RW
Num
US
18.016
Application Menu 1 Read-write Integer 16
RW
Num
US
18.017
Application Menu 1 Read-write Integer 17
RW
Num
US
18.018
Application Menu 1 Read-write Integer 18
RW
Num
US
18.019
Application Menu 1 Read-write Integer 19
RW
Num
US
18.020
Application Menu 1 Read-write Integer 20
RW
Num
US
18.021
Application Menu 1 Read-write Integer 21
RW
Num
US
18.022
Application Menu 1 Read-write Integer 22
RW
Num
US
18.023
Application Menu 1 Read-write Integer 23
RW
Num
US
18.024
Application Menu 1 Read-write Integer 24
RW
Num
US
18.025
Application Menu 1 Read-write Integer 25
RW
Num
US
18.026
Application Menu 1 Read-write Integer 26
RW
Num
US
18.027
Application Menu 1 Read-write Integer 27
RW
Num
US
18.028
Application Menu 1 Read-write Integer 28
RW
Num
US
18.029
Application Menu 1 Read-write Integer 29
RW
Num
US
18.030
Application Menu 1 Read-write Integer 30
RW
Num
US
18.031
Application Menu 1 Read-write bit 31
RW
Bit
US
18.032
Application Menu 1 Read-write bit 32
RW
Bit
US
18.033
Application Menu 1 Read-write bit 33
RW
Bit
US
18.034
Application Menu 1 Read-write bit 34
RW
Bit
US
18.035
Application Menu 1 Read-write bit 35
RW
Bit
US
18.036
Application Menu 1 Read-write bit 36
RW
Bit
US
18.037
Application Menu 1 Read-write bit 37
RW
Bit
US
18.038
Application Menu 1 Read-write bit 38
RW
Bit
US
18.039
Application Menu 1 Read-write bit 39
RW
Bit
US
18.040
Application Menu 1 Read-write bit 40
RW
Bit
US
18.041
Application Menu 1 Read-write bit 41
RW
Bit
US
18.042
Application Menu 1 Read-write bit 42
RW
Bit
US
18.043
Application Menu 1 Read-write bit 43
RW
Bit
US
18.044
Application Menu 1 Read-write bit 44
RW
Bit
US
18.045
Application Menu 1 Read-write bit 45
RW
Bit
US
18.046
Application Menu 1 Read-write bit 46
RW
Bit
US
18.047
Application Menu 1 Read-write bit 47
RW
Bit
US
18.048
Application Menu 1 Read-write bit 48
RW
Bit
US
18.049
Application Menu 1 Read-write bit 49
RW
Bit
US
18.050
Application Menu 1 Read-write bit 50
RW
Bit
US
RW Read / Write
RO
Read only
ND
NC
Not copied
154
No default value
0
-32768 to 32767
0
Off (0) or On (1)
Num Number parameter
PT
Protected parameter
Off (0)
PS
Bit
Bit parameter
Txt
Text string
Bin
Binary parameter
FI
Filtered
RA
Rating dependent
US
User save
PS
Power-down save
DE
Destination
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
Safety
information
10.16
Product
information
Mechanical
installation
Electrical
installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
Optimization
parameters
motor
NV Media
Card
Advanced
Technical data
parameters
Diagnostics
UL Listing
Menu 20: Application menu 2
Range (Ú)
Parameter
OL
Default (Ö)
RFC-A
OL
Type
RFC-A
20.021
Application Menu 2 Read-write Long Integer 21
RW
Num
20.022
Application Menu 2 Read-write Long Integer 22
RW
Num
20.023
Application Menu 2 Read-write Long Integer 23
RW
Num
20.024
Application Menu 2 Read write Long Integer 24
RW
Num
20.025
Application Menu 2 Read-write Long Integer 25
20.026
Application Menu 2 Read-write Long Integer 26
-2147483648 to 2147483647
0
RW
Num
RW
Num
20.027
Application Menu 2 Read-write Long Integer 27
RW
Num
20.028
Application Menu 2 Read-write Long Integer 28
RW
Num
20.029
Application Menu 2 Read-write Long Integer 29
RW
Num
20.030
Application Menu 2 Read-write Long Integer 30
RW
Num
RW
Read / Write
RO
Read only
ND
No default value
NC
Not copied
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
Num Number parameter
PT
Protected parameter
Bit
Bit parameter
Txt
Text string
Bin
Binary parameter
FI
Filtered
RA
Rating dependent
US
User save
PS
Power-down save
DE
Destination
155
Safety
information
10.17
Product
information
Mechanical
installation
Electrical
installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
Optimization
parameters
motor
NV Media
Card
Advanced
Technical data
parameters
Diagnostics
UL Listing
Menu 21: Second motor parameters
Range (Ú)
Parameter
Default (Ö)
OL
RFC-A
OL
Type
RFC-A
21.001
M2 Maximum Reference Clamp
±VM_POSITIVE_REF_CLAMP Hz
50Hz: 50.00 Hz
60Hz: 60.00 Hz
RW
Num
US
21.002
M2 Minimum Reference Clamp
±VM_NEGATIVE_REF_CLAMP2
0.00
RW
Num
US
21.003
M2 Reference Selector
A1.A2 (0), A1.Pr (1), A2.Pr (2), PrESEt (3), PAd
(4), rES (5), PAd.rEF (6)
A1.A2 (0)
RW
Txt
US
21.004
M2 Acceleration Rate 1
±VM_ACCEL_RATE
5.0
RW
Num
US
21.005
M2 Deceleration Rate 1
±VM_ACCEL_RATE
10.0
RW
Num
US
21.006
M2 Motor Rated Frequency
0.00 to VM_SPEED_FREQ_REF_UNIPOLAR Hz
50Hz: 50.00 Hz
60Hz: 60.00 Hz
RW
Num
RA
US
21.007
M2 Motor Rated Current
±VM_RATED_CURRENT A
Maximum Heavy Duty Rating (11.032)
RW
Num
RA
US
21.008
M2 Motor Rated Speed
0.0 to 80000.0 rpm
21.009
M2 Motor Rated Voltage
21.010
M2 Motor Rated Power Factor
21.011
M2 Number of Motor Poles*
21.012
50 Hz: 1500.0 rpm
60 Hz: 1800.0 rpm
±VM_AC_VOLTAGE_SET V
50 Hz: 1450.0rpm
60 Hz 1750.0 rpm
RW
Num
110 V drive: 230 V
200 V drive: 230 V
400 V drive 50Hz: 400 V
400 V drive 60Hz: 460 V
575 V drive: 575 V
690 V drive: 690 V
RW
Num
RA
US
RA
US
RA
US
0.00 to 1.00
0.85
RW
Num
Auto (0) to 32 (16)
Auto (0)
RW
Num
M2 Stator Resistance
0.0000 to 99.9999 Ω
0.0000 Ω
RW
Num
21.014
M2 Transient Inductance
0.000 to 500.000 mH
0.000 mH
RW
Num
21.015
Motor 2 Active
RO
Bit
21.016
M2 Motor Thermal Time Constant 1
21.017
M2 Frequency Controller Proportional
Gain Kp1
21.018
M2 Frequency Controller Integral
Gain Ki1
21.019
M2 Frequency Controller Differential
Feedback Gain Kd1
21.022
M2 Current Controller Kp Gain
21.023
M2 Current Controller Ki Gain
21.024
M2 Stator Inductance
21.025
M2 Saturation Breakpoint 1
0.0 to 100.0 %
21.026
M2 Saturation Breakpoint 3
0.0 to 100.0 %
21.027
M2 Motoring Current Limit
21.028
21.029
21.033
M2 Low Frequency Thermal Protection Mode
21.041
M2 Saturation Breakpoint 2
0.0 to 100.0 %
21.042
M2 Saturation Breakpoint 4
0.0 to 100.0 %
Off (0) or On (1)
1 to 3000 s
179 s
US
US
RA
ND
NC
US
PT
179 s
RW
Num
US
0.000 to 200.000 s/rad
0.100 s/rad
RW
Num
US
0.00 to 655.35 s²/rad
0.10 s²/rad
RW
Num
US
0.00000 to
0.65535 1/rad
RW
Num
US
20.00
0.00000 1/rad
RW
Num
US
0.000 to 600.000
40.000
RW
Num
0.00 to 5000.00 mH
0.00 mH
RW
Num
50.0 %
RW
Num
75.0 %
RW
Num
0.00 to 4000.00
US
RA
US
US
US
±VM_MOTOR2_CURRENT_LIMIT %
165.0 %
175.0 %
RW
Num
RA
US
M2 Regenerating Current Limit
±VM_MOTOR2_CURRENT_LIMIT %
165.0 %
175.0 %
RW
Num
RA
US
M2 Symmetrical Current Limit
±VM_MOTOR2_CURRENT_LIMIT %
165.0 %
175.0 %
RW
Num
RA
US
RW
Num
US
0.0 %
RW
Num
US
0.0 %
RW
Num
US
0 to 1
0
* When read via serial communications, this parameter will show pole pairs.
RW Read / Write
RO
Read only
ND
NC
Not copied
156
No default value
Num Number parameter
PT
Protected parameter
Bit
Bit parameter
Txt
Text string
Bin
Binary parameter
FI
Filtered
RA
Rating dependent
US
User save
PS
Power-down save
DE
Destination
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
Safety
information
10.18
Product
information
Mechanical
installation
Electrical
installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
Optimization
parameters
motor
NV Media
Card
Advanced
Technical data
parameters
Diagnostics
UL Listing
Menu 22: Additional Menu 0 set-up
Parameter
Range(Ú)
OL
Default(Ö)
RFC-A
OL
Type
RFC-A
22.001
Parameter 00.001 Set-up
0.000 to 30.999
1.007
RW
Num
PT
22.002
Parameter 00.002 Set-up
0.000 to 30.999
1.006
RW
Num
PT
US
22.003
Parameter 00.003 Set-up
0.000 to 30.999
2.011
RW
Num
PT
US
22.004
Parameter 00.004 Set-up
0.000 to 30.999
2.021
RW
Num
PT
US
22.005
Parameter 00.005 Set-up
0.000 to 30.999
11.034
RW
Num
PT
US
22.006
Parameter 00.006 Set-up
0.000 to 30.999
5.007
RW
Num
PT
US
22.007
Parameter 00.007 Set-up
0.000 to 30.999
5.008
RW
Num
PT
US
22.008
Parameter 00.008 Set-up
0.000 to 30.999
5.009
RW
Num
PT
US
22.009
Parameter 00.009 Set-up
0.000 to 30.999
5.010
RW
Num
PT
US
22.010
Parameter 00.010 Set-up
0.000 to 30.999
11.044
RW
Num
PT
US
22.011
Parameter 00.011 Set-up
0.000 to 30.999
0.000
RW
Num
PT
US
22.012
Parameter 00.012 Set-up
0.000 to 30.999
0.000
RW
Num
PT
US
22.013
Parameter 00.013 Set-up
0.000 to 30.999
0.000
RW
Num
PT
US
22.014
Parameter 00.014 Set-up
0.000 to 30.999
0.000
RW
Num
PT
US
22.015
Parameter 00.015 Set-up
0.000 to 30.999
1.005
RW
Num
PT
US
22.016
Parameter 00.016 Set-up
0.000 to 30.999
7.007
RW
Num
PT
US
22.017
Parameter 00.017 Set-up
0.000 to 30.999
1.010
RW
Num
PT
US
22.018
Parameter 00.018 Set-up
0.000 to 30.999
1.021
RW
Num
PT
US
22.019
Parameter 00.019 Set-up
0.000 to 30.999
0.000
RW
Num
PT
US
22.020
Parameter 00.020 Set-up
0.000 to 30.999
0.000
RW
Num
PT
US
22.021
Parameter 00.021 Set-up
0.000 to 30.999
0.000
RW
Num
PT
US
22.022
Parameter 00.022 Set-up
0.000 to 30.999
0.000
RW
Num
PT
US
22.023
Parameter 00.023 Set-up
0.000 to 30.999
0.000
RW
Num
PT
US
22.024
Parameter 00.024 Set-up
0.000 to 30.999
0.000
RW
Num
PT
US
22.025
Parameter 00.025 Set-up
0.000 to 30.999
11.030
RW
Num
PT
US
22.026
Parameter 00.026 Set-up
0.000 to 30.999
0.000
RW
Num
PT
US
22.027
Parameter 00.027 Set-up
0.000 to 30.999
1.051
RW
Num
PT
US
22.028
Parameter 00.028 Set-up
0.000 to 30.999
2.004
RW
Num
PT
US
22.029
Parameter 00.029 Set-up
0.000 to 30.999
RW
Num
PT
US
22.030
Parameter 00.030 Set-up
0.000 to 30.999
11.042
RW
Num
PT
US
22.031
Parameter 00.031 Set-up
0.000 to 30.999
6.001
RW
Num
PT
US
22.032
Parameter 00.032 Set-up
0.000 to 30.999
5.013
RW
Num
PT
US
22.033
Parameter 00.033 Set-up
0.000 to 30.999
6.009
RW
Num
PT
US
22.034
Parameter 00.034 Set-up
0.000 to 30.999
8.035
RW
Num
PT
US
22.035
Parameter 00.035 Set-up
0.000 to 30.999
8.091
RW
Num
PT
US
22.036
Parameter 00.036 Set-up
0.000 to 30.999
7.055
RW
Num
PT
US
22.037
Parameter 00.037 Set-up
0.000 to 30.999
5.018
RW
Num
PT
US
22.038
Parameter 00.038 Set-up
0.000 to 30.999
5.012
RW
Num
PT
US
22.039
Parameter 00.039 Set-up
0.000 to 30.999
5.006
RW
Num
PT
US
22.040
Parameter 00.040 Set-up
0.000 to 30.999
5.011
RW
Num
PT
US
22.041
Parameter 00.041 Set-up
0.000 to 30.999
5.014
RW
Num
PT
US
22.042
Parameter 00.042 Set-up
0.000 to 30.999
5.015
RW
Num
PT
US
22.043
Parameter 00.043 Set-up
0.000 to 30.999
11.025
RW
Num
PT
US
22.044
Parameter 00.044 Set-up
0.000 to 30.999
11.023
RW
Num
PT
US
22.045
Parameter 00.045 Set-up
0.000 to 30.999
11.020
RW
Num
PT
US
22.046
Parameter 00.046 Set-up
0.000 to 30.999
12.042
RW
Num
PT
US
22.047
Parameter 00.047 Set-up
0.000 to 30.999
12.043
RW
Num
PT
US
22.048
Parameter 00.048 Set-up
0.000 to 30.999
12.044
RW
Num
PT
US
22.049
Parameter 00.049 Set-up
0.000 to 30.999
12.045
RW
Num
PT
US
22.050
Parameter 00.050 Set-up
0.000 to 30.999
12.046
RW
Num
PT
US
22.051
Parameter 00.051 Set-up
0.000 to 30.999
12.047
RW
Num
PT
US
22.052
Parameter 00.052 Set-up
0.000 to 30.999
12.048
RW
Num
PT
US
22.053
Parameter 00.053 Set-up
0.000 to 30.999
12.050
RW
Num
PT
US
22.054
Parameter 00.054 Set-up
0.000 to 30.999
12.051
RW
Num
PT
US
22.055
Parameter 00.055 Set-up
0.000 to 30.999
12.041
RW
Num
PT
US
22.056
Parameter 00.056 Set-up
0.000 to 30.999
0.000
RW
Num
PT
US
22.057
Parameter 00.057 Set-up
0.000 to 30.999
0.000
RW
Num
PT
US
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
0.000
2.002
US
157
Safety
information
Product
information
Mechanical
installation
Electrical
installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
Optimization
parameters
motor
NV Media
Card
Range(Ú)
Parameter
OL
Advanced
Technical data
parameters
Diagnostics
Default(Ö)
RFC-A
OL
UL Listing
Type
RFC-A
22.058
Parameter 00.058 Set-up
0.000 to 30.999
0.000
RW
Num
PT
US
22.059
Parameter 00.059 Set-up
0.000 to 30.999
0.000
RW
Num
PT
US
22.060
Parameter 00.060 Set-up
0.000 to 30.999
0.000
RW
Num
PT
US
22.061
Parameter 00.061 Set-up
0.000 to 30.999
0.000
RW
Num
PT
US
22.062
Parameter 00.062 Set-up
0.000 to 30.999
0.000
RW
Num
PT
US
22.063
Parameter 00.063 Set-up
0.000 to 30.999
0.000
RW
Num
PT
US
22.064
Parameter 00.064 Set-up
0.000 to 30.999
0.000
RW
Num
PT
US
22.065
Parameter 00.065 Set-up
0.000 to 30.999
0.000
3.010
RW
Num
PT
US
22.066
Parameter 00.066 Set-up
0.000 to 30.999
0.000
3.011
RW
Num
PT
US
22.067
Parameter 00.067 Set-up
0.000 to 30.999
0.000
3.079
RW
Num
PT
US
22.068
Parameter 00.068 Set-up
0.000 to 30.999
0.000
0.000
RW
Num
PT
US
22.069
Parameter 00.069 Set-up
0.000 to 30.999
5.040
RW
Num
PT
US
22.070
Parameter 00.070 Set-up
0.000 to 30.999
0.000
RW
Num
PT
US
22.071
Parameter 00.071 Set-up
0.000 to 30.999
0.000
RW
Num
PT
US
22.072
Parameter 00.072 Set-up
0.000 to 30.999
0.000
RW
Num
PT
US
22.073
Parameter 00.073 Set-up
0.000 to 30.999
0.000
RW
Num
PT
US
22.074
Parameter 00.074 Set-up
0.000 to 30.999
0.000
RW
Num
PT
US
22.075
Parameter 00.075 Set-up
0.000 to 30.999
0.000
RW
Num
PT
US
22.076
Parameter 00.076 Set-up
0.000 to 30.999
10.037
RW
Num
PT
US
22.077
Parameter 00.077 Set-up
0.000 to 30.999
11.032
RW
Num
PT
US
22.078
Parameter 00.078 Set-up
0.000 to 30.999
11.029
RW
Num
PT
US
22.079
Parameter 00.079 Set-up
0.000 to 30.999
11.031
RW
Num
PT
US
22.080
Parameter 00.080 Set-up
0.000 to 30.999
11.044
RW
Num
PT
US
RW Read / Write
RO
Read only
ND
NC
Not copied
158
No default value
Num Number parameter
PT
Protected parameter
Bit
Bit parameter
Txt
Text string
Bin
Binary parameter
FI
Filtered
RA
Rating dependent
US
User save
PS
Power-down save
DE
Destination
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
Safety
information
11
Product
information
Mechanical
installation
Electrical
installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
Optimization
parameters
motor
NV Media
Card
Advanced
Technical data Diagnostics
parameters
UL Listing
Technical data
11.1
Drive technical data
11.1.1
Power and current ratings (Derating for switching frequency and temperature)
For a full explanation of ‘Normal Duty’ and ‘Heavy Duty’ refer to section 2.2 Ratings on page 10.
Table 11-1 Maximum permissible continuous output current @ 40 °C (104 °F) ambient (size 1 to 4)
Heavy Duty
Model
Nominal rating
Maximum permissible continuous output current (A) for the following switching frequencies
0.667
kHz
1
kHz
2
kHz
3
kHz
4
kHz
kW
hp
01100017
0.25
0.33
1.7
01100024
0.37
0.5
2.4
02100042
0.75
1.0
4.2
02100056
1.1
1.5
5.6
0.25
0.33
1.7
6
kHz
8
kHz
12
kHz
16
kHz
100 V
200 V
01200017
01200024
0.37
0.5
2.4
01200033
0.55
0.75
3.3
01200042
0.75
1.0
02200024
0.37
0.5
2.4
02200033
0.55
0.75
3.3
02200042
0.75
1.0
02200056
1.1
1.5
5.6
5.6
5.6
5.6
5.6
5.6
5.6
5.6
5.6
02200075
1.5
2.0
7.5
7.5
7.5
7.5
7.5
7.5
7.5
7.5
7.0
03200100
2.2
3.0
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
9
7.3
04200133
3.0
3.0
13.3
04200176
4.0
5.0
17.6
02400013
0.37
0.5
1.3
02400018
0.55
0.75
02400023
0.75
1.0
02400032
1.1
02400041
03400056
4.2
4.2
400 V
1.3
1.3
1.3
1.3
1.3
1.3
1.3
1.8
1.8
1.8
1.8
1.8
1.8
1.8
1.8
2.3
2.3
2.3
2.3
2.3
2.3
2.3
2.0
1.5
3.2
3.2
3.2
3.2
3.2
3.2
3.2
2.0
1.5
2.0
4.1
4.1
4.1
4.1
4.1
4.1
3.8
2.0
2.2
3.0
5.6
5.6
5.6
5.6
5.6
5.6
5.1
3.7
03400073
3.0
3.0
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.1
5.6
3.8
03400094
4.0
5.0
9.4
9.4
9.4
9.4
9.4
8.5
7
4.6
04400135
5.5
7.5
13.5
04400170
7.5
10.0
17
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
2.4
159
Safety
information
Table 11-2
Product
information
Mechanical
installation
Electrical
installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
Optimization
parameters
motor
NV Media
Card
Advanced
Technical data Diagnostics
parameters
Maximum permissible continuous output current @ 40 °C (104 °F) ambient (size 5 to 6)
Normal Duty
Model
UL Listing
Nominal
rating
Heavy Duty
Maximum permissible continuous output current (A) for
the following switching frequencies
0.667, 1
and 2 kHz
3
kHz
4
kHz
6
kHz
8
kHz
12
kHz
16
kHz
Nominal
rating
kW
hp
23.7
5.5
7.5
24.5
7.5
10
32.5
11
15
13.5
11
20
kW
hp
05200250
7.5
10
30
27.6
06200330
11
15
50
42.3
06200440
15
20
53
42.3
15
20
30
25.8
22.2
17.1
31
30.7
26.4
18.3
14.1
15
20
31
24.3
15
25
41
31
24.5
18.5
30
41
31
24.5
22
30
1.5
2.0
Maximum permissible continuous output current (A) for
the following switching frequencies
0.667, 1
and 2 kHz
3
kHz
4
kHz
6
kHz
8
kHz
12
kHz
16
kHz
24.8
21.5
18.8
32
27
40
33
27.3
200 V
58
25
33.0
44.0
400 V
05400270
27
25.4
20.3
17.6
13.8
11.1
27.9
24
21
14.9
12.2
30
23
18.5
35
30
23
18.5
35
30
23
18.5
05400300
15
20
06400350
18.5
25
06400420
22
30
06400470
30
40
05500030
2.2
3.0
3.9
05500040
4.0
5.0
6.1
2.2
3.0
4.0
05500069
5.5
7.5
10
4.0
5.0
6.9
06500100
7.5
10.0
06500150
11.0
15.0
06500190
15.0
20.0
38
48
63
57
48
30
23.7
35
42
47
46
42
575 V
06500230
18.5
25.0
06500290
22.0
30.0
06500350
30.0
40.0
Table 11-3
Model
12
17
22
20.5
27
34
43
39.6
5.5
7.5
14.8
7.5
10
15
11
15
26.2
20
16
15
20
31
26.2
20
16.8
18.5
25
31
26.2
20
16.8
22
30
3.0
10
15
11.6
19
15.4
23
29
35
34
29.8
11.6
20
15.4
12.8
23.8
20
15.4
12.8
23.8
20
15.4
13
Maximum permissible continuous output current @ 40 °C (104 °F) ambient with high IP insert installed (size 5 only)
Normal Duty
Heavy Duty
Maximum permissible continuous output current (A)
for the following switching frequencies
Maximum permissible continuous output current (A)
for the following switching frequencies
0.667, 1
and 2 kHz
3
kHz
4
kHz
6
kHz
8
kHz
12
kHz
16
kHz
0.667, 1
and 2 kHz
25.5
25.2
24.9
24.3
23.7
22.5
21.6
05400270
17.1
15.6
14.4
12.6
11.4
9.6
8.7
17.3
05400300
19.8
19.5
18.9
17.7
16.4
14
11.8
19.8
3
kHz
4
kHz
6
kHz
8
kHz
12
kHz
16
kHz
24.8
24.3
23.8
22.5
20
15.7
14.6
12.7
11.3
9.7
8.6
19.5
18.9
17.7
16.2
13.8
11.7
200 V
05200250
25
400 V
575 V
05500030
3.9
3.0
05500040
6.1
4.0
05500069
10
6.9
160
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
Safety
information
Product
information
Mechanical
installation
Electrical
installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
Optimization
parameters
motor
NV Media
Card
Advanced
Technical data Diagnostics
parameters
UL Listing
Table 11-4 Maximum permissible continuous output current @ 50 °C (122 °F) ( size 1 to 4)
Heavy Duty
Maximum permissible continuous output current (A)
for the following switching frequencies
Model
0.667
kHz
1
kHz
2
kHz
3
kHz
4
kHz
6
kHz
8
kHz
12
kHz
16
kHz
5.5
5.3
5.1
4.9
5.6
5.6
5.6
5.4
100 V
01100017*
1.7
01100024*
2.4
02100042
4.2
02100056
5.6
200 V
01200017*
1.7
01200024*
2.4
01200033*
3.3
01200042*
4.2
02200024
2.4
02200033
3.3
02200042
4.2
02200056
5.6
5.6
5.6
5.6
5.6
02200075
7.5
7.5
7.4
7.2
6.8
6.6
6.3
5.8
5.4
03200100
10
10
10
10
9.5
8.6
7.5
6.1
5
02400013
1.3
1.3
1.3
1.3
1.3
1.3
1.3
1.1
02400018
1.8
1.8
1.8
1.8
1.8
1.8
1.8
1.1
02400023
2.3
2.3
2.3
2.3
2.3
2.3
2.3
1.1
02400032
3.2
3.2
3.2
3.2
3.2
3.2
2.5
1.1
02400041
4.1
4.1
4.1
4.1
3.7
3.2
2.5
1.1
03400056
5.6
5.6
5.6
5.6
5
3.5
2.8
1.9
03400073
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
6.2
4.5
3.4
03400094
9.4
9.4
9.4
9.4
7.9
6.2
4.7
04200133
04200176
400 V
04400135
04400170
* CI-Keypad not installed.
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
161
Safety
information
Table 11-5
Model
Product
information
Mechanical
installation
Electrical
installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
Optimization
parameters
motor
NV Media
Card
Advanced
Technical data Diagnostics
parameters
UL Listing
Maximum permissible continuous output current @ 50 °C (122 °F) (size 5 to 6)
Normal Duty
Heavy Duty
Maximum permissible continuous output current (A)
for the following switching frequencies
Maximum permissible continuous output current (A)
for the following switching frequencies
0.667, 1
and 2 kHz
3
kHz
4
kHz
6
kHz
8
kHz
12
kHz
16
kHz
0.667, 1
and 2 kHz
3
kHz
4
kHz
6
kHz
8
kHz
12
kHz
16
kHz
23.0
19.8
17.3
29.0
24.6
200 V
05200250
30.0
29.7
25.2
21.6
06200330
50.0
49.0
38.0
30.0
06200440
58.0
56.0
49.0
38.0
30.2
05400270
25.5
23.6
20.4
15.6
12.3
05400300
25.5
25.0
33.0
44.0
41.0
36.0
29.0
24.6
18.6
16.2
12.7
10.0
400 V
06400350
48.0
63.0
58.0
52.0
23.5
21.6
15.9
12.3
24.0
21.9
19.2
13.8
10.5
37.0
28.0
21.4
35.0
32.0
27.0
21.0
16.5
43.0
36.5
27.4
21.4
42.0
42.0
38.0
32.0
27.0
21.0
16.5
43.0
37.0
28.0
21.4
47.0
42.0
38.0
32.0
27.0
21.0
16.5
38.0
06400420
06400470
23.6
24.0
575 V
05500030
3.9
3.0
05500040
6.1
4.0
05500069
10.0
6.9
06500100
12.0
06500150
06500190
22.0
06500230
162
17.8
27.0
06500290
06500350
10.0
17.0
34.0
43.0
41.7
36.1
13.4
15.0
14.0
10.3
13.4
19.0
14.0
10.3
23.5
17.8
15.0
28.2
23.5
18.0
15.0
28.0
23.7
18.0
15.0
23.0
29.0
35.0
31.2
21.6
19.0
14.0
11.5
27.3
22.0
19.0
14.0
11.6
27.3
21.8
19.0
14.0
11.6
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
Safety
information
11.1.2
Product
information
Mechanical
installation
Electrical
installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
Optimization
parameters
motor
NV Media
Card
Advanced
Technical data Diagnostics
parameters
UL Listing
Power dissipation
Table 11-6
Losses @ 40°C (104°F) ambient (size 1 to 4)
Heavy Duty
Model
Nominal rating
Drive losses (W) taking into account any current derating for the given conditions
0.667
kHz
1
kHz
2
kHz
3
kHz
4
kHz
6
kHz
8
kHz
12
kHz
16
kHz
1.0
34
34
35
36
37
39
41
46
50
1.1
1.5
42
43
44
46
47
50
53
59
65
01200017
0.25
0.33
01200024
0.37
0.5
01200033
0.55
0.75
01200042
0.75
1.0
02200024
0.37
0.5
24
24
24
25
25
26
27
30
32
02200033
0.55
0.75
31
31
32
33
34
35
37
40
43
02200042
0.75
1.0
37
37
38
39
40
42
44
49
53
02200056
1.1
1.5
45
46
47
48
50
53
56
62
68
02200075
1.5
2.0
58
59
61
63
65
69
74
82
84
03200100
2.2
3.0
85
87
91
96
101
110
117
121
117
04200133
3.0
3.0
04200176
4.0
5.0
02400013
0.37
0.5
25
26
30
33
36
42
48
60
02400018
0.55
0.75
29
30
34
37
40
47
53
67
02400023
0.75
1.0
33
34
38
41
45
52
59
69
02400032
1.1
1.5
41
42
46
50
54
63
71
70
02400041
1.5
2.0
49
50
55
60
64
74
78
70
03400056
2.2
3.0
55
57
62
68
75
86
90
86
03400073
3.0
3.0
72
74
82
90
98
113
101
92
03400094
4.0
5.0
95
99
108
116
129
128
125
113
04400135
5.5
7.5
04400170
7.5
10.0
kW
hp
01100017
0.25
0.33
01100024
0.37
0.5
02100042
0.75
02100056
100 V
200 V
400 V
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
77
163
Safety
information
Product
information
Table 11-7
Mechanical
installation
Electrical
installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
Optimization
parameters
motor
NV Media
Card
Advanced
Technical data Diagnostics
parameters
Losses @ 40°C (104°F) ambient (size 5 to 6)
Normal Duty
Model
UL Listing
Nominal
rating
Heavy Duty
Drive losses (W) taking into account any current
derating for the given conditions
3
kHz
4
kHz
6
kHz
8
kHz
12
kHz
16
kHz
kW
hp
10
291
302
324
344
356
342
5.5
11
15
394
413
452
490
480
15
20
463
484
528
522
481
05400270
15
20
324
353
356
355
359
05400300
15
20
332
367
434
441
06400350
18.5
25
417
456
532
06400420
22
30
515
561
06400470
30
40
656
05500030
2.2
3
05500040
4
05500069
Drive losses (W) taking into account any
current derating for the given conditions
3
kHz
4
kHz
6
kHz
8
kHz
12
kHz
16
kHz
7.5
245
254
272
288
284
282
7.5
10
277
290
316
342
382
11
15
366
382
417
410
388
362
11
20
276
282
285
290
301
310
417
424
15
20
322
333
352
374
372
439
613
652
645
15
25
389
424
498
496
502
513
657
651
646
650
18.5
30
455
497
487
486
495
513
659
650
646
643
22
30
500
496
487
486
495
92
102
121
142
1.5
2
82
91
108
126
5
135
150
180
209
2.2
3
94
104
124
145
5.5
7.5
194
215
260
302
4
5
153
170
204
236
06500100
7.5
10
215
239
287
334
5.5
7.5
187
208
249
291
06500150
11
15
284
315
376
438
7.5
10
265
294
351
410
06500190
15
20
362
399
484
569
11
15
317
350
418
496
06500230
18.5
25
448
505
596
682
15
20
382
421
508
523
06500290
22
30
623
712
810
822
18.5
25
533
610
628
635
06500350
30
40
798
836
813
823
22
30
546
624
622
627
kW
hp
05200250
7.5
06200330
06200440
0.667, 1
and 2 kHz
Nominal
rating
0.667, 1
and 2 kHz
200 V
400 V
575 V
Table 11-8
Model
Losses @ 40°C (104°F) ambient with high IP insert installed (size 5 only)
Normal Duty
Heavy Duty
Drive losses (W) taking into consideration any current
derating for the given conditions
Drive losses (W) taking into consideration any current
derating for the given conditions
0.667, 1
and 2 kHz
3
kHz
4
kHz
6
kHz
8
kHz
12
kHz
16
kHz
244
249
262
274
298
05400270
170
173
182
194
05400300
218
240
284
329
0.667, 1
and 2 kHz
3
kHz
4
kHz
6
kHz
8
kHz
12
kHz
16
kHz
328
245
251
264
278
301
306
223
268
172
177
184
194
225
265
432
564
218
240
284
325
425
560
200 V
05200250
400 V
575 V
05500030
05500040
05500069
164
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
Safety
information
Table 11-9
Product
information
Mechanical
installation
Electrical
installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
Optimization
parameters
motor
NV Media
Card
Advanced
Technical data Diagnostics
parameters
UL Listing
Losses @ 50°C (122°F) ambient (size 1 to 4)
Heavy Duty
Model
Nominal rating
Drive losses (W) taking into account any current derating for the given conditions
0.667
kHz
1
kHz
2
kHz
3
kHz
4
kHz
6
kHz
8
kHz
12
kHz
16
kHz
1.0
34
34
35
36
37
39
41
46
50
1.1
1.5
42
43
44
46
47
49
47
47
57
01200017
0.25
0.33
01200024
0.37
0.5
01200033
0.55
0.75
01200042
0.75
1.0
02200024
0.37
0.5
24
24
24
25
25
26
27
30
32
02200033
0.55
0.75
31
31
32
33
34
35
37
40
43
02200042
0.75
1.0
37
37
38
39
39
40
42
45
46
02200056
1.1
1.5
44
44
46
46
47
48
44
46
50
02200075
1.5
2.0
44
44
45
46
47
48
44
46
50
03200100
2.2
3.0
86
88
92
96
96
97
93
90
86
04200133
3.0
3.0
04200176
4.0
5.0
02400013
0.37
0.5
25
26
30
33
36
42
48
58
02400018
0.55
0.75
29
30
34
37
40
47
53
58
02400023
0.75
1.0
33
34
38
41
45
52
59
58
02400032
1.1
1.5
41
42
46
50
54
63
62
70
02400041
1.5
2.0
49
50
55
60
60
63
62
58
03400056
2.2
3.0
57
58
64
70
73
63
60
60
03400073
3.0
3.0
73
75
82
91
87
77
71
03400094
4.0
5.0
96
98
109
122
111
104
97
04400135
5.5
7.5
04400170
7.5
10.0
kW
hp
01100017
0.25
0.33
01100024
0.37
0.5
02100042
0.75
02100056
100 V
200 V
400 V
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
165
Safety
information
Product
information
Table 11-10
Mechanical
installation
Electrical
installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
Optimization
parameters
motor
NV Media
Card
Advanced
Technical data Diagnostics
parameters
UL Listing
Losses @ 50°C (122°F) ambient (size 5 to 6)
Model
Normal Duty
Heavy Duty
Drive losses (W) taking into account any current derating for
the given conditions
Drive losses (W) taking into account any current derating
for the given conditions
0.667, 1
and 2 kHz
3
kHz
4
kHz
6
kHz
8
kHz
12
kHz
16
kHz
0.667, 1
and 2 kHz
3
kHz
4
kHz
6
kHz
8
kHz
12
kHz
16
kHz
05200250
292
306
331
357
357
357
247
258
279
278
283
288
06200330
394
413
452
481
06200440
463
484
509
483
434
277
290
316
342
346
437
366
382
389
369
342
05400270
288
323
368
384
417
267
274
290
305
340
373
05400300
280
316
366
452
453
511
264
297
383
420
463
523
06400350
417
456
536
607
609
597
389
424
459
452
468
472
06400420
515
561
597
595
601
614
455
449
450
445
468
491
06400470
613
600
593
601
613
455
449
450
446
464
05500030
92
102
121
142
82
91
108
126
05500040
135
150
180
209
94
104
124
145
05500069
194
215
260
302
153
170
204
236
06500100
215
239
287
334
187
208
249
291
06500150
284
315
376
443
265
294
351
410
06500190
362
399
482
575
317
350
421
504
06500230
445
490
592
614
382
422
477
504
06500290
623
712
739
751
533
574
580
555
06500350
774
758
734
757
572
572
572
607
200 V
400 V
575 V
Table 11-11
Power losses from the front of the drive when
through-panel mounted
Frame size
Power loss
5
6
166
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
Safety
information
11.1.3
Product
information
Mechanical
installation
Electrical
installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
Optimization
parameters
motor
Supply requirements
11.1.6
NV Media
Card
Advanced
Technical data Diagnostics
parameters
UL Listing
Temperature, humidity and cooling method
AC supply voltage:
100 V drive: 100 V to 120 V ±10 %
200 V drive: 200 V to 240 V ±10 %
400 V drive: 380 V to 480 V ±10 %
575 V drive: 500 V to 575 V ±10 %
Number of phases: 3
Size 1 to 4:
Ambient temperature operating range:
- 20 °C to 40 °C (- 4 °F to 104 °F).
Output current derating must be applied at ambient temperatures
>40 °C (104 °F).
Maximum supply imbalance: 2 % negative phase sequence (equivalent
to 3 % voltage imbalance between phases).
Ambient temperature operating range:
- 20 °C to 50 °C (- 4 °F to 122 °F).
Output current derating must be applied at ambient temperatures >40 °C
(104 °F).
Frequency range: 48 to 62 Hz
For UL compliance only, the maximum supply symmetrical fault current
must be limited to 100 kA
11.1.4
Line reactors
Size 5 onwards:
Cooling method: Forced convection
Maximum humidity: 95 % non-condensing at 40 °C (104 °F)
Input line reactors reduce the risk of damage to the drive resulting from
poor phase balance or severe disturbances on the supply network.
11.1.7
Where line reactors are to be used, reactance values of approximately
2 % are recommended. Higher values may be used if necessary, but
may result in a loss of drive output (reduced torque at high speed)
because of the voltage drop.
Size 5 onwards:
For all drive ratings, 2 % line reactors permit drives to be used with a
supply unbalance of up to 3.5 % negative phase sequence (equivalent to
5 % voltage imbalance between phases).
Storage time is 2 years.
Severe disturbances may be caused by the following factors, for example:
• Power factor correction equipment connected close to the drive.
• Large DC drives having no or inadequate line reactors connected to
the supply.
• Across the line (DOL) started motor(s) connected to the supply such
that when any of these motors are started, the voltage dip exceeds
20 %
Such disturbances may cause excessive peak currents to flow in the
input power circuit of the drive. This may cause nuisance tripping, or in
extreme cases, failure of the drive.
Storage
Size 1 to 4:
-40 °C (-40 °F) to +60 °C (140 °F) for long term storage.
-40 °C (-40 °F) to +50 °C (122 °F) for long term storage, or to +70 °C
(158 °F) for short term storage
Electrolytic capacitors in any electronic product have a storage period
after which they require reforming or replacing.
The DC bus capacitors have a storage period of 10 years.
The low voltage capacitors on the control supplies typically have a
storage period of 2 years and are thus the limiting factor.
Low voltage capacitors cannot be reformed due to their location in the
circuit and thus may require replacing if the drive is stored for a period of
2 years or greater without power being applied.
It is therefore recommended that drives are powered up for a minimum
of 1 hour after every 2 years of storage.
Drives of low power rating may also be susceptible to disturbance when
connected to supplies with a high rated capacity.
This process allows the drive to be stored for a further 2 years.
Line reactors are particularly recommended for use with the following
drive models when one of the above factors exists, or when the supply
capacity exceeds 175 kVA:
11.1.8
Model sizes 04200133 to 06500350 have an internal DC choke so they
do not require AC line reactors except for cases of excessive phase
unbalance or extreme supply conditions.
Where required, each drive must have its own reactor(s). Three
individual reactors or a single three-phase reactor should be used.
Reactor current ratings
The current rating of the line reactors should be as follows:
Continuous current rating:
Not less than the continuous input current rating of the drive
Repetitive peak current rating:
Not less than twice the continuous input current rating of the drive
11.1.5
Motor requirements
No. of phases: 3
Maximum voltage:
100 V drive: 240 V
200 V drive: 240 V
400 V drive: 480 V
575 V drive: 575 V
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
Altitude
Altitude range: 0 to 3,000 m (9,900 ft), subject to the following
conditions:
1,000 m to 3,000 m (3,300 ft to 9,900 ft) above sea level: de-rate the
maximum output current from the specified figure by 1 % per 100 m
(330 ft) above 1,000 m (3,300 ft)
For example at 3,000 m (9,900 ft) the output current of the drive would
have to be de-rated by 20 %.
11.1.9
IP / UL Rating
The drive is rated to IP20 pollution degree 2 (non-conductive
contamination only).
In addition to this, drive sizes 2 and 3 are rated to IP21 standard (without
an Adaptor Interface module installed).
It is possible to configure drive size 5 and above to achieve IP65 rating
(NEMA 12) at the rear of the heatsink for through-panel mounting (some
current derating is required).
In order to achieve the high IP rating at the rear of the heatsink with drive
size 5 it is necessary to seal a heatsink vent by installing the high IP
insert.
The IP rating of a product is a measure of protection against ingress and
contact to foreign bodies and water. It is stated as IP XX, where the two
digits (XX) indicate the degree of protection provided as shown in Table
11-12.
167
Safety
information
Product
information
Table 11-12
Mechanical
installation
Electrical
installation
Basic
Running the
Optimization
parameters
motor
IP Rating degrees of protection
First digit
Protection against contact and
ingress of foreign bodies
0 No protection
Protection against large
foreign bodies φ > 50 mm
1
(large area contact with the
hand)
Protection against medium
2 size foreign bodies φ > 12 mm
(finger)
Protection against small
3 foreign bodies φ > 2.5 mm
(tools, wires)
Protection against granular
4 foreign bodies φ > 1mm (tools,
wires)
Protection against dust
5 deposit, complete protection
against accidental contact.
Protection against dust
6 ingress, complete protection
against accidental contact.
7 8 Table 11-13
Second digit
Protection against ingress of water
0 No protection
1
Protection against vertically
falling drops of water
2
Protection against spraywater
(up to 15 ° from the vertical)
3
Protection against spraywater
(up to 60 ° from the vertical)
4
Protection against splashwater
(from all directions)
Protection against heavy
5 splash water (from all
directions, at high pressure)
6
Protection against deckwater
(e.g. in heavy seas)
7 Protection against immersion
8 Protection against submersion
UL enclosure ratings
UL rating
Type 12
Enclosures are intended for indoor use, primarily
to provide a degree of protection against dust,
falling dirt and dripping non-corrosive liquids.
Corrosive gasses
Concentrations of corrosive gases must not exceed the levels given in:
• Table A2 of EN 50178:1998
• Class 3C2 of IEC 60721-3-3
This corresponds to the levels typical of urban areas with industrial
activities and/or heavy traffic, but not in the immediate neighborhood of
industrial sources with chemical emissions.
11.1.11
RoHS compliance
The drive meets EU directive 2002-95-EC for RoHS compliance.
11.1.12
Vibration
NV Media
Card
Advanced
Technical data Diagnostics
parameters
UL Listing
Sinusoidal Vibration Test
Testing in each of three mutually perpendicular axes in turn.
Referenced standard: IEC 60068-2-6: Test Fc:
Frequency range: 5 to 500 Hz
Severity: 3.5 mm peak displacement from 5 to 9 Hz
10 m/s² peak acceleration from 9 to 200 Hz
15 m/s² peak acceleration from 200 to 500 Hz
Sweep rate:1 octave/minute
Duration: 15 minutes in each of 3 mutually perpendicular axes.
Referenced standard: EN 61800-5-1: 2007, Section 5.2.6.4.
referring to IEC 60068-2-6:
Frequency range: 10 to 150 Hz
Severity: 0.075 mm amplitude from 10 to 57 Hz
1g peak acceleration from 57 to 150 Hz
Sweep rate:1 octave/minute
Duration:10 sweep cycles per axis in each of 3 mutually
perpendicular axes.
Testing to Environmental Category ENV3
Subjected to resonance search in the range listed. If no natural
frequencies found then subjected only to endurance test.
Referenced standard: Environment Category ENV3:
Frequency range: 5 to 13.2 Hz ± 1.0 mm
13.2 to 100 Hz ± 0.7g (6.9 ms -2)
For more information, please refer to section 12 Vibration Test 1 of the
Lloyds Register Test Specification Number 1.
11.1.13
Description
Enclosures are intended for indoor use, primarily
to provide a degree of protection against limited
amounts of falling dirt.
Type 1
11.1.10
Getting
started
Starts per hour
By electronic control: unlimited
By interrupting the AC supply: ≤20 (equally spaced)
11.1.14
Start up time
This is the time taken from the moment of applying power to the drive, to
the drive being ready to run the motor:
Size 1 to 4:: 1.5 s
11.1.15
Output frequency / speed range
In all operating modes (Open loop, RFC-A) the maximum output
frequency is limited to 550 Hz.
11.1.16
Accuracy and resolution
Frequency:
The absolute frequency accuracy depends on the accuracy of the
oscillator used with the drive microprocessor. The accuracy of the
oscillator is ± 2 % , and so the absolute frequency accuracy is ± 2 % of
the reference, when a preset frequency is used. If an analog input is
used, the absolute accuracy is further limited by the absolute accuracy
of the analog input.
Maximum recommended continuous vibration level 0.14 g r.m.s.
broadband 5 to 200 Hz.
The following data applies to the drive only; it does not include the
performance of the source of the control signals.
Size 1 to 4:
Open & closed loop resolution:
Preset frequency reference: 0.01 Hz
Bump Test
Testing in each of three mutually perpendicular axes in turn.
Referenced standard: IEC 60068-2-27: Test Ea:
Severity: 15 g peak, 11 ms pulse duration, half sine.
No. of Bumps: 18 (3 in each direction of each axis).
Referenced standard: IEC 60068-2-29: Test Eb:
Severity: 18 g peak, 6 ms pulse duration, half sine.
No. of Bumps: 600 (100 in each direction of each axis).
Random Vibration Test
Testing in each of three mutually perpendicular axes in turn.
Referenced standard: IEC 60068-2-64: Test Fh:
Severity: 1.0 m²/s³ (0.01 g²/Hz) ASD from 5 to 20 Hz
-3 db/octave from 20 to 200 Hz
Duration: 30 minutes in each of 3 mutually perpendicular axes.
168
Analog input 1: 11 bit plus sign
Analog input 2: 11 bit plus sign
Current:
The resolution of the current feedback is 10 bit plus sign.
Accuracy: typical 2 %
worst case 5 %
11.1.17
Acoustic noise
The heatsink fan generates the majority of the sound pressure level at 1 m
produced by the drive. The heatsink fan on all drive sizes is a variable
speed fan. The drive controls the speed at which the fan runs based on
the temperature of the heatsink and the drive's thermal model system.
Table 11-14 gives the sound pressure level at 1 m produced by the drive
for the heatsink fan running at the maximum and minimum speeds.
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
Safety
information
Product
information
Mechanical
installation
Electrical
installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
Optimization
parameters
motor
Table 11-17
Table 11-14 Acoustic noise data
Size
Max speed
dBA
1
2
3
4
5
6
46.7
45
58.6
60.8
57
57
11.1.18
H
W
D
F
R
Min speed
dBA
Supply fault current used to calculate maximum input
currents
Model
Symmetrical fault level (kA)
All
100
49
40
Overall drive dimensions
Dimension
H
W
D
1
2
205 mm
(8.07 in)
3
226 mm
(8.9 in)
90 mm
(3.54 in)
160 mm
(6.3 in)
4
277 mm
(10.9 in)
115 mm
(4.5 in)
175 mm
(6.9 in)
5
391 mm
(15.39 in)
143 mm
(5.63 in)
192 mm
(7.60 in)
6
391 mm
(15.39 in)
210 mm
(8.27 in)
221 mm
(8.70 in)
11.1.19
Table 11-16
75 mm
(2.95 in)
F
R
130 mm
(5.1 in)
160 mm
(6.3 in)
150 mm
(5.9 in)
Weights
Overall drive weights
kg
lb
1
0.75
1.65
2
1.0
2.2
3
1.5
Model
3.3
All
3.13
6.9
5
7.4
16.3
6
14
30.9
11.1.20
UL Listing
Overall dimensions
Size
4
Advanced
Technical data Diagnostics
parameters
Height including surface mounting brackets
Width
Projection forward of panel when surface mounted
Projection forward of panel when through-panel mounted.
Projection rear of panel when through-panel mounted.
Table 11-15
Size
NV Media
Card
Input current, fuse and cable size ratings
The input current is affected by the supply voltage and impedance.
Typical input current
The values of typical input current are given to aid calculations for power
flow and power loss.
The values of typical input current are stated for a balanced supply.
Maximum continuous input current
The values of maximum continuous input current are given to aid the
selection of cables and fuses. These values are stated for the worst case
condition with the unusual combination of stiff supply with bad balance.
The value stated for the maximum continuous input current would only
be seen in one of the input phases. The current in the other two phases
would be significantly lower.
The values of maximum input current are stated for a supply with a 2 %
negative phase-sequence imbalance and rated at the maximum supply
fault current given in Table 11-17.
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
169
Safety
information
Product
information
Mechanical
installation
Electrical
installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
Optimization
parameters
motor
NV Media
Card
Advanced
Technical data Diagnostics
parameters
UL Listing
Fuses
The AC supply to the drive must be installed with suitable protection against overload and short-circuits. Table 11-18, Table 11-19 ,
Table 11-20 and Table 11-21 show the recommended fuse ratings. Failure to observe this requirement will cause risk of fire.
WARNING
Table 11-18
Model
AC Input current and fuse ratings (100 V)
Typical input
current
Maximum
continuous
input current
A
Fuse rating
Maximum
overload input
current
A
IEC gG
Class CC or Class J
Maximum
Maximum
A
A
10
A
01100017
8.7
8.7
10
01100024
11.1
11.1
16
16
02100042
18.8
18.8
20
20
02100056
24.0
24.0
25
25
Table 11-19
AC Input current and fuse ratings (200 V)
Fuse rating
Maximum
continuous
input
current
Maximum
overload
input
current
Nominal
A
4.5
A
A
01200017
A
4.5
01200024
5.3
5.3
01200033
8.3
8.3
10
16
Model
Typical
input
current
IEC
Maximum
A
1ph
Class
3ph
Nominal
A
gG
10.4
10.4
02200024
5.3/3.2
5.3/4.1
6
02200033
8.3/4.3
8.3/6.7
10
02200042
10.4/5.4
10.4/7.5
02200056
14.9/7.4
14.9/11.3
02200075
18.1/9.1
18.1/13.5
03200100
23.9/12.8
23.9/17.7
04200133
23.7/13.5
23.7/16.9
04200176
17.0
21.3
05200250
24
31
52
06200330
42
48
64
06200440
49
56
85
30/25
Maximum
A
1ph
Class
3ph
5
6
01200042
170
UL / USA
10
CC or J
16
10
5
10
16
10
20
16
25
20
25
20
25
gG
gG
40
gG
63
63
gG
10
20
16
25
20
25
gG
40
16
20
25
40
60
60
CC
or J
CC
or J
CC
or J
40
CC
or J
60
CC
or J
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
Safety
information
Product
information
Mechanical
installation
Electrical
installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
Optimization
parameters
motor
NV Media
Card
Advanced
Technical data Diagnostics
parameters
UL Listing
Table 11-20 AC Input current and fuse ratings (400 V)
Model
Maximum
continuous
input
current
Typical
input
current
Nominal
Maximum
A
A
A
A
02400013
A
2.1
2.4
02400018
2.6
2.9
02400023
3.1
3.5
02400032
4.7
5.1
02400041
5.8
6.2
Fuse rating
Maximum
overload
input
current
IEC
UL / USA
Class
Nominal
Maximum
A
A
5
6
gG
CC or J
10
10
03400056
8.3
8.7
13
03400073
10.2
12.2
18
03400094
13.1
14.8
20.7
10
04400135
14.0
16.3
20
18.5
20.7
25
05400270
26
29
52
05400300
27
30
58
06400350
32
36
67
06400420
41
46
80
06400470
54
60
90
10
16
gG
16
04400170
Class
CC or J
20
20
gG
CC or J
25
40
40
gG
35
63
63
gG
50
35
CC or J
60
CC or J
40
60
Table 11-21 AC Input current and fuse ratings (575 V)
Model
Maximum
continuous
input current
Typical
input
current
A
Fuse rating
Maximum
overload
input
current
Nominal
Maximum
A
A
A
A
IEC
05500030
4
4
7
05500040
6
7
9
05500069
9
11
15
20
06500100
12
13
22
20
06500150
17
19
33
32
06500190
22
24
41
40
06500230
26
29
50
06500290
33
37
63
06500350
41
47
76
10
50
20
UL / USA
Class
Nominal
Maximum
A
A
10
10
gG
Class
10
20
CC or J
20
20
40
25
30
30
gG
CC or J
35
63
40
63
50
50
NOTE
Ensure cables used suit local wiring regulations.
The nominal cable sizes below are only a guide. The mounting and grouping of cables affects their current-carrying capacity, in some cases
smaller cables may be acceptable but in other cases a larger cable is required to avoid excessive temperature or voltage drop. Refer to
local wiring regulations for the correct size of cables.
CAUTION
Table 11-22
Cable ratings (100 V)
Cable size (IEC 60364-5-52)
Cable size (UL508C)
AWG
mm2
Model
Input
Output
Input
Output
Nominal
Maximum
Nominal
Maximum
Nominal
Maximum
Nominal
Maximum
01100017
1
6
1
2.5
16
10
16
12
01100024
1.5
6
1
2.5
14
10
16
12
02100042
2.5
6
1
2.5
12
10
16
12
02100056
4
6
1
2.5
10
10
16
12
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
171
Safety
information
Product
information
Table 11-23
Mechanical
installation
Electrical
installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
Optimization
parameters
motor
NV Media
Card
Advanced
Technical data Diagnostics
parameters
UL Listing
Cable ratings (200 V)
Cable size (IEC 60364-5-52)
Cable size (UL508C)
AWG
mm2
Model
Input
Output
Input
Output
Nominal
Maximum
Nominal
Maximum
Nominal
Maximum
Nominal
Maximum
1
6
1
2.5
16
10
16
12
1
6
1
2.5
16
10
16
12
02200056
2.5/1.5
6
1
2.5
12/14
10
16
12
02200075
2.5
6
1
2.5
12
10
16
12
03200100
4
6
1.5
2.5
10/12
10
14
12
04200133
4/2.5
04200176
4
6
2.5
2.5
10
10
12
12
05200250
10
10
10
10
8
8
8
8
06200330
16
06200440
25
01200017
01200024
01200033
01200042
02200024
02200033
02200042
Table 11-24
16
25
25
25
4
4
3
3
3
3
Cable ratings (400 V)
Cable size (IEC 60364-5-52)
Cable size (UL508C)
AWG
mm2
Model
Input
Output
Input
Output
Nominal
Maximum
Nominal
Maximum
Nominal
Maximum
Nominal
Maximum
1
6
1
2.5
16
10
16
12
6
1
2.5
12
10
16
02400013
02400018
02400023
02400032
02400041
03400056
1
03400073
1.5
03400094
2.5
04400135
2.5
04400170
4
05400270
05400300
06400350
10
16
06400470
25
14
1.5
6
06400420
Table 11-25
1
16
12
6
2.5
2.5
10
10
12
12
6
6
6
8
8
8
8
25
16
25
4
3
4
10
6
25
6
3
Cable ratings (575 V)
Input
Nominal
Output
Maximum
Nominal
05500030
0.75
05500040
1
05500069
1.5
1.5
1
06500100
2.5
2.5
4
4
06500190
6
172
10
16
Input
Maximum
0.75
1.5
06500150
06500350
Cable size (UL508C)
AWG
mm2
Model
06500290
3
3
Cable size (IEC 60364-5-52)
06500230
12
14
25
6
10
Nominal
Output
Maximum
16
1.5
14
6
14
16
14
10
8
Maximum
16
16
14
25
Nominal
10
3
8
3
6
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
Safety
information
Product
information
11.1.21
Mechanical
installation
Electrical
installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
Optimization
parameters
motor
NV Media
Card
Advanced
Technical data Diagnostics
parameters
UL Listing
Protective ground cable ratings
Table 11-26 Protective ground cable ratings
Input phase conductor size
Minimum ground conductor size
≤ 10 mm2
Either 10 mm2 or two conductors of the same cross-sectional area as the input phase conductor.
> 10
mm2 and
> 16
mm2
≤ 16
The same cross-sectional area as the first input phase conductor.
mm2
and ≤ 35 mm
2
16 mm2
Half of the cross-sectional area of the input phase conductor.
> 35 mm2
11.1.22
Maximum motor cable lengths
Table 11-27 Maximum motor cable lengths (100 V drives)
100 V Nominal AC supply voltage
Model
Maximum permissible motor cable length for each of the following switching frequencies
0.667 kHz
1 kHz
4 kHz
6 kHz
8 kHz
12 kHz
16 kHz
50 m (164 ft)
37.5 m
(123 ft)
25 m
(82 ft)
18.75 m
(61 ft)
12.5 m
(41 ft)
9m
(30 ft)
100 m (328 ft)
75 m
(246 ft)
50 m
(164 ft)
37.5 m
(123 ft)
25 m
(82 ft)
18 m
(59 ft)
01100017
01100024
02100042
02100056
2 kHz
3 kHz
Table 11-28 Maximum motor cable lengths (200 V drives)
200 V Nominal AC supply voltage
Maximum permissible motor cable length for each of the following switching frequencies
Model
0.667
kHz
1
kHz
2
kHz
3
kHz
4
kHz
6
kHz
8
kHz
12
kHz
16
kHz
50 m
(165 ft)
37.5 m
(122 ft)
25 m
(82.5 ft)
18.75 m
(61 ft)
12.5 m
(41 ft)
9m
(30 ft)
100 m
(330 ft)
75 m
(245 ft)
50 m
(165 ft)
37.5 m
(122 ft)
25 m
(82.5 ft)
18 m
(60 ft)
100 m
(330 ft)
75 m
(245 ft)
50 m
(165 ft)
37.5 m
(122 ft)
25 m
(82.5 ft)
18 m
(60 ft)
100 m
(330 ft)
75 m
(245 ft)
50 m
(165 ft)
37.5 m
(122 ft)
25 m
(82.5 ft)
18 m
(60 ft)
150 m
(490 ft)
100 m
(330 ft)
75 m
(245 ft)
50 m
(165 ft)
37 m
(120 ft)
150 m
(490 ft)
100 m
(330 ft)
75 m
(245 ft)
50 m
(165 ft)
01200017
01200024
01200033
01200042
02200024
02200033
02200042
02200056
02200075
03200100
04200133
04200176
200 m
(660 ft)
05200250
06200330
06200440
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
300 m
(984 ft)
200 m
(660 ft)
173
Safety
information
Product
information
Table 11-29
Mechanical
installation
Electrical
installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
Optimization
parameters
motor
NV Media
Card
Advanced
Technical data Diagnostics
parameters
UL Listing
Maximum motor cable lengths (400 V drives)
400 V Nominal AC supply voltage
Maximum permissible motor cable length for each of the following switching frequencies
Model
0.667
kHz
1
kHz
2
kHz
3
kHz
4
kHz
6
kHz
8
kHz
12
kHz
16
kHz
100 m
(330 ft)
75 m
(245 ft)
50 m
(165 ft)
37.5 m
(122 ft)
25 m
(82.5 ft)
18.25 m
(60 ft)
100 m
(330 ft)
75 m
(245 ft)
50 m
(165 ft)
37.5 m
(122 ft)
25 m
(82.5 ft)
18.25 m
(60 ft)
100 m
(330 ft)
75 m
(245 ft)
50 m
(165 ft)
37.5 m
(122 ft)
25 m
(82.5 ft)
18.25 m
(60 ft)
150 m
(490 ft)
100 m
(330 ft)
75 m
(245 ft)
50 m
(165 ft)
37 m
(120 ft)
150 m
(490 ft)
100 m
(330 ft)
75 m
(245 ft)
50 m
(165 ft)
02400013
02400018
02400023
02400032
02400041
03400056
03400073
03400094
04400135
04400170
05400270
200 m
(660 ft)
05400300
06400350
300 m
(984 ft)
06400420
06400470
Table 11-30
200 m
(660 ft)
Maximum motor cable lengths (575 V drives)
575 V Nominal AC supply voltage
Maximum permissible motor cable length for each of the following switching frequencies
Model
0.667
kHz
1
kHz
2
kHz
05500030
3
kHz
4
kHz
6
kHz
8
kHz
12
kHz
200 m
(660 ft)
150 m
(490 ft)
100 m
(330 ft)
75 m
(245 ft)
50 m
(165 ft)
16
kHz
200 m
(660 ft)
05500040
05500069
06500100
06500150
06500190
06500230
300 m
(984 ft)
06500290
06500350
• Cable lengths in excess of the specified values may be used only when special techniques are adopted; refer to the supplier of the drive.
• The default switching frequency is 3 kHz for Open-loop and RFC-A.
The maximum cable length is reduced from that shown in Table 11-27, Table 11-28, Table 11-29 and Table 11-30 if high capacitance motor cables are
used. For further information, refer to section 4.5.2 High-capacitance / reduced diameter cables on page 58.
174
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
Safety
information
Product
information
11.1.23
Mechanical
installation
Electrical
installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
Optimization
parameters
motor
Minimum resistance values and peak power
rating for the braking resistor at 40 °C
(104 °F)
Table 11-31
Model
01100017
01100024
02100042
02100056
Table 11-32
Model
Braking resistor resistance and power rating (100 V)
Minimum
resistance*
Ω
Instantaneous
power rating
kW
130
1.2
68
Continuous
power rating
kW
01200033
Braking resistor resistance and power rating (200 V)
Minimum
resistance*
Ω
Instantaneous
power rating
kW
130
1.2
Continuous
power rating
kW
02200033
68
2.2
02200075
03200100
04200133
04200176
05200250
06200330
06200440
Table 11-33
Model
45
3.4
22
6.9
16.5
10.3
8.6
19.7
2.2
8.6
12.6
16.4
Braking resistor resistance and power rating (400 V)
Minimum
resistance*
Ω
Instantaneous
power rating
kW
270
2.3
100
6.1
UL Listing
Braking resistor resistance and power rating (575 V)
Minimum
resistance*
Ω
Instantaneous
power rating
kW
Continuous
power rating
kW
80
12.1
4.6
2.6
05500069
6.5
06500100
8.7
06500150
12.3
13
74
16.3
19.9
06500290
24.2
06500350
31.7
* Resistor tolerance: ±10 %
For high-inertia loads or under continuous braking, the continuous power
dissipated in the braking resistor may be as high as the power rating of
the drive. The total energy dissipated in the braking resistor is dependent
on the amount of energy to be extracted from the load.
The instantaneous power rating refers to the short-term maximum power
dissipated during the on intervals of the pulse width modulated braking
control cycle. The braking resistor must be able to withstand this
dissipation for short intervals (milliseconds). Higher resistance values
require proportionately lower instantaneous power ratings.
02200024
02200056
Advanced
Technical data Diagnostics
parameters
05500030
05500040
06500230
01200042
02200042
Model
06500190
2.2
01200017
01200024
Table 11-34
NV Media
Card
Continuous
power rating
kW
In most applications, braking occurs only occasionally. This allows the
continuous power rating of the braking resistor to be much lower than
the power rating of the drive. It is therefore essential that the
instantaneous power rating and energy rating of the braking resistor are
sufficient for the most extreme braking duty that is likely to be
encountered.
Optimization of the braking resistor requires careful consideration of the
braking duty.
Select a value of resistance for the braking resistor that is not less than
the specified minimum resistance. Larger resistance values may give a
cost saving, as well as a safety benefit in the event of a fault in the
braking system. Braking capability will then be reduced, which could
cause the drive to trip during braking if the value chosen is too large.
02400013
02400018
02400023
02400032
02400041
03400056
03400073
2.2
03400094
04400135
3
4
50
12.2
05400270
31.5
21.5
16.2
05400300
18
37.5
19.6
17
39.8
04400170
06400350
06400420
21.6
06400470
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
25
32.7
175
Safety
information
Product
information
11.1.24
Table 11-35
Mechanical
installation
Electrical
installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
Optimization
parameters
motor
Advanced
Technical data Diagnostics
parameters
Drive relay terminal data
Connection type
Torque setting
All
Screw terminals
0.5 N m (0.4 lb ft)
Drive power terminal data
AC and motor terminals
DC and braking
Model
size
Recommended
1
0.5 N m (0.4 lb ft)
0.5 N m (0.4 lb ft)
1.4 N m (1 lb ft)
1.4 N m (1 lb ft)
Maximum
Recommended
Ground terminal
Maximum
2
3
UL Listing
Torque settings
Model
Table 11-36
NV Media
Card
Recommended
Maximum
1.5 N m (1.1 lb ft)
4
5
6
Table 11-37
Plug-in terminal block
1.5 N m (1.1 lb ft)
M4 Nut (7 mm AF)
1.8 N m (1.3 lb ft)
1.5 N m (1.1 lb ft)
M6 Nut (10 mm AF)
6.0 N m (4.4 lb ft)
M5 Nut (8 mm AF)
2.5 N m (1.8 lb ft)
2.0 N m (1.4 lb ft)
M6 Nut (10 mm AF)
8.0 N m (6.0 lb ft)
6.0 N m (4.4 lb ft)
Terminal block maximum cable sizes
8.0 N m (6.0 lb ft)
11.1.25
5.0 N m (3.7 lb ft)
M6 Nut (10 mm AF)
6.0 N m (4.4 lb ft)
8.0 N m (6.0 lb ft)
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)
Model size
Terminal block
description
Max cable size
All
Control connector
1.5 mm2 (16 AWG)
This is a summary of the EMC performance of the drive. For full details,
refer to the EMC Data Sheet which can be obtained from the supplier of
the drive.
All
2-way relay connector
2.5 mm2 (12 AWG)
Table 11-38
AC input power connector
1 to 4
5
AC output power
connector
3-way AC power
connector
3-way motor connector
6
mm2 (10
AWG)
2 (12
2.5 mm
AWG)
Standard
Immunity compliance
Type of
immunity
Test specification
Application
Level
IEC61000-4-2
EN61000-4-2
Electrostatic
discharge
6 kV contact
discharge
8 kV air discharge
Module
enclosure
Level 3
(industrial)
IEC61000-4-3
EN61000-4-3
Radio
frequency
radiated field
10 V/m prior to
modulation
80 - 1000 MHz
80 % AM (1 kHz)
modulation
Module
enclosure
Level 3
(industrial)
IEC61000-4-4
EN61000-4-4
5/50 ns 2 kV
transient at 5 kHz
Control lines
repetition frequency
via
coupling
clamp
Fast transient
burst
5/50 ns 2 kV
transient at 5 kHz
Power lines
repetition frequency
by direct injection
8 mm2 (8 AWG)
Level 4
(industrial
harsh)
Level 3
(industrial)
Common mode 4 kV AC supply
1.2/50 μs
lines:
Level 4
waveshape
line to ground
IEC61000-4-5
EN61000-4-5
IEC61000-4-6
EN61000-4-6
Surges
Conducted
radio
frequency
Voltage dips
IEC61000-4-11
and
EN61000-4-11
interruptions
Differential mode
2 kV
1.2/50 μs
waveshape
AC supply
lines:
line to line
Level 3
Lines to ground
Signal ports
to ground 1
Level 2
10V prior to
modulation
0.15 - 80 MHz
80 % AM (1 kHz)
modulation
Control and
power lines
Level 3
(industrial)
-30 % 10 ms
+60 % 100 ms
-60 % 1 s
<-95 % 5 s
AC power
ports
IEC61000-6-1
EN61000-61:2007
Generic immunity standard for the
residential, commercial and light industrial environment
Complies
IEC61000-6-2
EN61000-62:2005
Generic immunity standard for the
industrial environment
Complies
IEC61800-3
EN618003:2004
Product standard for adjustable
speed power drive systems
(immunity requirements)
Meets immunity
requirements for first and
second environments
1
See section Surge immunity of control circuits - long cables and
connections outside a building on page 68 for control ports for possible
176
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
Safety
information
Product
information
Mechanical
installation
Electrical
installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
Optimization
parameters
motor
NV Media
Card
Advanced
Technical data Diagnostics
parameters
UL Listing
requirements regarding grounding and external surge protection.
IEC 61800-3:2004 and EN 61800-3:2004
Emission
The 2004 revision of the standard uses different terminology to align the
requirements of the standard better with the EC EMC Directive.
The drive contains an in-built filter for basic emission control. An
additional optional external filter provides further reduction of emission.
The requirements of the following standards are met, depending on the
motor cable length and switching frequency.
Table 11-39 Size 1 emission compliance (200 V drives)
Switching frequency (kHz)
Motor cable
length (m)
3
4
6
8
12
16
Power drive systems are categorized C1 to C4:
Category
C1
Intended for use in the first or second
environments
R
C2
Not a plug-in or movable device, and
intended for use in the first environment
only when installed by a professional, or
in the second environment
I
C3
Intended for use in the second
environment, not the first environment
E2U
C4
Rated at over 1000 V or over 400 A,
intended for use in complex systems in
the second environment
E2R
Using internal filter:
0–2
Using internal filter and external ferrite ring (1 turn):
0 – 10
10 - 20
Using external filter:
0 – 20
20 - 100
Table 11-40
Note that category 4 is more restrictive than E2R, since the rated current
of the PDS must exceed 400 A or the supply voltage exceed 1000 V, for
the complete PDS.
Size 1 emission compliance (400 V drives)
Motor cable
length (m)
Switching frequency (kHz)
3
4
6
8
12
Corresponding
code used
above
Definition
16
Using internal filter:
0–5
11.2
Optional external EMC filters
Table 11-41
Using internal filter and external ferrite ring (2 turns):
0 – 10
Using external filter:
0 – 20
20 - 100
Drive and EMC filter cross reference
Model
CT part number
200 V
05200250
4200-0312
06200330 to 06200440
4200-2300
400 V
Key (shown in decreasing order of permitted emission level):
05400270 to 05400300
4200-0402
E2R
06400350 to 06400470
4200-4800
EN 61800-3:2004 second environment, restricted distribution
(Additional measures may be required to prevent interference)
575 V
E2U
EN 61800-3:2004 second environment, unrestricted distribution
05500030 to 05500069
4200-0122
I
Industrial generic standard EN 61000-6-4:2007
EN 61800-3:2004 first environment restricted distribution (The
following caution is required by EN 61800-3:2004)
06500100 to 06500350
4200-3690
CAUTION
R
This is a product of the restricted distribution class according
to IEC 61800-3. In a residential environment this product may
cause radio interference in which case the user may be
required to take adequate measures.
Residential generic standard EN 61000-6-3:2007
EN 61800-3:2004 first environment unrestricted distribution
EN 61800-3:2004 defines the following:
• The first environment is one that includes residential premises. It
also includes establishments directly connected without intermediate
transformers to a low-voltage power supply network which supplies
buildings used for residential purposes.
• The second environment is one that includes all establishments
other than those directly connected to a low-voltage power supply
network which supplies buildings used for residential purposes.
• Restricted distribution is defined as a mode of sales distribution in
which the manufacturer restricts the supply of equipment to
suppliers, customers or users who separately or jointly have
technical competence in the EMC requirements of the application of
drives.
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
177
Safety
information
11.2.1
Product
information
Mechanical
installation
Electrical
installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
Optimization
parameters
motor
NV Media
Card
Advanced
Technical data Diagnostics
parameters
EMC filter ratings
Table 11-42
Optional external EMC filter details
Maximum continuous
current
CT part
number
@ 40 °C
(104 °F)
@ 50 °C
(122 °F)
Power dissipation at
rated current
Voltage rating
IEC
IP rating
UL
@ 40 °C
(104 °F)
Ground leakage
@ 50 °C
(122 °F)
Balanced supply
phase-to-phase &
phase-to-ground
Worst
case
A
A
V
V
W
W
mA
mA
4200-0312
31
28.5
250
300
20
17
2.0
80
4200-2300
55
51
250
300
41
35
4.2
69
4200-0402
40
36.8
528
600
47
40
18.7
197
4200-4800
63
58
528
600
54
46
11.2
183
4200-0122
12
11
760
600
4200-3690
42
39
760
600
45
39
12
234
11.2.2
UL Listing
20
Discharge
resistors
MΩ
1.68
Overall EMC filter dimensions
Table 11-43
Optional external EMC filter dimensions
Dimension (mm)
CT part
number
H
W
Weight
D
mm
inch
mm
inch
mm
inch
kg
lb
4200-0312
437
17.20
143
5.63
60
2.36
5.5
12.13
4200-2300
434
17.09
210
8.27
60
2.36
6.5
14.30
4200-0402
437
17.20
143
5.63
60
2.36
5.5
12.13
4200-4800
434
17.09
210
8.27
60
2.36
6.7
14.80
4200-0122
437
17.20
143
5.63
60
2.36
5.5
12.13
4200-3690
434
17.09
210
8.27
60
2.36
7.0
15.40
11.2.3
EMC filter torque settings
Table 11-44
Optional external EMC Filter terminal data
Power connections
CT part
number
Ground connections
Max cable size
2
Max torque
mm
AWG
Nm
Ib ft
16
6
2.3
1.70
Ground stud size
Max torque
Nm
Ib ft
4.8
2.8
4200-2300
4200-4800
M6
4200-3690
178
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
Safety
information
Product
information
12
Mechanical
installation
Electrical
installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
Optimization
parameters
motor
Diagnostics
The keypad display on the drive gives various information about the
status of the drive. The keypad display provides information on the
following categories:
•
•
•
WARNING
12.1
Status modes (Keypad and LED status)
Figure 12-1
Keypad status modes
1
Advanced
parameters
Technical data Diagnostics
UL Listing
Example
1. Trip code 2 is read from Pr 10.020 via serial communications.
2. Checking Table 12-2 shows Trip 2 is an Over Volts trip.
Comms
code
Trip indications
Alarm indications
Status indications
Users must not attempt to repair a drive if it is faulty, nor
carry out fault diagnosis other than through the use of the
diagnostic features described in this chapter.
If a drive is faulty, it must be returned to an authorized
Control Techniques distributor for repair.
NV Media
Card
No.
Trip
2
OV
Keypad
display
3. Look up OV in Table 12-2.
4. Perform checks detailed under Diagnosis.
12.3
Identifying a trip / trip source
Some trips only contain a trip string whereas some other trips have a trip
string along with a sub-trip number which provides the user with
additional information about the trip.
A trip can be generated from a control system or from a power system.
The sub-trip number associated with the trips listed in Table 12-1 is in
the form xxyzz and used to identify the source of the trip.
Table 12-1

2

Trips associated with xxyzz sub-trip number
OV
PH.Lo
OI.AC
Pb.Er
OI.br
OI.Sn
PSU
Oht.r
Oht.I
tH.Fb
Oht.P
P.dAt
Oh.dc
So.St
The digits xx are 00 for a trip generated by the control system. For a
drive, if the trip is related to the power system then xx will have a value of
01, when displayed the leading zeros are suppressed.
3

For a control system trip (xx is zero), the y digit where relevant is defined
for each trip. If not relevant, the y digit will have a value of zero.
The zz digits give the reason for the trip and are defined in each trip
description.
Figure 12-2
Key to sub-trip number
x x y z z
1
Drive OK status
00 - Generated by the control module
2
Trip status
01 - Generated by the power module
3
Alarm status
0 - Always zero for a single drive
12.2
Trip indications
The output of the drive is disabled under any trip condition so that the
drive stops controlling the motor. If the motor is running when the trip
occurs it will coast to a stop.
During a trip condition, the display indicates that a trip has occurred and
the keypad will display the trip string. Some trips have a sub-trip number
to provide additional information about the trip. If a trip has a sub-trip
number, the sub-trip number is flashed alternately with the trip string.
00
01
. - Reason for the trip
.
07
Trips are listed alphabetically in Table 12-2 based on the trip indication
shown on the drive display. Alternatively, the drive status can be read in
Pr 10.001 'Drive OK' using communication protocols. The most recent
trip can be read in Pr 10.020 providing a trip number. It must be noted
that the hardware trips (HF01 to HF19) do not have trip numbers. The
trip number must be checked in Table 12-3 to identify the specific trip.
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
179
Safety
information
12.4
Product
information
Mechanical
installation
Electrical
installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
Optimization
parameters
motor
NV Media
Card
Advanced
parameters
Technical data Diagnostics
UL Listing
Trips, Sub-trip numbers
Table 12-2 Trip indications
Trip
C.Acc
185
Diagnosis
NV Media Card Write fail
The C.Acc trip indicates that the drive was unable to access the NV Media Card. If the trip occurs during the data transfer to
the card then the file being written may be corrupted. If the trip occurs when the data being transferred to the drive then the
data transfer may be incomplete. If a parameter file is transferred to the drive and this trip occurs during the transfer, the
parameters are not saved to non-volatile memory, and so the original parameters can be restored by powering the drive
down and up again.
Recommended actions:
• Check NV Media Card is installed / located correctly
• Replace the NV Media Card
C.bt
The Menu 0 parameter modification cannot be saved to the NV Media Card
Menu 0 changes are automatically saved on exiting edit mode.
177
The C.bt trip will occur if a write to a Menu 0 parameter has been initiated via the keypad by exiting edit mode
and Pr 11.042 is set for auto or boot mode, but the necessary boot file has not been created on the NV Media Card to take
the new parameter value. This occurs when Pr 11.042 is changed to Auto (3) or Boot (4) mode, but the drive is not
subsequently reset.
Recommended actions:
• Ensure that Pr 11.042 is correctly set, and then reset the drive to create the necessary file on the NV Media Card
• Re-attempt the parameter write to the Menu 0 parameter
C.by
178
NV Media Card cannot be accessed as it is being accessed by an option module
The C.by trip indicates that an attempt has been made to access a file on NV Media Card, but the NV Media Card is already
being accessed by an option module. No data is transferred.
Recommended actions:
•
C.cPr
Wait for the option module to finish accessing the NV Media Card and re-attempt the required function
NV Media Card file/data is different to the one in the drive
A compare has been carried out between a file on the NV Media Card, a C.cPr trip is initiated if the parameters on the NV
Media Card are different to the drive.
188
C.d.E
Recommended actions:
• Set Pr mm.000 to 0 and reset the trip
• Check to ensure the correct data block on the
NV Media Card has been used for the compare
NV Media Card data location already contains data
The C.d.E trip indicates that an attempt has been made to store data on a NV Media Card in a data block which already
contains data.
179
Recommended actions:
•
•
C.dAt
Erase the data in data location
Write data to an alternative data location
NV Media Card data not found
The C.dAt trip indicates that an attempt has been made to access non-existent file or block on the NV Media Card.
183
Recommended actions:
•
C.Err
Ensure data block number is correct
NV Media Card data structure error
The C.Err trip indicates that an attempt has been made to access the NV Media Card but an error has been detected in the
data structure on the card. Resetting the trip will cause the drive to erase and create the correct folder structure. The cause
of the trip can be identified by the sub-trip.
Sub-trip
182
Reason
1
The required folder and file structure is not present
2
The HEADER.DAT file is corrupted
3
Two or more files in the <MCDF\> folder have the same file identification number
Recommended actions:
•
•
•
180
Erase all the data block and re-attempt the process
Ensure the card is located correctly
Replace the NV Media Card
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
Safety
information
Product
information
Mechanical
installation
Electrical
installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
Optimization
parameters
motor
Trip
C.FuL
NV Media
Card
Advanced
parameters
Technical data Diagnostics
UL Listing
Diagnosis
NV Media Card full
The C.FuL trip indicates that an attempt has been made to create a data block on a NV Media Card, but there is not enough
space left on the card.
184
Recommended actions:
•
•
C.OPt
Delete a data block or the entire NV Media Card to create space
Use a different NV Media Card
NV Media Card trip; option modules installed are different between source drive and destination drive
The C.OPt trip indicates that parameter data or default difference data is being transferred from the NV Media Card to the
drive, but the option module category is different between the source and destination drives. This trip does not stop the data
transfer, but is a warning that the data for the option module that is different will be set to the default values and not the
values from the card. This trip also applies if a compare is attempted between the data block and the drive.
180
Recommended actions:
•
•
•
C.Pr
175
NV Media Card data blocks are not compatible with the drive derivative
The C.Pr trip is initiated either at power-up or when the card is accessed, If Drive Derivative (11.028) is different between
the source and target drives. This trip can be reset and data can be transferred in either direction between the drive and the
card.
Recommended actions:
•
•
C.rdo
Ensure the correct option module is installed.
Press the red reset button to acknowledge that the parameters for the option module installed will be at their
default values
This trip can be suppressed by setting Pr mm.000 to 9666 and resetting the drive.
Use a different NV Media Card
This trip can be suppressed by setting Pr mm.000 to 9666 and resetting the drive
NV Media Card has the Read Only bit set
The C.rdo trip indicates that an attempt has been made to modify a read-only NV Media Card or a read-only data block. A
NV Media Card is read-only if the read-only flag has been set.
181
Recommended actions:
•
C.rtg
186
Clear the read only flag by setting Pr mm.000 to 9777 and reset the drive. This will clear the read-only flag for all data
blocks in the NV Media Card
NV Media Card Trip; The voltage and / or current rating of the source and destination drives are different
The C.rtg trip indicates that parameter data is being transferred from the NV Media Card to the drive, but the current and /
or voltage ratings are different between source and destination drives. This trip also applies if a compare (using Pr mm.000
set to 8yyy) is attempted between the data block on a NV Media Card and the drive. The C.rtg trip does not stop the data
transfer but is a warning that rating specific parameters with the RA attribute may not be transferred to the destination
drive.
Recommended actions:
•
•
Reset the drive to clear the trip
Ensure that the drive rating dependent parameters have transferred correctly
C.SI
NV Media Card trip; Option module file transfer has failed
174
The C.Sl trip is initiated, if the transfer of an option module file to or from a module failed because the option module does
not respond correctly. If this happens this trip is produced with the sub-trip number indicating the option module slot
number.
C.tyP
NV Media Card parameter set not compatible with current drive mode
The C.tyP trip is produced during a compare if the drive mode in the data block on the NV Media Card is different from the
current drive mode. This trip is also produced if an attempt is made to transfer parameters from a NV Media Card to the
drive if the operating mode in the data block is outside the allowed range of operating modes.
187
Recommended actions:
•
•
•
cL.A1
Ensure the destination drive supports the drive operating mode in the parameter file.
Clear the value in Pr mm.000 and reset the drive
Ensure destination drive operating mode is the same as the source parameter file
Analog input 1 current loss
The cL.A1 trip indicates that a current loss was detected in current mode on Analog input 1 (Terminal 2). In 4-20 mA and
20-4 mA modes loss of input is detected if the current falls below 3 mA.
Recommended actions:
28
•
•
•
•
Check control wiring is correct
Check control wiring is undamaged
Check the Analog Input 1 Mode (07.007)
Current signal is present and greater than 3 mA
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
181
Safety
information
Product
information
Mechanical
installation
Electrical
installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
Optimization
parameters
motor
Trip
CL.bt
NV Media
Card
Advanced
parameters
Technical data Diagnostics
UL Listing
Diagnosis
Trip initiated from the Control Word (06.042)
The CL.bt trip is initiated by setting bit 12 on the control word in Pr 06.042 when the control word is enabled (Pr 06.043 =
On).
Recommended actions:
35
Cur.c
•
•
Check the value of Pr 06.042.
Disable the control word in Control Word Enable (06.043)
Bit 12 of the control word set to a one causes the drive to trip on Control Word
When the control word is enabled, the trip can only be cleared by setting bit 12 to zero
Current calibration range
231
Current calibration range error.
Cur.O
Current feedback offset error
The Cur.O trip indicates that the current offset is too large to be trimmed.
225
d.Ch
97
Recommended actions:
•
•
Drive parameters are being changed
A user action or a file system write is active that is changing the drive parameters and the drive has been commanded to
enable, i.e. Drive Active (10.002) = 1.
Recommended actions:
•
dEr.E
Ensure that there is no possibility of current flowing in the output phases of the drive when the drive is not enabled
Hardware fault – Contact the supplier of the drive
Ensure the drive is not enabled when defaults are being loaded
Derivative file error
Derivative file error with sub-trips:
246
182
Sub-trip
Reason
1
Derivative file different
2
Derivative file missing
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
Safety
information
Product
information
Mechanical
installation
Electrical
installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
Optimization
parameters
motor
Trip
dEr.I
NV Media
Card
Advanced
parameters
Technical data Diagnostics
UL Listing
Diagnosis
Derivative product image error
The dEr.I trip indicates that an error has been detected in the derivative product image. The reason for the trip can be
identified by the sub-trip number.
Sub-trip
248
Reason
Comments
1
Divide by zero
2
Undefined trip
3
Attempted fast parameter access set-up with non-existent
parameter
4
Attempted access to non-existent parameter
5
Attempted write to read-only parameter
6
Attempted and over-range write
7
Attempted read from write-only parameter
30
The image has failed because either its CRC is incorrect, or
there are less than 6 bytes in the image or the image header
version is less than 5
Occurs when the drive powers-up or the image is
programmed. The image tasks will not run
31
The image requires more RAM for heap and stack than can be
provided by the drive.
As 30
32
The image requires an OS function call that is higher than the
maximum allowed.
As 30
33
The ID code within the image is not valid
As 30
34
The derivative image has been changed for an image with a
different derivative number
As 30
40
The timed task has not completed in time and has been
suspended
41
Undefined function called, i.e. a function in the host system
vector table that has not been assigned
As 40
51
Core menu customization table CRC check failed
As 30
52
Customizable menu table CRC check failed
As 30
53
Customizable menu table changed
Occurs when the drive powers-up or the image is
programmed and the table has changed. Defaults
are loaded for the derivative menu and the trip will
keep occurring until drive parameters are saved.
61
The option module installed in slot 1 is not allowed with the
derivative image
As 30
80
Image is not compatible with the control board
Initiated from within the image code
81
Image is not compatible with the control board serial number
As 80
Recommended actions:
•
dESt
199
Two or more parameters are writing to the same destination parameter
The dest trip indicates that destination output parameters of two or more logic functions (Menus 7, 8, 9, 12 or 14) within the
drive are writing to the same parameter.
Recommended actions:
•
dr.CF
232
Contact the supplier of the drive
Set Pr mm.000 to ‘Destinations’ or 12001 and check all visible parameters in all menus for parameter write conflicts
Drive configuration
The hardware ID does not match the user software ID.
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
183
Safety
information
Product
information
Mechanical
installation
Electrical
installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
Optimization
parameters
motor
Trip
EEF
NV Media
Card
Advanced
parameters
Technical data Diagnostics
UL Listing
Diagnosis
Default parameters have been loaded
The EEF trip indicates that default parameters have been loaded. The exact cause/reason of the trip can be identified from
the sub-trip number.
Sub-trip
31
Reason
1
The most significant digit of the internal parameter database version number has changed
2
The CRC's applied to the parameter data stored in internal non-volatile memory indicate that a valid set
of parameters cannot be loaded
3
The drive mode restored from internal non-volatile memory is outside the allowed range for the product
or the derivative image does not allow the previous drive mode
4
The drive derivative image has changed
5
The power stage hardware has changed
6
The internal I/O hardware has changed
7
Reserved
8
The control board hardware has changed
9
The checksum on the non-parameter area of the EEPROM has failed
Recommended actions:
•
•
•
Et
Default the drive and perform a reset
Allow sufficient time to perform a save before the supply to the drive is removed
If the trip persists - return drive to supplier
An External trip is initiated
An Et trip has occurred. The cause of the trip can be identified from the sub trip number displayed after the trip string. See
table below. An external trip can also be initiated by writing a value of 6 in Pr 10.038.
Sub-trip
1
Reason
External Trip (10.032) = 1
6
Recommended actions:
•
•
•
FAN.F
Check the value of Pr 10.032.
Select ‘Dest’ (or enter 12001) in Pr mm.000 and check for a parameter controlling Pr 10.032.
Ensure Pr 10.032 or Pr 10.038 (= 6) is not being controlled by serial comms
Fan fail
Recommended actions:
•
•
•
173
Fi.Ch
247
FI.In
Check that the fan is fitted and connected correctly.
Check that the fan is not obstructed.
Contact the supplier of the drive to replace the fan.
File changed
Recommended action:
•
Power cycle the drive.
Firmware Incompatibility
The FI.In trip indicates that the user firmware is incompatible with the power firmware.
237
Recommended actions:
Re-program the drive with the latest version of the drive firmware for Unidrive M200.
HF01
Data processing error: CPU hardware fault
The HF01 trip indicates that a CPU address error has occurred. This trip indicates that the control PCB on the drive has
failed.
Recommended actions:
•
HF02
Hardware fault – Contact the supplier of the drive
Data processing error: CPU memory management fault
The HF02 trip indicates that a DMAC address error has occurred. This trip indicates that the control PCB on the drive has
failed.
Recommended actions:
•
HF03
Hardware fault – Contact the supplier of the drive
Data processing error: CPU has detected a bus fault
The HF03 trip indicates that a bus fault has occurred. This trip indicates that the control PCB on the drive has failed.
Recommended actions:
• Hardware fault – Contact the supplier of the drive
184
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
Safety
information
Product
information
Mechanical
installation
Electrical
installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
Optimization
parameters
motor
Trip
HF04
NV Media
Card
Advanced
parameters
Technical data Diagnostics
UL Listing
Diagnosis
Data processing error: CPU has detected a usage fault
The HF04 trip indicates that a usage fault has occurred.This trip indicates that the control PCB on the drive has failed.
Recommended actions:
•
Hardware fault – Contact the supplier of the drive
HF05
Reserved
HF06
Reserved
HF07
Data processing error: Watchdog failure
The HF07 trip indicates that a watchdog failure has occurred. This trip indicates that the control PCB on the drive has failed.
Recommended actions:
•
HF08
Hardware fault – Contact the supplier of the drive
Data processing error: CPU Interrupt crash
The HF08 trip indicates that a CPU interrupt crash has occurred. This trip indicates that the control PCB on the drive has
failed. The crash level is indicated by the sub-trip number.
Recommended actions:
•
HF09
Hardware fault – Contact the supplier of the drive
Data processing error: Free store overflow
The HF09 trip indicates that a free store overflow has occurred. Recommended actions:
•
HF10
HF11
Hardware fault – Contact the supplier of the drive
Reserved
Data processing error: Non-volatile memory comms error
The HF11 trip indicates that a non-volatile memory comms error has occurred.
Sub-trip
HF12
Reason
Recommended action
1
Non-volatile memory comms error.
Hardware fault - contact the supplier of the drive.
2
EEPROM size is incompatible with the user firmware. Re-program drive with compatible user firmware.
Data processing error: main program stack overflow
The HF12 trip indicates that the main program stack overflow has occurred. The stack can be identified by the sub-trip
number. This trip indicates that the control PCB on the drive has failed.
Sub-trip
Stack
1
Freewheeling tasks
2
Reserved
3
Main system interrupts
Recommended actions:
Hardware fault - Contact the supplier of the drive.
HF13
Reserved
HF14
Reserved
HF15
Reserved
HF16
Data processing error: RTOS error
The HF16 trip indicates that a RTOS error has occurred. This trip indicates that the control PCB on the drive has failed.
Recommended actions:
•
HF17
Hardware fault – Contact the supplier of the drive
Reserved
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
185
Safety
information
Product
information
Mechanical
installation
Electrical
installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
Optimization
parameters
motor
Trip
HF18
NV Media
Card
Advanced
parameters
Technical data Diagnostics
UL Listing
Diagnosis
Data processing error: Internal flash memory has failed
The HF18 trip indicates that the internal flash memory has failed when writing option module parameter data. The reason
for the trip can be identified by the sub-trip number.
Sub-trip
Reason
1
Option module initialization timed out
2
Programming error while writing menu in flash
3
Erase flash block containing setup menus failed
4
Erase flash block containing application menus failed
5
Incorrect setup menu CRC contained in flash
6
Incorrect application menu CRC contained in flash
Recommended actions:
•
HF19
Hardware fault - Contact the supplier of the drive.
Data processing error: CRC check on the firmware has failed
The HF19 trip indicates that the CRC check on the drive firmware has failed.
Recommended actions:
•
•
It.Ac
Re-program the drive.
Hardware fault - Contact the supplier of the drive.
Output current overload timed out (I2t)
The It.Ac trip indicates a motor thermal overload based on the output current (Pr 05.007) and motor thermal time constant
(Pr 04.015). Pr 04.019 displays the motor temperature as a percentage of the maximum value. The drive will trip on It.Ac
when Pr 04.019 gets to 100 %.
20
It.br
19
Recommended actions:
•
•
•
•
Braking resistor overload timed out (I2t)
The It.br trip indicates that braking resistor overload has timed out. The value in Braking Resistor Thermal Accumulator
(10.039) is calculated using Braking Resistor Rated Power (10.030), Braking Resistor Thermal Time Constant (10.031) and
Braking Resistor Resistance (10.061). The It.br trip is initiated when the Braking Resistor Thermal Accumulator (10.039)
reaches 100 %.
Recommended actions:
•
•
LF.Er
Ensure the load is not jammed / sticking
Check the load on the motor has not changed
Tune the motor rated speed parameter (Pr 5.008) (RFC-A mode only)
Ensure the motor rated current is not zero
Ensure the values entered in Pr 10.030, Pr 10.031 and Pr 10.061 are correct
If an external thermal protection device is being used and the braking resistor software overload protection is not
required, set Pr 10.030, Pr 10.031 or Pr 10.061 to 0 to disable the trip.
Communication has been lost / errors detected between power, control and rectifier modules
This trip is initiated if there is no communications between power, control or the rectifier module or if excessive
communication errors have been detected. The reason for the trip can be identified by the sub-trip number.
90
Source
xx
y
zz
Description
Control system
00
0
01
No communications between the control system and the
power system.
Control system
00
0
02
Excessive communication errors between the control
system and power system.
Control system
01
1
00
Excessive communications errors detected by the rectifier
module.
Recommended actions:
•
no.PS
Hardware fault - contact the supplier of the drive.
No power board
No communication between the power and control boards.
236
Recommended actions:
•
186
Check connection between power and control board.
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
Safety
information
Product
information
Mechanical
installation
Electrical
installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
Optimization
parameters
motor
Trip
O.Ld1
NV Media
Card
Advanced
parameters
Technical data Diagnostics
UL Listing
Diagnosis
Digital output overload
The O.Ld1 trip indicates that the total current drawn from 24 V user supply or from the digital output has exceeded the limit.
A trip is initiated if the following condition is met:
26
• Maximum output current from one digital output is 100 mA.
Recommended actions:
•
•
•
O.SPd
7
Check total loads on digital outputs
Check control wiring is correct
Check output wiring is undamaged
Motor frequency has exceeded the over frequency threshold
In open-loop mode, if the Post-ramp Reference (02.001) exceeds the threshold set in the Over Frequency Threshold
(03.008) in either direction, an O.SPd trip is produced. In RFC-A mode, if the Estimated Frequency (03.002) exceeds the
Over Frequency Threshold in Pr 03.008 in either direction, an O.SPd trip is produced. If Pr 3.008 is set to 0.00 the threshold
is then equal to 1.2 x the value set in Pr 1.006.
Recommended actions:
•
•
Oh.br
101
Braking IGBT over-temperature
The Oh.br over-temperature trip indicates that braking IGBT over-temperature has been detected based on software
thermal model.
Recommended actions:
•
Oh.dc
Reduce the Frequency Controller Proportional Gain (03.010) to reduce the speed overshoot (RFC-A mode only)
Check that a mechanical load is not driving motor
Check braking resistor value is greater than or equal to the minimum resistance value
DC bus over temperature
The Oh.dc trip indicates a DC bus component over temperature based on a software thermal model. The drive includes a
thermal protection system to protect the DC bus components within the drive. This includes the effects of the output current
and DC bus ripple. The estimated temperature is displayed as a percentage of the trip level in Pr 07.035. If this parameter
reaches 100 % then an Oh.dc trip is initiated. The drive will attempt to stop the motor before tripping. If the motor does not
stop in 10 seconds the drive trips immediately.
Source
xx
y
zz
Control system
00
2
00
Description
DC bus thermal model gives trip with sub-trip 0
Recommended actions:
27
Oht.C
•
•
•
•
•
Check the AC supply voltage balance and levels
Check DC bus ripple level
Reduce duty cycle
Reduce motor load
Check the output current stability. If unstable;
Check the motor map settings with motor nameplate (Pr 05.006, Pr 05.007, Pr 05.008, Pr 05.009, Pr 05.010,
Pr 05.011) – (All Modes)
Disable slip compensation (Pr 05.027 = 0) – (Open loop)
Disable dynamic V to F operation (Pr 05.013 = 0) - (Open loop)
Select fixed boost (Pr 05.014 = Fixed) – (Open loop)
Select high stability space vector modulation (Pr 05.019 = 1) – (Open loop)
Disconnect the load and complete a rotating autotune (Pr 05.012)
Reduce frequency loop gains (Pr 03.010, Pr 03.011, Pr 03.012) – (RFC-A)
Control stage over-temperature
This trip indicates that a control stage over-temperature has been detected if Cooling Fan control (06.045) = 0.
219
Recommended actions:
Increase ventilation by setting Cooling Fan control (06.045) > 0.
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
187
Safety
information
Product
information
Mechanical
installation
Electrical
installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
Optimization
parameters
motor
Trip
Oht.I
NV Media
Card
Advanced
parameters
Technical data Diagnostics
UL Listing
Diagnosis
Inverter over temperature based on thermal model
This trip indicates that an IGBT junction over-temperature has been detected based on a software thermal model.
Source
xx
y
zz
Description
Control system
00
1
00
Inverter thermal model gives {Oht.I} trip with sub-trip 0
Recommended actions:
21
Oht.P
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Reduce the selected drive switching frequency
Ensure Auto-switching Frequency Change Disable (05.035) is set to OFF
Reduce duty cycle
Increase acceleration / deceleration rates
Reduce motor load
Check DC bus ripple
Ensure all three input phases are present and balanced
Power stage over temperature
This trip indicates that a power stage over-temperature has been detected. From the sub-trip ‘xxyzz’, the Thermistor
location is identified by ‘zz’.
Source
xx
y
zz
Power system
01
0
zz
Description
Thermistor location in the drive defined by zz
Recommended actions:
22
Oht.r
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Check enclosure / drive fans are still functioning correctly
Force the heatsink fans to run at maximum speed
Check enclosure ventilation paths
Check enclosure door filters
Increase ventilation
Reduce the drive switching frequency
Reduce duty cycle
Increase acceleration / deceleration rates
Reduce motor load
Check the derating tables and confirm the drive is correctly sized for the application.
Use a drive with larger current / power rating
Rectifier over temperature
The Oht.r trip indicates that a rectifier over-temperature has been detected. The thermistor location can be identified from
the sub-trip number.
102
OI.A1
189
188
Source
xx
y
zz
Power
system
Power module
number
Rectifier
number
zz
Description
Thermistor location defined by zz
Recommend actions:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Check the motor and motor cable insulation with an insulation tester
Fit an output line reactor or sinusoidal filter
Force the heatsink fans to run at maximum speed by setting Pr 06.045 = 1
Check enclosure / drive fans are still functioning correctly
Check enclosure ventilation paths
Check enclosure door filters
Increase ventilation
Increase acceleration / deceleration rates
Reduce duty cycle
Reduce motor load
Analog input 1 over-current
Current input on analog input 1 exceeds 24mA.
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
Safety
information
Product
information
Mechanical
installation
Electrical
installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
Optimization
parameters
motor
Trip
OI.AC
NV Media
Card
Advanced
parameters
Technical data Diagnostics
UL Listing
Diagnosis
Instantaneous output over current detected
The instantaneous drive output current has exceeded VM_DRIVE_CURRENT_MAX.
3
xx
y
zz
Control
system
00
0
00
Description
Instantaneous over-current trip when the measured a.c. current
exceeds VM_DRIVE_CURRENT[MAX].
Recommended actions/checks:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
OI.br
Source
Increase acceleration/deceleration rate
If seen during autotune reduce the voltage boost
Check for short circuit on the output cabling
Check integrity of the motor insulation using an insulation tester
Is the motor cable length within limits for the frame size?
Reduce the values in the frequency loop gain parameters - (Pr 03.010, 03.011, 03.012) or (Pr 03.013, 03.014, 03.015)
Reduce the values in the current loop gain parameters
Braking IGBT over current detected: short circuit protection for the braking IGBT activated
The OI.br trip indicates that over current has been detected in braking IGBT or braking IGBT protection has been activated.
4
Source
xx
y
zz
Power
system
01
0
00
Description
Braking IGBT instantaneous over-current trip
Recommended actions:
•
•
•
OI.dC
Check brake resistor wiring
Check braking resistor value is greater than or equal to the minimum resistance value
Check braking resistor insulation
Power module over current detected from IGBT on state voltage monitoring
The OI.dC trip indicates that the short circuit protection for the drive output stage has been activated.
109
OI.Sn
Recommended actions:
•
•
Disconnect the motor cable at the drive end and check the motor and cable insulation with an insulation tester
Replace the drive
Snubber over-current detected
This trip indicates that an over-current condition has been detected in the rectifier snubbing circuit, The exact cause of the
trip can be identified by the sub-trip number.
Source
xx
y
zz
Power
system
01
1
00
Description
Rectifier snubber over-current trip detected.
92
Recommended actions:
•
•
•
•
•
•
OI.SC
Ensure the internal EMC filter is installed
Ensure the motor cable length does not exceed the maximum for selected switching frequency
Check for supply voltage imbalance
Check for supply disturbance such as notching from a DC drive
Check the motor and motor cable insulation with a Megger
Install a output line reactor or sinusoidal filter
Output phase short-circuit
Over-current detected on drive output when enabled. Possible motor earth fault.
Recommended actions:
228
•
•
•
Check for short circuit on the output cabling
Check integrity of the motor insulation using an insulation tester
Is the motor cable length within limits for the frame size?
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
189
Safety
information
Product
information
Mechanical
installation
Electrical
installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
Optimization
parameters
motor
Trip
OPt.d
NV Media
Card
Advanced
parameters
Technical data Diagnostics
UL Listing
Diagnosis
Option module does not acknowledge during drive mode changeover
The OPt.d trip indicates that the option module did not acknowledge notifying the drive that communications with the drive
has been stopped during the drive mode changeover with in the allocated time.
215
Recommended trip:
•
•
Out.P
Reset the trip
If the trip persists replace the option module
Output phase loss detected
The Out.P trip indicates that a phase loss has been detected at the drive output. If Output Phase Loss Detection Enable
(06.059) = 1 then output phase loss is detected as follows:
98
1. When the drive is enabled short pulses are applied to make sure each output phase is connected.
2. During running the output current is monitored and the output phase loss condition is detected if the current contains
more than TBD % negative phase sequence current for TBDs.
Recommended action:
•
•
OV
Check motor and drive connections
To disable the trip set Output Phase Loss Detection Enable (06.059) = 0
DC bus voltage has exceeded the peak level or maximum continuous level for 15 seconds
The OV trip indicates that the DC bus voltage has exceeded the VM_DC_VOLTAGE[MAX] or
VM_DC_VOLTAGE_SET[MAX] for 15 s. The trip threshold varies depending on voltage rating of the drive as shown below.
Voltage rating
VM_DC_VOLTAGE[MAX]
VM_DC_VOLTAGE_SET[MAX]
100
415
410
200
415
410
400
830
815
Sub-trip Identification
2
Source
xx
y
zz
Control
system
00
0
01: Instantaneous trip when the DC bus voltage exceeds
VM_DC_VOLTAGE[MAX].
Control
system
00
0
02: Time delayed trip indicating that the DC bus voltage is above
VM_DC_VOLTAGE_SET[MAX].
Power
system
01
0
00: Instantaneous trip when the DC bus voltage exceeds
VM_DC_VOLTAGE[MAX].
Recommended actions:
• Increase deceleration ramp (Pr 00.004)
• Decrease the braking resistor value (staying above the minimum value)
• Check nominal AC supply level
• Check for supply disturbances which could cause the DC bus to rise
• Check motor insulation using a insulation tester
190
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
Safety
information
Product
information
Mechanical
installation
Electrical
installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
Optimization
parameters
motor
Trip
P.dAt
NV Media
Card
Advanced
parameters
Technical data Diagnostics
UL Listing
Diagnosis
Power system configuration data error
The P.dAt trip indicates that there is an error in the configuration data stored in the power system.
220
Source
xx
y
zz
Description
Control
system
00
0
01
No data was obtained from the power board.
Control
system
00
0
02
There is no data table in node 1.
Control
system
00
0
03
The power system data table is bigger than the space available in
the control pod to store it.
Control
system
00
0
04
The size of the table given in the table is incorrect.
Control
system
00
0
05
Table CRC error.
Control
system
00
0
06
The version number of the generator software that produced the
table is too low.
Control
system
0
0
07
The power data table failed to be stored in the power board.
Power
system
01
0
00
The power data table used internally by the power module has an
error.
Power
system
01
0
01
The power data table that is uploaded to the control system on
power up has an error.
Power
system
01
0
02
The power data table used internally by the power module does
not match the hardware identification of the power module.
Recommended actions:
•
PAd
Hardware fault – Contact the supplier of the drive
Keypad has been removed when the drive is receiving the reference from the keypad
The PAd trip indicates that the drive is in keypad mode [Reference Selector (01.014) = 4 or 6] and the keypad has been
removed or disconnected from the drive.
34
Recommended actions:
•
•
Pb.bt
Re-install keypad and reset
Change Reference Selector (01.014) to select the reference from another source
Power board is in bootloader mode
Power board is in bootloader mode
245
Recommended actions:
•
Pb.Er
Send power board firmware file to reprogram the power board and power cycle drive
Communication has been lost / errors detected between power control
The Pb.Er trip is initiated if there is no communications between power control. The reason for the trip can be identified by
the sub-trip number.
Sub-trip
93
Reason
1
PLL operating region out of lock
2
Power board lost communication with user board
3
User board lost communication with power board
4
Communication CRC error
Recommended actions:
•
Pb.HF
Hardware fault – Contact the supplier of the drive
Power board HF
Power processor hardware fault.
235
Recommended action:
•
Pd.S
Hardware fault - Contact the supplier of the drive
Power down save error
The Pd.S trip indicates that an error has been detected in the power down save parameters saved in non-volatile memory.
37
Recommended actions:
•
Perform a 1001 save in Pr mm.000 to ensure that the trip doesn’t occur the next time the drive is powered up.
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
191
Safety
information
Product
information
Mechanical
installation
Electrical
installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
Optimization
parameters
motor
Trip
PH.Lo
NV Media
Card
Advanced
parameters
Technical data Diagnostics
UL Listing
Diagnosis
Supply phase loss
The PH.Lo trip indicates that the drive has detected an input phase loss or large supply imbalance. The drive will attempt to
stop the motor before this trip is initiated. If the motor cannot be stopped in 10 seconds the trip occurs immediately. The
PH.Lo trip works by monitoring the ripple voltage on the DC bus of the drive, if the DC bus ripple exceeds the threshold, the
drive will trip on PH.Lo. Potential causes of the DC bus ripple are input phase loss, Large supply impedance and severe
output current instability.
Source
xx
Control
system
y
00
0
zz
00: Phase loss detected based on control system feedback. The drive
attempts to stop the drive before tripping unless bit 2 of Action On Trip
Detection (10.037) is set to one.
32
Input phase loss detection can be disabled when the drive is required to operate from the DC supply or from a single phase
supply in Input Phase Loss Detection Mode (06.047).
Recommended actions:
•
•
•
•
•
•
PSU
Check the AC supply voltage balance and level at full load
Check the DC bus ripple level with an isolated oscilloscope
Check the output current stability
Reduce the duty cycle
Reduce the motor load
Disable the phase loss detection, set Pr 06.047 to 2.
Internal power supply fault
The PSU trip indicates that one or more internal power supply rails are outside limits or overloaded.
5
Source
xx
y
Control
system
00
0
Power
system
01
1
zz
00
Description
Internal power supply overload.
Recommended actions:
•
•
r.ALL
Remove the option module and perform a reset
There is a hardware fault within the drive – return the drive to the supplier
RAM allocation error
The r.ALL trip indicates that an option module derivative image has requested more parameter RAM than is allowed. The
RAM allocation is checked in order of resulting sub-trip numbers, and so the failure with the highest sub-trip number is
given. The sub-trip is calculated as (parameter size) + (parameter type) + sub-array number.
227
Parameter size
1 bit
8 bit
16 bit
32 bit
64 bit
Value
1
2
3
4
5
Sub-array
Derivative image
Option slot 1 set-up
r.b.ht
250
192
Parameter type
Volatile
User save
Power-down save
Menus
29
15
Value
0
1
2
Value
2
4
Hot rectifier/brake
Over-temperature detected on input rectifier or braking IGBT.
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
Safety
information
Product
information
Mechanical
installation
Electrical
installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
Optimization
parameters
motor
Trip
Reserved
NV Media
Card
Advanced
parameters
Technical data Diagnostics
UL Listing
Diagnosis
Reserved trips
These trip numbers are reserved trip numbers for future use.
Trip Number
01
09
11 - 12
14 - 17
23, 29
38 - 39
94 - 96
99
103 - 108
110 - 111
168 - 174
176
190 - 198
205 - 214
216 - 217
223 - 224
234
238 - 244
249
252 - 254
Reserved resettable trip
09
Reserved resettable trip
11 - 12
Reserved resettable trip
14 - 17
Reserved resettable trip
23, 29
Reserved resettable trip
38 - 39
Reserved resettable trip
94 -96
Reserved resettable trip
99
Reserved resettable trip
103 - 108
Reserved resettable trip
110 - 111
Reserved resettable trip
168 - 174
Reserved resettable trip
176
Reserved resettable trip
190 – 198
Reserved resettable trip
205 - 214
Reserved resettable trip
216 - 217
Reserved resettable trip
223 - 224
Reserved resettable trip
234
Reserved resettable trip
238 - 244
rS
Description
01
Reserved non-resettable trip
249
Reserved resettable trip
252-254
Reserved resettable trip
Measured resistance has exceeded the parameter range
The rS trip indicates that the measured stator resistance during an autotune test has exceeded the maximum possible
value of Stator Resistance (05.017).
The stationary autotune is initiated using the autotune function (Pr 05.012) or in open loop vector mode (Pr 05.014) on the
first run command after power up in mode 4 (Ur_I) or on every run command in modes 0 (Ur_S) or 3 (Ur_Auto). This trip
can occur if the motor is very small in comparison to the rating of the drive.
33
SCL
30
SL.dF
Recommended actions:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Check the motor cable / connections
Check the integrity of the motor stator winding using a insulation tester
Check the motor phase to phase resistance at the drive terminals
Check the motor phase to phase resistance at the motor terminals
Ensure the stator resistance of the motor falls within the range of the drive model
Select fixed boost mode (Pr 05.014 = Fd) and verify the output current waveforms with an oscilloscope
Replace the motor
Control word watchdog has timed out
The SCL trip indicates that the control word has been enabled and has timed out
Recommended actions:
Option module in option slot 1 has changed
The SL.dF trip indicates that the option module in option slot 1 on the drive is a different type to that installed when
parameters were last saved on the drive. The reason for the trip can be identified by the sub-trip number.
Sub-trip
1
No module was installed previously
2
A module with the same identifier is installed, but the set-up menu for this option slot has been
changed, and so default parameters have been loaded for this menu.
A module with the same identifier is installed, but the applications menu for this option slot has been
changed, and so default parameters have been loaded for this menu.
A module with the same identifier is installed, but the set-up and applications menu for this option slot
have been changed, and so default parameters have been loaded for these menus.
Shows the identifier of the module previously installed.
3
204
Reason
4
>99
Recommended actions:
•
•
Turn off the power, ensure the correct option module is installed in the option slot and re-apply the power.
Confirm that the currently installed option module is correct, ensure option module parameters are set correctly and
perform a user save in Pr mm.000.
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
193
Safety
information
Product
information
Mechanical
installation
Electrical
installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
Optimization
parameters
motor
Trip
SL.Er
202
Advanced
parameters
Technical data Diagnostics
UL Listing
Diagnosis
Option module in option slot 1 has detected a fault
The SL.Er trip indicates that the option module in option slot 1 on the drive has detected an error. The reason for the error
can be identified by the sub-trip number.
Recommended actions:
•
SL.HF
NV Media
Card
See relevant Option Module User Guide for details of the trip
Option module 1 hardware fault
The SL.HF trip indicates that the option module in option slot 1 on the drive has indicated a hardware fault. The possible
causes of the trip can be identified by the sub-trip number.
Sub-trip
200
Reason
1
The module category cannot be identified
2
All the required customized menu table information has not been supplied or the tables supplied are corrupt
3
There is insufficient memory available to allocate the comms buffers for this module
4
The module has not indicated that it is running correctly during drive power-up
5
Module has been removed after power-up or it has stopped working
6
The module has not indicated that it has stopped accessing drive parameters during a drive mode change
7
The module has failed to acknowledge that a request has been made to reset the drive processor
Recommended actions:
•
•
•
SL.nF
Ensure the option module is installed correctly
Replace the option module
Replace the drive
Option module in option slot 1 has been removed
The SL.nF trip indicates that the option module in option slot 1 on the drive has been removed since the last power up.
Recommended actions:
203
SL.tO
201
•
•
•
Option module watchdog function service error
The SL.tO trip indicates that the option module installed in Slot 1 has started the option watchdog function and then failed to
service the watchdog correctly.
Recommended actions:
•
So.St
Ensure the option module is installed correctly.
Re-install the option module.
To confirm that the removed option module is no longer required perform a save function in Pr mm.000.
Replace the option module
Soft start relay failed to close, soft start monitor failed
The So.St trip indicates that the soft start relay in the drive failed to close or the soft start monitoring circuit has failed.
The cause of the trip can be identified by the sub-trip number.
Sub-trip
226
Reason
1
Soft-start failure
2
DC bus capacitor failure on 110 V drive (size 2 only)
Recommended actions:
•
St.HF
221
The St.HF trip indicates that a hardware trip (HF01 –HF19) has occurred and the drive has been power cycled. The sub-trip
number identifies the HF trip i.e. stored HF.19.
Recommended actions:
•
th
Hardware fault – Contact the supplier of the drive
Hardware trip has occurred during last power down
Enter 1299 in Pr mm.000 and press reset to clear the trip
Motor thermistor over-temperature
The th trip indicates that the motor thermistor connected to terminal 14 (digital input 5) on the control connections has
indicated a motor over temperature.
24
Recommended actions:
•
•
194
Check motor temperature
Check thermistor continuity
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
Safety
information
Product
information
Mechanical
installation
Electrical
installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
Optimization
parameters
motor
Trip
th.br
NV Media
Card
Advanced
parameters
Technical data Diagnostics
UL Listing
Diagnosis
Brake resistor over temperature
The th.br trip is initiated if the hardware based braking resistor thermal monitoring is connected and the resistor overheats.
If the braking resistor is not used, then this trip must be disabled with bit 3 of Action On Trip Detection (10.037) to prevent
this trip.
10
Recommended actions:
•
•
•
tH.Fb
Check brake resistor wiring
Check braking resistor value is greater than or equal to the minimum resistance value
Check braking resistor insulation
Internal thermistor has failed
The tH.Fb trip indicates that an internal thermistor has failed. The thermistor location can be identified by the sub-trip
number.
218
Source
xx
y
Power system
01
0
zz
Thermistor location defined by zz
Recommended actions:
•
thS
Hardware fault – Contact the supplier of the drive
Motor thermistor short circuit
The thS trip indicates that the motor thermistor connected to terminal 14 (digital input 5) on the control connections, is short
circuit or low impedance (<50 Ω).
25
Recommended actions:
•
•
tun.S
Check thermistor continuity
Replace motor / motor thermistor
Autotune test stopped before completion
The drive was prevented from completing an autotune test, because either the drive enable or the drive run were removed.
18
Recommended actions:
•
tunE
Check the drive enable signal (Terminal 11) was active during the autotune
Measured inertia has exceeded the parameter range
The drive has tripped during a rotating autotune or mechanical load measurement test. The cause of the trip can be
identified from the associated sub-trip number.
Sub-trip
13
1
Reason
Measured inertia has exceeded the parameter range during a mechanical load measurement
Recommended actions:
•
U.OI
8
U.S
Check motor cable wiring is correct
User OI ac
The U.OI trip is initiated if the output current of the drive exceeds the trip level set by User Over Current Trip Level (04.041).
User Save error / not completed
The U.S trip indicates that an error has been detected in the user save parameters saved in non-volatile memory. For example,
following a user save command, If the power to the drive was removed when the user parameters were being saved.
36
Recommended actions:
•
•
US.24
91
Perform a user save in Pr mm.000 to ensure that the trip doesn’t occur the next time the drive is powered up.
Ensure that the drive has enough time to complete the save before removing the power to the drive.
User 24 V supply is not present on the adaptor interface terminals (1,2)
A US.24 trip is initiated if the User Supply Select (06.072), is set to 1 and no user 24 V supply is present on the user 24 V
input on the AI-Backup adaptor.
Recommended actions:
•
Ensure the user 24 V supply is present on the user terminals on the adaptor interface.
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
195
Safety
information
Product
information
Mechanical
installation
Electrical
installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
Optimization
parameters
motor
NV Media
Card
Advanced
parameters
Technical data Diagnostics
UL Listing
Table 12-3 Serial communications look up table
No
Trip
No
Trip
No
Trip
1
rES
90
LF.Er
200
SL.HF
2
OV
91
US.24
201
SL.tO
3
OI.AC
92
OI.Sn
202
SL.Er
4
OI.br
93
Pb.Er
203
SL.nF
5
PSU
94 - 95
rES
204
SL.dF
6
Et
96
rES
205 - 214
rES
7
O.SPd
97
d.Ch
215
OPt.d
8
U.OI
98
Out.P
216 - 217
rES
9
rES
99
rES
218
tH.Fb
10
th.br
100
rESEt
219
Oht.C
11
rES
101
Oh.br
220
P.dAt
12
rES
102
Oht.r
221
St.HF
13
tunE
103 - 108
rES
222
rES
14 - 17
rES
109
OI.dc
223 - 224
rES
18
tun.S
110 - 111
rES
225
Cur.O
19
It.br
112 - 167
rES
226
So.St
20
It.Ac
168 - 172
rES
227
r.ALL
21
Oht.I
173
Fan.F
228
OI.SC
22
Oht.P
174
C.SI
229
rES
23
rES
175
C.Pr
230
rES
24
th
176
rES
231
Cur.c
25
thS
177
C.bt
232
dr.CF
26
O.Ld1
178
C.by
233
rES
27
Oh.dc
179
C.d.E
234
rES
28
cL.A1
180
C.OPt
235
Pb.HF
29
rES
181
C.rdo
236
no.PS
30
SCL
182
C.Err
237
FI.In
31
EEF
183
C.dAt
238 - 244
rES
32
PH.Lo
184
C.FuL
245
Pb.bt
33
rS
185
C.Acc
246
dEr.E
34
PAd
186
C.rtg
247
Fi.Ch
35
CL.bt
187
C.tyP
248
dEr.I
36
U.S
188
C.CPr
249
rES
37
Pd.S
189
OI.A1
250
r.b.ht
38
rES
190
rES
252 - 254
rES
39
rES
191 - 198
rES
255
rSt.L
40 - 89
rES
199
dESt
The trips can be grouped into the following categories. It should be noted that a trip can only occur when the drive is not tripped or is already tripped
but with a trip with a lower priority number.
196
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
Safety
information
Product
information
Table 12-4
Mechanical
installation
Electrical
installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
Optimization
parameters
motor
NV Media
Card
Advanced
parameters
Technical data Diagnostics
UL Listing
Trip categories
Priority
Category
Trips
Comments
1
Internal faults
HF01, HF02, HF03, HF04,
HF05, HF06, HF07, HF08,
HF09, HF10, HF11, HF12,
HF13, HF14, HF15, HF16,
HF17, HF18, HF19,
1
Stored HF trip
{St.HF}
This trip cannot be cleared unless 1299 is entered into Parameter
(mm.000) and a reset is initiated.
2
Non-resettable trips
Trip numbers 218 to 247,
{Sl.HF}
These trips cannot be reset.
3
Volatile memory failure
{EEF}
This can only be reset if Parameter mm.000 is set to 1233 or 1244, or if
Load Defaults (11.043) is set to a non-zero value.
4
NV Media Card trips
Trip numbers 174, 175
and 177 to 188
These trips are priority 5 during power-up.
4
Internal 24V
{PSU}
5
Trips with extended reset
times
{OI.AC}, {OI.br}, and
{OI.dc} Fan.f
These trips cannot be reset until 10 s after the trip was initiated.
5
Phase loss and d.c. link
power circuit protection
{PH.Lo} and
{Oh.dc}
The drive will attempt to stop the motor before tripping if a {PH.Lo}. 000
trip occurs unless this feature has been disabled (see Action On Trip
Detection (10.037). The drive will always attempt to stop the motor before
tripping if an {Oh.dc} occurs.
5
Standard trips
All other trips
12.5
These indicate internal problems and cannot be reset. All drive features
are inactive after any of these trips occur.
Internal / Hardware trips
Trips {HF01} to {HF19} are internal faults that do not have trip numbers. If one of these trips occurs, the main drive processor has detected an
irrecoverable error. All drive functions are stopped and the trip message will be displayed on the drive keypad. If a non permanent trip occurs this may
be reset by power cycling the drive. On power up after it has been power cycled the drive will trip on St.HF. Enter 1299 in mm.000 to clear the Stored
HF trip.
12.6
Alarm indications
In any mode, an alarm is an indication given on the display by alternating the alarm string with the drive status string display. If an action is not taken
to eliminate any alarm except "tuning and LS" the drive may eventually trip. Alarms are not displayed when a parameter is being edited.
Table 12-5
Alarm indications
Alarm string
Description
br.res
Brake resistor overload. Braking Resistor Thermal Accumulator (10.039) in the drive has reached 75.0 % of the value at which
the drive will trip.
OV.Ld
Motor Protection Accumulator (04.019) in the drive has reached 75.0 % of the value at which the drive will trip and the load on the
drive is >100 %.
d.OV.Ld
tuning
LS
Drive over temperature. Percentage Of Drive Thermal Trip Level (07.036) in the drive is greater than 90 %.
The autotune procedure has been initialized and an autotune in progress.
Limit switch active. Indicates that a limit switch is active and that is causing the motor to be stopped.
Opt.AI
Option slot alarm.
Lo.AC
Low voltage mode. See Low AC Alarm (10.107).
I.AC.Lt
Current limit active. See Current Limit Active (10.009).
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
197
Safety
information
12.7
Product
information
Mechanical
installation
Electrical
installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
Optimization
parameters
motor
NV Media
Card
Advanced
parameters
Technical data Diagnostics
UL Listing
Status indications
Table 12-6
Status indications
String
Description
Drive output stage
inh
The drive is inhibited and cannot be run. Either the drive enable signal is not applied to the drive enable
terminals or Pr 06.015 is set to 0.
Disabled
rdy
The drive is ready to run. The drive enable is active, but the drive inverter is not active because the final
drive run is not active.
Disabled
StoP
The drive is stopped / holding zero speed.
Enabled
S.Loss
Supply loss condition has been detected.
Enabled
dc.inJ
The drive is applying dc injection braking.
Enabled
Er
The drive has tripped and no longer controlling the motor. The trip code appears in the display.
Disabled
UV
The drive is in the under voltage state either in low voltage or high voltage mode.
Disabled
Table 12-7
Option module and NV Media Card and other status indications at power-up
String
Status
PS.LOAD
Waiting for power stage
The drive is waiting for the processor in the power stage to respond after power-up.
LOAD OPtion
Waiting for an option module
The drive is waiting for the Option Module to respond after power-up.
UPLOAD
Loading parameter database
At power-up it may be necessary to update the parameter database held in the drive because an option module has changed. This may involve data
transfer between the drive and option module. During this period 'UPLOAD' is displayed.
12.8
Displaying the trip history
The drive retains a log of the last ten trips that have occurred. Trip 0 (10.020) to Trip 9 (10.029) store the most recent 10 trips that have occurred
where Trip 0 (10.020) is the most recent and Trip 9 (10.029) is the oldest. When a new trip occurs it is written to Trip 0 (10.020) and all the other trips
move down the log, with oldest being lost. The date and time when each trip occurs are also stored in the date and time log, i.e. Trip 0 Date (10.041)
to Trip 9 Time (10.060). The date and time are taken from Date (06.016) and Time (06.017). Some trips have sub-trip numbers which give more detail
about the reason for the trip. If a trip has a sub-trip number its value is stored in the sub-trip log, i.e. Trip 0 Sub-trip Number (10.070) to Trip 9 Sub-trip
Number (10.079). If the trip does not have a sub-trip number then zero is stored in the sub-trip log.
If any parameter between Pr 10.020 and Pr 10.029 inclusive is read by serial communication, then the trip number in Table 12-2 is the value
transmitted.
NOTE
The trip logs can be reset by writing a value of 255 in Pr 10.038.
12.9
Behaviour of the drive when tripped
If the drive trips, the output of the drive is disabled so the load coasts to a stop. If any trip occurs, the following read only parameters are frozen until
the trip is cleared. This is to help diagnose the cause of the trip.
Parameter
Description
01.001
Frequency reference
01.002
Pre-skip filter reference
01.003
Pre-ramp reference
02.001
Post-ramp reference
03.001
Final demand ref
03.002
Estimated frequency
03.003
Frequency error
03.004
Frequency controller output
04.001
Current magnitude
04.002
Active current
04.017
Reactive current
05.001
Output frequency
05.002
Output voltage
05.003
Power
05.005
DC bus voltage
07.001
Analog input 1
07.002
Analog input 2
07.037
Temperature nearest to trip level
If the parameters are not required to be frozen then this can be disabled by setting bit 4 of Pr 10.037.
198
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
Safety
information
13
13.1
Product
information
Mechanical
installation
Electrical
installation
Getting
started
Basic
Running the
Optimization
parameters
motor
Mounting
Environment
Drives are able to meet the following UL/NEMA environmental ratings:
•
•
•
•
Type 1. The drive must either be installed with a UL Type 1 kit or be
installed in a Type 1 enclosure.
Type 12. The drive must be installed in a Type 12 enclosure.
The remote keypad is rated to both UL Type 1 and UL Type 12.
Drives must be installed in a pollution degree 2 environment or
better.
13.4
Electrical installation
The following precautions must be observed:
•
•
•
•
Drives are rated for use at 40 °C and 50 °C surrounding air
temperature.
The temperature rating of the power cables must be at least 75 °C.
If the drive control stage is powered from an external power supply
(+24 V), the power supply must be listed or recognized to UL class 2
with appropriate fusing.
Ground connections must use UL listed closed loop (ring) terminals.
13.5
UL listed accessories
The following options are UL listed:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
CI-Keypad
CI-485 Adaptor
AI-485 Adaptor
AI-Backup Adaptor
Remote Keypad
UL Type 1 kit
NV Media card
13.6
Motor overload protection
Thermal memory retention
The drive is provided with motor load and speed sensitive overload
protection with thermal memory retention that complies with the US
National Electrical Code (NFPA 70) clause 430.126 and Underwriters
Laboratories Standard UL508C, clause 20.1.11 (a). The purpose of this
protection is to protect both drive and motor from dangerous overheating
in the event of repeated overload or failure to start, even if the power to
the drive is removed between overload events.
For full explanation of the thermal protection system, refer to section
8.4 Motor thermal protection on page 95.
In order to comply with UL requirements for thermal memory retention, it
is necessary to set the Thermal Protection Mode (04.016) to zero; and
the Low Frequency Thermal Protection Mode (04.025) must be set to 1 if
the drive is operated in Heavy Duty mode.
Alternatively, an external thermal sensor or switch may be used as a
means of motor and drive overload protection that complies with the
requirements of UL508C, clause 20.1.11 (b). This protection method is
particularly recommended where independent forced cooling of the
motor is used, because of the risk of overheating if the cooling is lost.
External thermal sensor
The drive is provided with a means to accept and act upon a signal from
a thermal sensor or switch imbedded in the motor or from an external
protective relay. Refer to section 4.10.2 Control terminal specification on
page 70.
13.9
•
•
•
•
•
Electrical ratings
Drives are listed for connection to an AC supply capable of
delivering no more than 100 kA symmetrical amperes. See Table 4-5
Power and current ratings are given in Table 11-1to Table 11-5.
Fuse and circuit breaker (size 1 only with short circuit rating of 10
kA. Only the listed DIVQ/DIVQ7 type SU203UP ABB (E212323)
circuit breaker may be used) ratings are given in Table 4-6to Table 49.
Unless indicated otherwise in Table 4-6to Table 4-9, fuses may be
any UL listed Class J or CC with a voltage rating of at least 600 Vac.
Unless indicated otherwise in Table 4-6to Table 4-9, circuit breakers
may be any UL listed type, category control number: DIVQ or
DIVQ7, with a voltage rating of at least 600 Vac.
13.10
cUL requirements for frame size 4
For frame size 4, models Mxxx-042 00133A, Mxxx-042 00176A, Mxxx044 00135A and Mxxx-044 00170A, transient surge suppression shall
be installed on the line side of this equipment and shall be rated 480 Vac
(phase to ground), 480 Vac (phase to phase), suitable for overvoltage
category III, and shall provide protection for a rated impulse withstand
voltage peak of 6 kV and a clamping voltage of maximum 2400 V.
NOTE
The drives are installed with solid state motor overload protection.
Mxxx denotes M100, M101, M200, M201, M300 or M400.
The default overload protection level is less than 150 % of full load rated
current for open loop operation.
13.11
Group installation
The default overload protection level is less than 180 % of full load rated
current for rotor flux control operation.
13.11.1
Definition
In order for the motor protection to work correctly, the motor rated
current must be entered into Pr 00.006 or Pr 05.007.
The protection level may be adjusted below 150% if required. See
section 8.3 Current limits on page 95.
13.7
UL Listing
General
Standard or surface mounted. This is described in section
3.5.1 Surface mounting on page 28.
Bookcase mounted. Drives are mounted side by side with no space
between them. This configuration minimizes the overall width of the
installation.
13.3
Diagnostics
Drives incorporate thermal memory retention that complies fully with the
requirements of UL508C.
Drives can be installed in the following configurations:
•
Technical data
13.8
UL listings can be viewed online at www.UL.com. The UL file number is
E171230.
•
Advanced
parameters
UL Listing
Drive sizes 1 to 6 have been assessed to meet both UL and cUL
requirements.
13.2
NV Media
Card
Motor overspeed protection
The drive is installed with solid state motor overspeed protection.
However, this feature does not provide the level of protection provided
by an independent, high-integrity overspeed protection device.
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
Group Installation Definition: A motor branch circuit for two or more
motors, or one or more motors with other loads, protected by a circuit
breaker or a single set of fuses.
13.11.2
Limitations on use
All motors rated less than 1 hp
The drives may be used in group installations where each of the motors
is rated 1 hp or less. The full-load current rating of each motor must not
exceed 6 A. The motor drive provides individual overload protection in
accordance with the NEC clause 430.32.
199
Safety
information
Product
information
Mechanical
installation
Electrical
installation
Getting
started
Basic
parameters
Running
the motor
Optimization
NV Media
Card
Advanced
parameters
Technical data
Diagnostics
UL Listing
Smallest motor protected
The drives may be used in group installations where the smallest motor
is protected by the branch fuses or circuit breaker. Limits on the current
rating of branch circuit protective fuses and circuit breakers are given in
the NEC Table: 430.52.
Other installations
The motor drives described in this user guide are not UL listed for group
installation.
200
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
Index
A
E
AC supply contactor ................................................................56
AC supply requirements ..........................................................49
Acceleration ..................................................................... 87, 88
Access .....................................................................................19
Accuracy ...............................................................................168
Acoustic noise .......................................................................168
Advanced menus ....................................................................75
Advanced parameters ...........................................................100
Air-flow in a ventilated enclosure .............................................35
Alarm .....................................................................................197
Alarm Indications ...................................................................197
Altitude ..................................................................................167
Autotune ..................................................................................90
Electrical safety ...................................................................... 19
Electrical terminals ................................................................. 40
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) ....................... 20, 62, 176
EMC - Compliance with generic emission standards ............. 66
EMC - General requirements .................................................. 64
EMC - Variations in the wiring ................................................ 67
EMC filter dimensions (external, overall) .............................. 178
EMC filter torque settings (external) ..................................... 178
EMC filters (optional external) .............................................. 177
Emission ............................................................................... 177
Enclosure .......................................................................... 32, 37
Enclosure Layout .................................................................... 34
Enclosure sizing ..................................................................... 35
Environmental protection ........................................................ 19
External EMC filter .................................................................. 38
B
Basic requirements .................................................................83
Braking ....................................................................................59
Braking resistor values ..........................................................175
C
F
Field weakening (constant power) operation .......................... 96
Fire protection ......................................................................... 19
Fixed V/F mode ...................................................................... 13
Fuse ratings .......................................................................... 169
Fuse types .............................................................................. 56
Cable clearances ....................................................................66
Cable lengths (maximum) .....................................................173
Cable size ratings ..................................................................169
Cable types and lengths ..........................................................56
Cautions ....................................................................................7
Compliance with EN 61800-3
2004 66
Control connections ................................................................69
Control terminal specification ..................................................70
Cooling ....................................................................................19
Cooling method .....................................................................167
Current limits ...........................................................................95
Current ratings ......................................................................159
Getting Started ....................................................................... 72
Ground connections ......................................................... 56, 65
Ground leakage ...................................................................... 61
Ground terminals .................................................................... 41
Grounding bracket .................................................................. 62
D
I
DC bus voltage ........................................................................59
Deceleration ...............................................................59, 87, 88
Defaults (restoring parameter) ................................................76
Derating .................................................................................159
Destination parameter .............................................................69
Diagnostics ............................................................................179
Dimensions (overall) ..............................................................169
Display ....................................................................................72
Display messages ...................................................................75
Input inductor calculation ........................................................ 49
Internal EMC filter ................................................................... 63
IP Rating (Ingress protection) ............................................... 167
Isolator switch ......................................................................... 68
Items supplied with the drive .................................................. 18
G
H
Hazardous areas .................................................................... 20
Humidity ................................................................................ 167
K
Keypad ................................................................................... 72
L
Line reactors ................................................................... 49, 167
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
201
M
P
Maximum frequency ................................................................96
Mechanical Installation ............................................................19
Menu 0 ....................................................................................74
Menu 01 - Frequency / speed reference ...............................110
Menu 02 - Ramps .................................................................114
Menu 03 - Slave frequency, speed feedback and
speed control ..................................................................117
Menu 04 - Torque and current control ..................................122
Menu 05 - Motor control ........................................................125
Menu 06 - Sequencer and clock ...........................................129
Menu 07 - Analog I/O ............................................................131
Menu 08 - Digital I/O .............................................................134
Menu 09 - Programmable logic, motorized pot and
binary sum ......................................................................138
Menu 10 - Status and trips ....................................................142
Menu 11 - General drive set-up ............................................144
Menu 12 - Threshold detectors and variable selectors .........145
Menu 14 - User PID controller ..............................................150
Menu 18 - Application menu 1 ..............................................154
Menu 19 - Application menu 2 ..............................................155
Menu 20 - Application menu 3 ..............................................155
Menu 21 - Second motor parameters ...................................156
Menu 22 - Additional Menu 0 set-up .....................................157
Menu structure ........................................................................74
Minimum connections to get the motor running in
any operating mode ..........................................................84
Mode parameter ......................................................................69
Motor (running the motor) .......................................................83
Motor cable - interruptions ......................................................68
Motor isolator / disconnector-switch ........................................68
Motor number of poles ............................................................89
Motor operation .......................................................................59
Motor rated current .................................................................89
Motor rated current (maximum) ..............................................95
Motor rated frequency .............................................................89
Motor rated power factor .........................................................89
Motor rated speed ...................................................................89
Motor rated voltage .................................................................89
Motor requirements ...............................................................167
Motor thermal protection .........................................................95
Motor winding voltage .............................................................58
Multiple motors ........................................................................58
Parameter access level ...........................................................76
Parameter ranges .................................................................103
Parameter security ..................................................................76
Planning the installation ..........................................................19
Power ratings ........................................................................159
Power terminals ......................................................................41
Product information ...................................................................9
N
NEMA rating ..........................................................................168
Notes .........................................................................................7
O
Open loop mode .....................................................................13
Open loop vector mode ...........................................................13
Operating mode (changing) ............................................. 75, 83
Operating modes ....................................................................13
Optimization ............................................................................89
Options ....................................................................................17
Output contactor .....................................................................59
Output frequency ..................................................................168
Q
Quick start commissioning ......................................................88
Quick start commissioning / Start-up ......................................87
Quick start connections ...........................................................83
R
Ratings ............................................................................. 50, 53
Reactor current ratings ................................................... 49, 167
Relay contacts .........................................................................71
Residual current device (RCD) ...............................................61
Resistances (minimum) ...........................................................59
Resolution .............................................................................168
RFC-A mode ...........................................................................13
Routine maintenance ..............................................................43
S
Safety Information .............................................................. 7, 19
Saving parameters ..................................................................75
Sealed enclosure - sizing ........................................................35
Serial comms lead ...................................................................69
Serial communications connections ........................................69
Serial communications look-up table ....................................180
Single line descriptions ...........................................................78
Speed range ..........................................................................168
Start up time ..........................................................................168
Starts per hour ......................................................................168
Status ....................................................................................198
Status Indications ..................................................................198
Storage ..................................................................................167
Supply requirements .............................................................167
Supply types ............................................................................49
Surface mounting the drive .....................................................28
Surge immunity of control circuits - long cables and
connections outside a building ..........................................68
Surge suppression for analog and bipolar inputs and outputs 69
Surge suppression for digital and unipolar inputs and outputs 68
Switching frequency ................................................................96
T
Technical data .......................................................................159
Temperature ..........................................................................167
Terminal block in the enclosure ..............................................68
Terminal cover removal ...........................................................20
Terminal sizes .........................................................................41
Thermal protection circuit for the braking resistor ...................60
Torque settings .............................................................. 42, 176
Trip ........................................................................................179
Trip History ............................................................................198
Trip Indications ......................................................................179
U
User Security ...........................................................................76
202
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
V
Ventilation ........................................................................ 32, 37
Vibration ................................................................................168
Voltage mode ................................................................... 90, 91
W
Warnings ...................................................................................7
Weights .................................................................................169
Unidrive M200 / M201 User Guide
Issue Number: 4
203
0478-0042-04
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement